Home

Quadrus MINI Velocity User`s Manual

1. Hardware Required Caution Be sure that all cables are connected BEFORE applying power to the system Always power down BEFORE disconnecting any cables Quadrus MINI Velocity User s Manual Quick Start Step 2 Connect the System Connecting by RS 232 RS 422 RS 485 Connect the imager 1 to the IB 131 IC 332 interface 2 and 3 Connect the host cable 6 to the host and to the host port on the IB 131 3 Connect the object detector 5 to the IB 131 3 Connect the power supply 4 to the IB 131 3 Apply power to the imager Important If you are using a USB model you must connect the device to the host computer before powering on Otherwise the unit will not be recognized as a USB device Scanner 3 OG 1S0H Network Hardware Configuration Caution Be sure that all cables are connected BEFORE applying power to the system Always power down BEFORE disconnecting any cables Quadrus MINI Velocity User s Manua
2. f gt 2X 2 56 1 25 4 mm 20 depth 20 5 1 mm 15 3 9 mm m 1 5 38 mm 1 8 45 7 mm Front ys 2X M3X0 5 __ een 5 mm depth 51 12 9 mm 26 6 6 mm 1 25 31 8 mm Base Quadrus MINI Velocity Dimensions Beeper Good Read match mismatch No Read serial command confirmation on off Discrete I O Trigger Input 5 to 28VDC rated 0 16 mA New Master 5 to 28VDC rated 0 16 mA Outputs 1 2 3 5V TTL compatible can sink 10 mA and source 10mA Optional I O Optoisolated with IC 332 accessory Communication Protocols Standard Interfaces RS 232 RS 422 USB Symbologies 2D Symbologies Data Matrix ECC 0 200 Aztec Code QR Code Micro QR Code Stacked Symbologies PDF417 MicroPDF417 GS1 DataBar RSS Composite and Stacked Linear Symbologies Code 39 Code 128 BC412 Interleaved 2 of 5 Pharmacode UPC EAN Codabar Code 93 Postal Read Parameters Pitch 30 Skew 30 Tilt 360 Decode Rate Up to 4 decodes per second Focal Range 2 to 6 50 8 to 152 4 mm autofocus A 2 Quadrus MINI Velocity User s Manual Read Ranges Standard Deny fiak vt Wane Sanare omeny bash ot Flt Standard Density Utratigh Density Fla or iow Appendices iva High Deny Depth or eta Ultra High Density Quadrus MINI Velocity User s Manual Narrow bar width Field of View Read Range
3. Codabar lt K471 status start stop match start stop output large intercharacter gap fixed symbol length status symbol length check character type check character output gt Interleaved 2 of 5 lt K472 status check character status check character output status symbol length 1 symbol length 2 guard bar status range mode status gt UPC EAN lt K473 UPC status EAN status supplemental status separator status separator character supplemental type format UPC E as UPC A gt Code 128 EAN 128 lt K474 status fixed symbol length status fixed symbol length EAN 128 status output format application record separator status application record separator character application record brackets application record padding gt Code 93 lt K475 status fixed symbol length status symbol length gt PDF417 lt K476 status unusea fixed symbol length status fixed symbol length unused codeword collection gt Pharmacode lt K477 status fixed bar count status fixed bar count minimum bar count bar width mode direction fixed threshold value gt Data Matrix lt K479 ECC 200 status ECC 000 status ECC 050 status ECC 080 status ECC 100 status ECC 140 status ECC 120 status ECC 130 status gt QR Code lt K480 status gt BC412 lt K481 status check character output fixed symbol length status fixed symbol length gt DataBar 14 RSS 14 lt K482 status gt DataBar Limited RSS
4. Stand Disabl White Disabled Test Cos fioo 20 400 Disabl Adapti 128 Stand Disabl white Disabled Test 10 fioo0 20 400 Disabl adapti 128 Stand Disabl white Disabled Test IV Capture for Every Index Calibrate Receive Settings I Show Database Index in Output Send Settings Load Current To Index I Sort Index Positions on Good Reads Click the Load Index to Current button to load configuration settings from the selected index to current active settings Load Index To Curent lt a Notes on Symbol Type The current DataBar Expanded status does not change if it is configured as Enabled Stacked and the database DataBar Expanded status is Enabled The current DataBar 14 status does not change if it is configured as Enabled Stacked and the database DataBar Expanded status is Enabled e Data Matrix ECC level is determined by the current settings and not by database settings Therefore the database does not know which ECC level to enable and has no effect on current Data Matrix ECC settings Quadrus MINI Velocity User s Manual 11 17 Request Selected Index Settings Request Selected Index Settings Definition Returns configuration settings for the selected database index Serial Cmd lt K255 index gt Example lt K255 5 gt This command phrase returns the configuration settin
5. The loss of light of certain wavelengths as it passes through a material and is converted to heat or other forms of energy Active Illumination Lighting an area with a light source coordinated with the acquisition of an image Strobed flash tubes and pulsed lasers are examples ADC See Analog to Digital Converter A D Converter See Analog to Digital Converter AGC See Automatic Gain Control Ambient Light Light which is present in the environment of the imaging front end of a vision system and generated from outside sources This light unless used for actual illumination will be treated as background Noise by the vision system Analog A smooth continuous voltage or current signal or function whose magnitude value is the information Analog to Digital Converter A D Converter or ADC A device that converts an analog voltage or current signal to a discrete series of digitally encoded numbers signal for computer processing Application Specific Integrated Circuit ASIC An integrated circuit that is customized for a particular kind of use rather than general use All vision system elements including firmware can be integrated into one ASIC Architecture The hardware organization of a vision system designed for high speed image analysis ASIC See Application Specific Integrated Circuit Aspect Ratio The ratio between the height and width of a sensor or display Found by dividing the
6. row depth Left Column Pointer Definition Defines the column position of the upper left starting point of the window Serial Cmd lt K516 row pointer column pointer row depth column width gt Default 0 Options 0 to 752 column width Important The column pointer setting must be an even value If a user enters an odd value it will be decreased automatically to the nearest even value Height Row Depth Definition Defines the size in rows of the window Maximum value is defined as the maximum row size of the image sensor minus the Top value Serial Cmd lt K516 row pointer column pointer row depth column width gt Default 480 Options 3 to 480 row pointer Width Column Width Definition Defines the column position of the upper left starting point of the window Serial Cmd lt K516 row pointer column pointer row depth column width gt Default 752 Options 8 to 752 column pointer Important The column width value must be a modulus 8 value If a user enters a non Modulus 8 value it will be decreased automatically to the nearest modulus 8 value For example if a user enters a setting of 639 it will automatically be reduced to 632 although a user request for this setting would still show 639 10 12 Quadrus MINI Velocity User s Manual Camera and IP Setup Configuration Database The Configuration Database allows the user to manage multiple configuration profiles It is a useful too
7. to 600 6 Ultra High Density The following example assumes a focus position setting of 400 4 with access to the focus distance values shown in the imager response Send lt K526 gt Response lt K526 30 202 212 225 241 264 410 447 466 481 492 502 511 519 526 533 539 545 550 556 561 565 570 574 578 582 586 590 594 597 601 gt The current focus position would be 410 4 1 Send lt K525 gt Send lt K525 gt Response lt K525 447 gt Decrement Focus Position Definition Decrements the imager s focus setting to the next focal distance supported by the imager Note Use the Focus Distance Table command lt K526 gt to find the focal distance settings supported by your imager Serial Cmd lt K525 gt Options 200 2 to 600 6 Standard Density 200 2 to 600 6 Ultra High Density The following example assumes a focus position setting of 400 4 with access to the focus distance values shown in the imager response Send lt K526 gt Response lt K526 30 202 212 225 241 264 410 447 466 481 492 502 511 519 526 533 539 545 550 556 561 565 570 574 578 582 586 590 594 597 601 gt The current focus position would be 410 4 1 Send lt K525 gt Send lt K525 gt Response lt K525 264 gt 10 20 Quadrus MINI Velocity User s Manual Camera and IP Setup IP Threshold Note IP Threshold is not supported when Q Mode is enabled Threshold Mode Usage Fixed Mode w
8. Defines the conditions under which decoded symbol data is transmitted to the host lt K705 symbol data output status when to output Good Read 0 Disabled 1 Match 2 Mismatch 3 Good Read Note Symbol Data Output Status if set to Match or Mismatch will not take effect unless Matchcode Type is enabled and a master symbol is loaded into memory It is useful when an application only needs to use the discrete outputs and can allow the imager to do the decision making When Disabled the host does not need the symbol data and the communication lines are used only for setup and status checks When set to Disabled the imager will not transmit any data that is generated during a read cycle symbols No Reads etc Match is used in an application that requires specific symbol information and needs to sort route or verify based on matching the specific symbol data When set to Match the imager transmits symbol data whenever a symbol matches a master symbol However if Matchcode Type is Disabled it transmits on any good read Note A No Read can still be transmitted if Enabled Mismatch is typically used as a flag within the host system to prevent an item from being routed in the wrong container With Mismatch enabled the imager transmits symbol data whenever the symbol data information does NOT match the master symbol Note A No Read can still be transmitted if Enabled Quadrus MINI Velocity User s Manual I
9. Polling Mode Options Autoconfiguration Daisy Chain Quadrus MINI Velocity User s Manual lt K148 RES REQ STX ETX ACK NAK gt lt K150DAISY gt Host Port Connections Host Port Connections The host port can be configured with RS 232 RS 422 and RS 485 connections The following settings define the basic transmission speeds and digital standards that ensure common formatting Baud Rate Host Port Usage Can be used to transfer data faster or to match host port settings Definition The rate at which the reader and host transfer data back and forth Serial Cmd lt K100 baud rate parity stop bits data bits gt Default 115 2K Options 0 600 1 1200 2 2400 3 4800 4 9600 5 19 2K 6 38 4K 7 57 6K 8 115 2K 9 230K Parity Host Port Usage Only changed if necessary to match host setting Definition An error detection routine in which one data bit per character is set to 1 or 0 so that the total number of bits in the data field is either even or odd Serial Cmd lt K100 baud rate parity stop bits data bits gt Default None Options 0 None 1 Even 2 Odd Stop Bits Host Port Usage Only changed if necessary to match host setting Definition One or two bits added to the end of each character to indicate the end of the character Serial Cmd lt K100 baud rate parity stop bits data bits gt Default One Options 0 One 1 Two Data Bits Host Port Usage Only changed if neces
10. Time When Switch Mode is set to Time the imager will load the next database entry to current active settings after a predefined time interval The timer will start upon use of a database entry If the timer expires during an image capture event the timer will not start again until that database entry has been incremented and the new database entry has been loaded to current active settings Number of Image Frames When Switch Mode is set to Number of Image Frames the database entry is incremented after the predetermined number of image capture events has occurred Frame Count Time Definition Indicates the Number of Image Frames that must be captured or the amount of Time that must transpire before the imager will load the next database index entry Serial Cmd lt K256 switch mode frame count time image process looping image dimensions gt Default 1 frames ms Options 1 to 65535 Quadrus MINI Velocity User s Manual 11 11 Database Mode Image Process Looping Usage Useful in applications where it is necessary to process a single captured image multiple times using different IP and decode parameters Serial Cmd lt K256 switch mode frame count time image process looping image dimensions gt Default Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Disabled When Image Process Looping is set to Disabled an image is captured for every database configuration whether or not any camera settings have been modified Enable
11. Video Video The Video view is similar to the EZ Mode interface in that the user has the ability to perform the same Locate Calibrate and Test routines There is also a focal distance adjustment tool to the right of the video view Video also features Capture and Decode functionality which is similar to the Configuration interfaces Communication Read Cycle Symbologies I O Matchcode and Diagnostics Video Evaluation Calibration WO Configuration Database Dynamic Setup Calibrate Initiates Calibration routine Activates the imager s target pattern and initiates live video display of the symbol in the field of view Allows the user to take an Initiates the Test routine image capture of the symbol Allows the user to test the in the field of view at any imager s read rate and time and to decode the decodes per second and also symbol data displays decoded symbol data in the field at the bottom of the screen Click Stop to end the Test routine ia y Capture and Decode Test EQ e V Decodes per Second M AEC 30 4 00 inches Attribute Clicking this icon enables the Number of Symbols 1 focal distance slide control to Symbol 1 the right of the video view Sumbol Dat Mi The focal distance value is ymbol Lata Icroscan displayed just below the icon Symbol data and When enabled allows the user Test results
12. lt K714 1 ALONG MESSAGE STREAMED OVER MULTIPLE MICROSCAN HID RE This shows the response to the lt 714 gt command Note that the command status response is not yet complete See the next report example for the complete response NUL padding O bytes IN report to host 1_6 PORTS gt 56 REPORT ID 1 Microscan HID LENGTH 6 DATA PORTS gt This is the end of the response to the lt K714 gt command from the previous example The entire lt K714 gt command response is as follows DATA K714 1 ALONG MESSAGE STREAMED OVER MULTIPLE MICROSCAN HID REPORTS gt NUL padding 56 bytes Quadrus MINI Velocity User s Manual 3 27 USB HID Interface Keyboard Report Format Size 9 bytes fixed length Structure REPORT ID 1 MODIFIER 1 RESERVED 1 KEYCODES 6 Values in parentheses indicate the size in bytes of the field Important The host application does not need to understand and process Keyboard Reports This task belongs to the host operating system Keycodes are passed to the host application as if a user were typing keyboard text The host application must be the active application in order to receive keystrokes Keyboard Reports protocol requires that two reports be sent for every keystroke The first report indicates which key is pressed The second report indicates no key pressed with all keycodes NUL 00 in hex to indicate that all keys have been released In the case of the
13. 166 MHz Pentium processor recommended Windows Vista XP or 2000 operating system Internet Explorer 5 0 or higher 64 MB minimum RAM 40 MB minimum disk space 800 x 600 pixel minimum 256 color display Quadrus MINI Velocity User s Manual 1 5 Select Model Step 5 Select Model When you start ESP the following menu will appear Select a Model Current Legacy e ojo Quadrus EZ Sundries Quadrus MINI Rudnie MINI see MS 3 Laser Base MS 890 MS 860 MS 820 UN MS pete MS ues Quadrus Verifier MS Q Description Quadrus MINI Velocity 1 V Show this dialog at startup I Skip EZ Mode Cancel 1 Click the button showing the Quadrus MINI Velocity 2 Click OK Note You can also double click the Quadrus MINI Velocity button to make your selection 3 Click Yes when this dialog appears J Would you like to connect to the Quadrus MINI Velocity Taa Switch Model Note If you need to select another model later click the Switch Model button near the top of the screen or use Model gt New Model in the menu toolbar 1 6 Quadrus MINI Velocity User s Manual Quick Start Step 6 Select Protocol and Connect e Choose the connection protocol you are using and click Next when the Select Protocol dialog appears Select Protocol Please select the protocol to use pe FAS 232 USB Once you select your communications mode follow the prompts to establish
14. LED is illuminated the result is a grade F Standard In Standard Mode the STATUS LED indicates read cycle status and the GOOD READ LED illuminates upon a good read at the end of a read cycle In a read rate test these LEDs represent the percentage of good reads per images captured ISO IEC 16022 Grade Usage Provides visual grading of specific ISO IEC 16022 parameters Definition Determines which ISO IEC 16022 parameter the imager will grade via the LEDs Serial Cmd lt K737 LED mode ISOJIEC 16022 grade gt Default Final Grade Options 0 Final Grade 1 Symbol Contrast 2 Print Growth 3 Axial Non Uniformity 4 Unused ECC 7 24 Quadrus MINI Velocity User s Manual I O Parameters Serial Verification Allows the user to verify configuration command status Serial Command Echo Status Usage This command is useful in removing any doubt about the imager s interpretation of any configuration command For example if the current preamble is SOM and lt K701 1 START gt is entered the imager will echo back lt K701 SOM gt since the attempted entry START exceeds the four character limit for that command Therefore it is rejected and the existing SOM message is echoed back and remains the preamble message Definition When enabled a configuration command received from the host is echoed back to the host with the resultant settings Host aq mager Function If
15. MV Show Tree Control Fields for report Dperator Name f Doe Company Name z Corp This information is appended at the bottom of the report Choose the default report type to be generated when you click Save Report on the Report tab Check Autofit Content to ensure that saved PDF report content will fit on a single page Saved Options MV Show Report Options dialog during Save Report Default Report Type PDF Files pdf p gt Autofit Content Low Graphic HTML Append to file gt V Store Report without file path prompt lt lt PDF Files pdf HTML Files htm CSV Files csv Rich Text Edit Files rtf Use symbol data for file name C Documents and Settings symbol grades Default Path Print after saving di 100 4 400 F Automatically open generated report iV Include Image Bitmap JPEG JPEG Image Quality Typically you will be asked where you wish to store your report If you do not want to be prompted to choose a file path click Store Report without file path prompt Click the Include Image check box to output the Overall Grade Based On Y Symbol Contrast V Print Growth captured symbol image with your saved report as a Bitmap or JPEG image file iV Axial Nonuniformity V Unused ECC Enables ESP to parse Ull by the U S Department of Defense IUID initiative MV E
16. Note For a list of utility commands such as read rate requests device control options and imager status requests see Serial Utility Commands on page 13 2 Communications Host Port Connections lt K100 baud rate parity stop bits data bits gt Auxiliary Port Connections lt K101 aux port mode baud rate parity stop bits data bits daisy chain ID status daisy chain ID gt RS 422 Status lt K102 status gt Host Port Protocol lt K140 protocol address gt Preamble lt K141 status preamble characters gt Postamble lt K142 status postamble characters gt Response Timeout lt K143 response timeout gt LRC lt K145 status gt Auxiliary Port System Data Status lt K146 aux gt ACK NAK Options lt K147 RES REQ STX ETX ACK NAK gt Polling Mode Options lt K148 RES REQ STX ETX ACK NAK gt Autoconfiguration Daisy Chain Calibration lt K150DAISY gt Calibration Options lt K529 gain shutter speed focus position symbol type WOI framing WOI margin line scan height gt Calibrate lt CAL gt Read Cycle Trigger Mode Filter Duration lt K200 trigger mode leading edge trigger filter trailing edge trigger filter gt Serial Trigger Character lt K201 serial trigger character gt External Trigger State lt K202 external trigger state gt End of Read Cycle lt K220 end of read cycle read cycle timeout gt Minimum Good Reads lt K221 mini
17. S S S Host 2 Send lt K150DAISY gt 3 If necessary set the primary imager to Edge After Autoconfigure you may set the primary imager to Edge S but the other imagers must remain in Serial S t Primary Secondary Secondary Imager Imager Imager E S S Host Quadrus MINI Velocity User s Manual 3 19 Response Timeout Response Timeout Usage Only used when a response is required from the host While in Multidrop if the imager does not receive an ACK or NAK from the host after sending polled data it will act on a fault The reader can be set to wait indefinitely by setting Response Timeout to zero Definition The time that the imager will wait before timing out if ACK NAK and ETX are enabled and a host response is expected Serial Cmd lt K143 response timeout gt Default 12 in 1ms increments Options 0 to 255 A zero 0 setting causes an indefinite wait Note See USB HID Interface on page 3 23 for protocol information relating to USB 3 20 Quadrus MINI Velocity User s Manual Communications LRC Status Longitudinal Redundancy Check Usage Used when extra data integrity is required Definition An error checking routine that verifies the accuracy of transmissions lt is the exclusive OR of all characters following the STX start of text up to and including the ETX end of text
18. 1D 2D maximum with autofocus Ultra High Density 0033 08 mm 005 13 mm 1 6 40 mm 1 9 to 4 4 47 mm to 110 mm 0075 19 mm 010 25 mm 2 5 64 mm 1 7 to 6 7 42 mm to 170 mm 015 38 mm 020 51 mm 2 9 74 mm 1 5 to 8 0 38 mm to 203 mm Standard Density 005 13 mm 0075 19 mm 2 8 72 mm 1 6 to 4 4 41 mm to 112 mm 0075 19 mm 010 25 mm 3 8 97 mm 1 5 to 6 2 38 mm to 157 mm 010 25 mm 015 38 mm 4 7 118 mm 1 4 to 7 6 36 mm to 193 mm 020 51 mm 030 76 mm 6 2 158 mm 1 3 to 10 0 33 mm to 254 mm A 3 General Specifications FIS Options Quadrus MINI Velocity WVGA Imager Standard Density RS 232 422 485 5VDC FIS 6300 3001G WVGA Imager Ultra High Density RS 232 422 485 5VDC FIS 6300 3002G WVGA Imager Standard Density USB 5VDC FIS 6300 3003G WVGA Imager Ultra High Density USB 5VDC FIS 6300 3004G WVGA Imager Q Mode Standard Density RS 232 422 485 5VDC FIS 6300 3005G WVGA Imager Q Mode Ultra High Density RS 232 422 485 5VDC FIS 6300 3006G WVGA Imager Q Mode Standard Density USB 5VDC FIS 6300 3007G WVGA Imager Q Mode Ultra High Density USB 5VDC FIS 6300 3008G Safety Certifications FCC UL cUL CE CB ROHS WEEE FE Ws CE ISO Certification ISO 9001 2000 Certified Quality Management System Issued by TUV USA Inc Member of TUV NORD Group Cert No 06 1080 G ISO 9001 2000 A
19. At startup enables the Send and Save as Customer Defaults option in the Send Recv command 2 6 Quadrus MINI Velocity User s Manual Using ESP Preferences gt Terminal Tab Preferences General Terminal Bar Code Options Advanced M Show Non Printable Characters G Default Format Fast Change Echo Font Enhanced Format Slower I Enable Echo Change Keyboard Macros Background Color Blue Vv Display Incoming Data Even When Not in Focus Default Settings OK Cancel Show Non Printable Characters When Show Non Printable Characters is enabled characters such as CRLF will be displayed in the Terminal window When Enhanced Format is checked the characters are displayed with more detailed formatting Change Keyboard Macros Clicking the Change Keyboard Macros button brings up the Function Keys dialog In this dialog you can fre raf ore er Fe es mo en rel select the desired function key and then enter your Keme macro keystrokes in the associated key map For ie ee example to make Ctrl F2 the keystroke to send a trigger a character select F2 then in the Ctrl row enter lt trigger ane character gt and click OK Then whenever the Ctrl F2 pe keystroke is pressed the trigger character will start the mes read cycle Note The F1 key is reserved for opening ESP Help and the F3 key is reserved for the Find Next function Change Font Allow
20. Default Reset Save lt ArdWB gt Reset and Recall Microscan White Balance Defaults lt Arp gt Reset and Recall Power On Parameters lt Arc gt Reset and Recall Customer Default Parameters 13 2 Quadrus MINI Velocity User s Manual Utilities lt Z gt Save Current Settings for Power On Save Current Settings as Customer Default lt Zc gt Parameters for Power On Recall Microscan Default Parameters and Save Default Reset Save lt Zrd gt for Power On lt ZrdWB gt sey eon OE White Balance Parameters lt Zre gt Recall Customer Default Parameters and Save for Power On lt gt Imager Status Byte lt K gt All Status Request lt K gt All Descriptor Status Request Imager Status lt K gt All Range Status Request Request Commands lt Knnn gt Single Status Request lt Knnn gt Single Descriptor Status Request lt Knnn gt Single Range Status Request lt Knnn gt Display Command Wildcard Other Operational Serial Commands lt uy path filename gt Y Modem Upload Transfer Options lt dy path filename gt Y Modem Download Transfer Options lt op 9 gt Image Library Request lt CAL gt Calibrate lt BCCFG gt Enter Bar Code Configuration lt VAL gt Static Validation lt WB gt White Balance Calibration Quadrus MINI Velocity User s Manual 13 3 Read Rate Read Rate Utilities Click this button to bring up the Utilities view Read Rate by
21. Focal Distance Definition Serial Cmd Default Options Default Options This setting provides a means for configuring the focal distance of the imager The input value is in terms of inches and is divided by 100 internally For example 400 sets the imager to a focal distance of 4 inches It is important to note that the imager may not have an exact match for the focal position requested The imager has a range of steps that are calibrated and mapped to focal positions This input value is matched to the closest focal position step that the system supports It is also important to keep in mind that the resolution of the system is not linear As the imager s focal distance setting increases the resolution decreases This effect is offset somewhat by the fact that the depth of field increases at greater focal distances lt K525 focal distance gt Standard Density 400 4 200 2 to 600 6 Ultra High Density 400 4 200 2 to 600 6 Note In the factory the imager calibrates its focus curve and matches the focus motor steps to various focal positions Therefore each imager has a slightly different focus map of stepper motor positions vs focal positions This allows the user to enter a focal distance that causes the imager to select the closest stepper motor position required to obtain the user defined setting In this way there is consistency between imagers for any given focal distance input Not
22. For lt K715h 2C gt See ASCII Character Entry Modifier on page 3 32 for a detailed explanation of how to enter ASCII characters as hex values No Symbol Message Note No Symbol Message is not supported when Q Mode is enabled Usage Useful in determining if a symbol is present and if user defined requirements for that symbol are met Can tell the user if an object does not qualify as a symbol Definition Sets the requirements that will qualify an object or a symbol before outputting a decode or message When enabled sends a message to the host whenever an object meets the qualifications setup but is not decoded Note When Symbology Identifier is enabled the No Symbol message is preceded by the identifier for the symbology being used Serial Cmd lt K716 unused message gt Default NO_SYMBOL Options Up to 64 ASCII characters Important The ASCII characters lt gt and can only be entered as hex pairs For lt lt K716h 3C gt For gt lt K716h 3E gt For lt K716h 2C gt See ASCII Character Entry Modifier on page 3 32 for a detailed explanation of how to enter ASCII characters as hex values 7 10 Quadrus MINI Velocity User s Manual I O Parameters 1D Stacked Symbology Qualification Note 1D Stacked Symbology Qualification is not supported when Q Mode is enabled Minimum Number of Bars Definition Sets the minimum number of bars to qualify linear symbols Serial Cmd lt K717 minimum n
23. Full Duplex Mode Usage Definition Serial Cmd Options 3 14 When communication to and from the auxiliary port is required In Full Duplex Mode all auxiliary port data and symbol data is sent directly to the host Symbol data is not displayed on the auxiliary port menu Data Originating from the Auxiliary Port Auxiliary port data to the host is ignored if the imager is in a polled mode Host ae Auxiliary port data or read data is sent to the 7 host whenever it is received ee gt Auxiliary port data is not echoed age e Auxiliary port data to the host is always sent without a preamble or postamble Data Originating from the Imager Data is not sent to the auxiliary port Host aa y Imager Data Originating from the Host All host data is echoed to the auxiliary port in unpolled mode Host Aue or y Que lt K101 aux port mode baud rate parity stop bits data bits daisy chain i d status daisy chain i d gt 3 Full Duplex Quadrus MINI Velocity User s Manual Communications Daisy Chain Mode Usage Useful in applications where e More than one symbol type is present A symbol may be present on multiple sides of a package e Symbols are presented at different depths Definition In a daisy chain application readers are connected in tandem or a daisy chain and decoded data is relayed from on
24. Projection of an object or scene onto a plane i e screen or image sensor Image Processing IP Transformation of an input image into an output image with desired properties Image Resolution The number of rows and columns of pixels in an image A higher resolution means that more pixels are available per element of the symbol being read Examples 640 x 480 VGA 854 x 480 WVGA 1280 x 1024 SXGA 2048 x 1536 QXGA Image Sensor A device that converts a visual image to an electrical signal a CCD or CMOS array Initialize Implement serial configuration commands into the imager s active memory Input A channel or communications line Decoded data or a discrete signal that is received by a device Integration Exposure of pixels on a CMOS sensor IP See Image Processing Ladder Orientation A linear symbol orientation in which the bars are parallel to the symbol s direction of travel LED See Light Emitting Diode Light Emitting Diode LED A semiconductor device that emits light when conducting current Lens A transparent piece of material with curved surfaces which either converge or diverge light rays Machine Vision The automatic acquisition and analysis of images to obtain desired data for controlling a specific activity Multidrop A communications protocol for networking two or more imagers or other devices with a concentrator or controller and characterized
25. The imager will spend a low amount of effort attempting to decode the given symbol for each parameter configuration Medium The imager will spend a medium amount of effort attempting to decode the given symbol for each parameter configuration High The imager will spend a high amount of effort attempting to decode the given symbol for each parameter configuration Definable The processing time for each image frame is defined by the Image Processing Timeout parameter lt K245 gt 4 10 Quadrus MINI Velocity User s Manual Calibration by ESP Calibration ESP s Calibration view incorporates all the functionality of the lt K529 gt Calibration Options command in a single easy to use intuitive interface This calibration process allows the user much finer control of individual parameters than the calibration routine in EZ Mode or on the Video tab Before During Calibration Before and After tabs give the user an authentic representation of the difference in what the imager i After sees before and after the calibration routine 240 250 ee 8792 E m i Gain Shutter Speed and Focus Shutter Gain Quality eae Distance Capture ettings are all configurable aos hp ae in the Calibration interface Beginning calibration Processing Focal Distance Quick Focus v Dropdown menu of 1D and 2D symbologies and a check box for enabling or disabling Compos
26. Usage Used in applications where a large amount of information over 32 characters needs to be encoded within a symbol typically where the symbol is transported from one facility to another For example an automobile assembly line might use a single symbol with multiple fields of information that will be read at several stations along the way without reference to a database Definition A two dimensional multi row 3 to 90 continuous variable length symbology that has high data capacity for storing up to 2 700 numeric characters 1 800 printable ASCII characters or 1 100 binary characters per symbol Each symbol character consists of 4 bars and 4 spaces in a 17 module structure Serial Cmd lt K476 status unused fixed symbol length status fixed symbol length unused codeword collection gt Default Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Note Sending lt a1 gt will cause PDF417 data to be prefaced with information consisting of error correction level ECC Level n number of rows n Rows number of columns n Columns number of informative code words n Info Code Words and the number of data characters n Data Characters This feature can be disabled by re sending lt a1 gt Fixed Symbol Length Status PDF417 Serial Cmd lt K476 status unused fixed symbol length status fixed symbol length unused codeword collection gt Default Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Fixed Symbol Length PDF417
27. What this means is that the binary representation of all the characters in a transmission are cumulatively added in a column and each resulting odd integer is assigned a 1 and each even integer a 0 two 1s 0 two Os 0 a 1 and a 0 1 The extra LRC character is then appended to the transmission and the receiver usually the host performs the same addition and compares the results Serial Cmd lt K145 status gt Default Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Quadrus MINI Velocity User s Manual 3 21 Protocol Configuration Examples Protocol Configuration Examples Point to Point Main Port lt K100 8 0 1 1 gt Baud Rate 115 2K Parity None Stop Bits 2 Data Bits 8 lt K140 0 gt Point to Point lt K102 0 gt RS 232 enabled lt K102 1 gt RS 422 enabled Polling Mode Main Port lt K100 4 0 1 1 gt Baud Rate 9600 Parity None Stop Bits 2 Data Bits 8 lt K140 5 23 gt Polling Mode Address 23 lt K102 0 gt RS 232 Point to Point polling lt K102 1 gt RS 422 RS 485 true multidrop switched transmitter lt K143 30 gt 30 ms Response Timeout User Defined Polling Mode Main Port lt K100 4 0 1 1 gt Baud Rate 9600 Parity None Stop Bits 2 Data Bits 8 lt K140 5 12 gt Polling Mode Address 12 lt K148 08 09 18 0B 0C 0D gt Default RES 0x04 REQ 0x08 EOT 0x09 STX 0x18 ETX 0x0B ACK 0x0C NAK 0x0D lt K102 0 gt RS 232 Point to Point polling lt K102 1 gt RS 485 true mult
28. good_287_0 60 ms Evaluate Line Scan White 255 Pixel Info Average N A Drigin 0 0 Position N A A Value NA Black 0 HHH Il J Jatt tal When you center your cursor over the dashed line it becomes a double arrow cross This allows you to move the line anywhere in the window You can also use your keyboard arrows to move the line incrementally in any direction As with the histogram the line scan compares light and dark pixels but in a spatial distribution On the Y axis of the graph below 0 is black and 255 is white the X axis represents the horizontal axis of the symbol as described by the line scan When you click anywhere on the graph a vertical red line appears at that point and its position and value in terms of black to white are updated in the Pixel Info table to the left of the graph 237 in this example In addition a horizontal dashed red line is displayed that indicates the average value 10 8 Quadrus MINI Velocity User s Manual Calibration Camera and IP Setup The Calibration interface in ESP is a powerful and intuitive way to optimize the imager s performance It allows the user to control several complex simultaneous calibration operations and to follow the progress of those operations using cues such as progress bars real time representations of calibration values and other dynamic user feedback See Chapter 4 Calibration for full documentation
29. symbol data A successful calibration will display a green frame around the symbol and the following message will appear Uploading all reader parameters After a moment the symbol data will be presented in the field below the image display window Calibrate by Serial Command Send lt CAL gt from a terminal program to begin calibration Quadrus MINI Velocity User s Manual 1 11 Test Read Rate Step 9 Test Read Rate Read Rate indicates the number of successful decodes per second achieved by the imager Test Read Rate by EZ Button 1 To start the Read Rate test hold down the EZ Button about three t100 6200 seconds until you hear three 80 STATUS 20 40 60 80 100 short beeps The 20 40 and These LEDs represent the o ar 60 percentage of Good Reads 60 LEDs will illuminate R per images captured While the symbol is being 20 inspected the Read Rate LEDs will indicate the corresponding read rate percentage on the back of the unit 2 To end the Read Rate test press the EZ Button and quickly release Test Read Rate by ESP 1 Click the Test button to start the Read Rate test and Stop to end it Test Stop Y Decodes per Second If a symbol has been successfully decoded the symbol s data and related features will be presented in the field below the image display window Also while the symbol is being inspected the Read Rate LEDs will indicate the corresponding R
30. 250 47 5 100 6538 3 226 386 250 48 6 Rating List Best Rating 6527 Focus 386 Shutter 250 Gain 48 Rating 6517 Focus 386 Shutter 250 Gain 47 Rating 6505 Focus 386 Shutter 250 Gain 46 Rating 6491 Focus 386 Shutter 250 Gain 45 Rating 6476 Focus 386 Shutter 250 Gain 44 Rating 6462 Focus 386 Shutter 250 Gain 43 Rating 6449 Focus 386 Shutter 250 Gain 42 Calibration PASSED 4 18 Quadrus MINI Velocity User s Manual Calibration Additional Notes about Calibration The following conditions apply to the imager s calibration process Some of these items are noted at various points throughout this section or in other sections of the imager s documentation e 2 3 The Mirrored Image parameter lt K514 gt is not part of the calibration process Background Color lt K451 gt is calibrated If Window of Interest WOI Framing is enabled the WOI will be set to full frame when calibration begins If WOI Framing is disabled the current WOI configuration will be used for the Search Pass IP Mode lt K527 gt will not be altered during calibration Threshold Mode lt K512 gt will be set to Adaptive during calibration At the end of a successful calibration Threshold Mode will remain set to Adaptive regardless of its previous setting Otherwise the value will revert to its original state If Symbol Type is enabled for calibration Autodiscriminate the
31. 32 bit XP 32 bit and 2000 Operating Systems Microscan s USB to Serial Virtual COM Port Driver allows you to send serial data using a USB Quadrus MINI Velocity The driver is available at www microscan com or on the Microscan Tools CD Installing the USB to Serial Virtual COM Port Driver 1 Download the driver files from the Microscan website or Microscan Tools CD If the driver files are in a zip file extract them to a folder of your choice before running the installer 2 Double click on DPInst exe to launch the Microscan USB to Serial Virtual COM Port Driver Installer data SDriver_Installagion Guide pdf WE DPInst exe W ReleaseNotes rtf ES dpinst xml Select DPInst exe to launch the driver installer 3 Click Next on the driver installer s welcome screen Microscan USB to Serial Diver Instal MICR AN Welcome to the Microscan USB CROSS Virtual COM Port Driver 1 0 0 0 U S B Vi rtu a This program will walk you through installing the driver for your Microscan Imager Once the driver is installed you will CO M Po rt be able to connect to the Microscan Imager through an RS232 virtual COM port Driver o us To continue click Next A 26 Quadrus MINI Velocity User s Manual Appendices 4 Read the License Agreement shown below If you accept the terms of the agreement click the radio button next to the statement I accept this agreement and click Next Mecro
32. 6 12 Quadrus MINI Velocity User s Manual Symbologies EAN 128 Status Code 128 EAN 128 Definition When this field is disabled the imager will not check any Code 128 labels for conformance to EAN requirements or perform any special formatting When enabled the imager can read symbols with or without a function 1 character in the first position If a symbol has a function 1 character in the first position it must conform to EAN format Symbols that conform to EAN format will also be subject to the special output formatting options available in this command If EAN status is required the imager will only decode symbols that have a function 1 character in the first position and that conform to EAN format All symbols read will be subject to the special output formatting options available in this command Note Code 128 status must be enabled for EAN status to be active Serial Cmd lt K474 status fixed symbol length status fixed symbol length EAN 128 status output format application record separator status application record separator character application record brackets application record padding gt Default Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled 2 Required Output Format Code 128 EAN 128 Definition In Standard the imager will not apply special EAN output formatting options In Application the imager will apply the special EAN output formatting options to decoded EAN conforming symbols Serial Cmd lt K474 st
33. 99 ms Capture Time 65 ms Locate Time 22 ms Decode Time 7 me Pixels Element 13 1 ECC Level 200 Matrix Size 14x14 Quiet Zone PASS If you want to view the results in a report format click the Save Report button The report will be output in the format you chose in the Preferences dialog Save Report 8 12 Quadrus MINI Velocity User s Manual Symbol Quality Microscan Symbol Quality Output Percent Cell Damage Data Matrix Only Note Percent Cell Damage is not supported when Q Mode is enabled Definition When this feature is enabled the cell damage percentage is appended to data output Serial Cmd lt K710 percent cell damage total read time capture time locate time decode time pixels per element ECC level matrix size quiet zone symbol angle gt Default Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Total Read Time Definition The time that transpires between the image capture and the output of the decoded data including locate time When enabled the total read time is appended to the symbol data Serial Cmd lt K710 percent cell damage total read time capture time locate time decode time pixels per element ECC level matrix size quiet zone symbol angle gt Default Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled a Total Read Time applies globally to all three Symbol Quality standards Capture Time Definition Capture time in milliseconds is a fixed overhead that includes the
34. ANAB Certified QMS Aten of TOV NORD Orne 2008 Microscan Systems Inc All rights reserved Specifications subject to change Product specifications are given for typical performance at 25 C 77 F using grade A labels Performance characteristics may vary at high temperatures or other environmental extremes Warranty One year limited warranty on parts and labor Extended warranty available A 4 Quadrus MINI Velocity User s Manual Appendices Appendix B Electrical Specifications Power 4 Watts max 5VDC 5 200 mV p p max ripple 530 mA 5VDC typ Optional Int 10 28V Accy Host Connector Pin Assignments High Density 15 Pin D sub Socket Connector Pin Host RS 232 Host Aux RS 232 Host RS 422 485 In Out 1 Power 5 VDC In 2 TxD TxD TxD Out 3 RxD RxD RxD In 4 Power Signal Ground 5 NC 6 RTS Aux TxD TxD Out 7 Output 1 TTL a Out 8 Default configuration b In 9 Trigger In 10 CTS Aux RxD RxD In 11 Output 3 TTL a Out 12 New Master NPN In 13 Chassis ground c 14 Output 2 TTL a Out 15 NC a Can sink 10 mA and source 10 mA b The default is activated by connecting pin 8 to ground pin 4 c Chassis ground Used to connect chassis body to earth ground only Not to be used as power or signal return Quadrus MINI Velocity User s Manual A 5 Serial Configuration Commands Appendix C Serial Configuration Commands
35. Click here for Camera Setup advanced Calibration Configuration Database Click this icon to Click here for return to EZ Mode Menu toolbar Click here to open Ordered Output the Terminal view and Output Format EP ESP Untitled features File Model Options Connect View Help ff 2 gt 2 o A a Y DAA gq EZ Mode Autoconnect Send Recy Switch Model Configuration Camera Terminal Utilities Output Format foe hws o B tot Click on icons in this row to Communication Read Cycle Symbologies Symbol Quality Matchcode a access confi guration trees A Parameters like the one shown here een _ Click the Configuration icon to return to full a lost Por A Host Port Connections APP Mode view from Camera Terminal Baud Rate Utilities or Output Format Parity Stop Bits One Data Bits Eight Host Protocol Point to Point Address 1 ACK NAK Options Click Capture and Decode to Poling Mode Options read the symbol in the field of Host 422 Status Disabled view and to see a high resolution image capture of the symbol R5232 Auxilliary Port Aux Port Connections Aux Port Settings Data Output Preamble Disabled Postamble Enabled Response Timeout 12 tr a Decoded symbol data is shown in this table Y For Help press Fl CONNECTED _ Note For specific information on any of the icons shown above in the operations bar or configuration ba
36. Current Command efault all Settings ee i gt i This is the same as Send Current Advanced Options Send Current View View except that it saves only the send Curr nit Command command that is currently selected Add Exception Remove Exception Add Remove Exception After you perform a Receive Reader Settings command and you click on the Add Exception option you may see a list of serial commands These are commands that may be in your imager s firmware but not included in or different from your current version of ESP You can edit these commands by double clicking on them and changing them as needed It is important to note that these commands will be saved to your imager whenever you send a Save to Reader command or an lt A gt or a lt Z gt command Also if there is a corresponding ESP menu item the ESP Value column for that item will be blank following a Receive Reader Settings command 1 From the Send Recv button or by right clicking in any blank section of a tree control view Quadrus MINI Velocity User s Manual 2 17 Using EZ Trax Using EZ Trax For detailed information about using EZ Trax refer to the Help menu in EZ Trax software or the EZ Trax Quick Start Guide available on the Microscan Tools CD For information about how to configure the Quadrus MINI Velocity for use with EZ Trax see Setting Up the Imager for EZ Trax in Chapter 5 Read Cycle 2 18 Quadrus MINI Velocity User s Manual WS 3 Communicati
37. Data Matrix Only Microscan Symbol Quality Output Pixels Per Element Data Matrix Only Microscan Symbol Quality Output Error Correction Level Data Matrix Only Microscan Symbol Quality Output Matrix Size Data Matrix Only Microscan Symbol Quality Output Detailed No Read Message No Read Message Bad Symbol Message No Symbol Message 1D Stacked Symbology Qualification 2D Symbology Qualification Narrow Margins Serial Cmd lt K255 index shutter speed gain focal distance pixel binning row pointer column pointer row depth column width threshold mode fixed threshold value processing mode narrow margins background color symbology gt Default 2D Enhanced Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled 2 2D Enhanced Quadrus MINI Velocity User s Manual 11 7 Configuration Database Status Background Color Serial Cmd lt K255 index shutter speed gain focal distance pixel binning row pointer column pointer row depth column width threshold mode fixed threshold value processing mode narrow margins background color symbology gt Default Both Options 0 White 1 Black 2 Both Symbology Definition This field allows the user to configure the database to enable specific symbologies for selected database indexes Symbology specific parameters must be configured with the appropriate symbology command For example if fixed length Code 128 is required it must first be set up with the Code 128 command lt K474
38. Default Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled 7 28 Quadrus MINI Velocity User s Manual I O Parameters EZ Button Modes Usage Useful for performing multiple repetitive tasks at the work site Definition Allows the user to program each of the EZ Button s 4 positions from a selection of 8 modes Serial Cmd lt K771 position 1 mode position 2 mode position 3 mode position 4 mode gt Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Single Beep Two Beeps Three Beeps Four Beeps 0 Disabled 0 Disabled 0 Disabled 0 Disabled 1 Read Rate 1 Read Rate 1 Read Rate 1 Read Rate 2 Calibrate 2 Calibrate 2 Calibrate 2 Calibrate 3 Save for Power On 3 Save for Power On 3 Save for Power On 3 Save for Power On 4 Unused 4 Unused 4 Unused 4 Unused 5 Load New Master 5 Load New Master 5 Load New Master 5 Load New Master 6 Unused 6 Unused 6 Unused 6 Unused 7 Target System 7 Target System 7 Target System 7 Target System 8 Bar Code Config 8 Bar Code Config 8 Bar Code Config 8 Bar Code Config Disabled When set to disabled the associated button position will have no function associated with it and the position will be skipped over Read Rate Read Rate will be initiated when the associated button position is selected Read Rate will perform decodes second and is the same as sending a lt C gt from ESP s Terminal To exit Read Rate quickly
39. ESP To see the number of decodes per second click the Decodes sec radio button on the Read Rate tab in the Utilities view and click the Start button To see the percentage of decodes click the Percent radio button and then the Start button To end a Read Rate test click the Stop button the Start button becomes a Stop button during an active Read Rate test Important When Read Rate is enabled the Configuration Database is not active regardless of how the imager is configured Decodes sec C Percent JP Clear Output Read Rate by Serial Command Enter Decodes Second Test Sending lt C gt instructs the imager to transmit the decodes per second and symbol data if any The decode rate can vary dramatically due to the angle and location of the symbol in relation to the field of view This test is very useful in aligning and positioning the imager during setup Enter Percent Test Sending lt Cp gt instructs the imager to transmit the percentage of decodes and any decoded symbol data End Read Rate Test Sending lt J gt ends both the Percent test and the Decodes Second test 13 4 Quadrus MINI Velocity User s Manual Utilities Counters Counter commands can be a numeric value from 00000 to 65535 After reaching the maximum numeric limit of 65535 an error message will be displayed and the counter will automatically roll over and start counting again at 00000 To obtain the cumulative t
40. Except for the limited warranty above the product is provided as is To the maximum extent permitted by law this express warranty excludes all other warranties express or implied including but not limited to implied warranties of merchantability and Technical support questions may be directed to helpdeskOmicroscan com Register your product with Microscan www microscan com register fitness for a particular purpose Microscan Systems Inc does not warrant that the functions contained in the product will meet any requirements or needs purchaser may have or that the product will operate error free or in an uninterrupted fashion or that any defects or errors in the product will be corrected or that the product is compatible with any particular machinery Limitation of Liability In no event shall Microscan Systems Inc be liable to you or any third party for any special incidental or consequential damages including without limitation indirect special punitive or exemplary damages for loss of business loss of profits business interruption or loss of business information whether in contract tort or otherwise even if Microscan Systems Inc has been advised of the possibility of such damages Microscan Systems Inc s aggregate liability with respect to its obligations under this warranty or otherwise with respect to the product and documentation or otherwise shall not exceed the amount paid by you for the product and documentation
41. Focus Shutter Gain Locate 12 0 0 0 313 250 0 0 14 0 0 0 313 250 9 0 16 0 0 0 313 250 18 0 18 2174 1 72 313 250 27 24 Quadrus MINI Velocity User s Manual 4 15 Initiating Calibration Focus Pass The purpose of Focus Pass is to determine the optimal focal position of the optical system This is accomplished by determining the inside and outside focus positions and then recording the center position as the desired focal position Running Focus Pass Prog Rating Decode Quality Focus Shutter Gain Locate 38 0 0 0 353 250 0 0 38 0 0 0 353 250 9 0 38 4256 2 48 353 250 18 5 38 0 0 0 409 250 0 0 38 4236 2 28 409 250 9 5 38 0 0 0 447 250 0 0 38 4236 2 28 447 250 9 4 38 0 0 0 492 250 0 0 38 4232 2 24 492 250 9 4 38 0 0 0 536 250 0 0 38 2128 1 24 536 250 9 5 38 0 0 0 572 250 0 0 38 0 0 0 572 250 9 0 38 2144 1 40 572 250 18 4 38 0 0 0 601 250 27 0 38 0 0 0 601 250 36 0 38 0 0 0 601 250 45 0 38 0 0 0 601 250 45 0 38 0 0 0 601 250 45 0 38 0 0 0 601 250 45 0 42 4280 2 72 297 250 45 6 42 4280 2 72 283 250 45 5 42 4280 2 72 270 250 45 5 42 4280 2 72 258 250 45 5 42 4280 2 72 247 250 45 5 42 4280 2 72 236 250 45 6 42 4280 2 72 227 250 45 5 42 4280 2 72 217 250 45 5 42 4280 2 72 209 250 45 6 42 4280 2 72 200 250 45 6 46 0 0 0 601 250 45 0 Inside Focus 200 Outside Focus 572 Center Focus 386 4 16 Quadrus MINI Velocity User s Manual Calibration Medium Pass The theory behind Medium Pass is to develop a readable range from
42. Grading button Data Matrix Grading There will be a wait of a few seconds and then the evaluation results will appear in the Symbol Quality view in a format similar to the one shown below Data Matrix Grading Report GRADE ISO IEC Symbol Contrast 80 lA 16022 Print Growth 0 26 Dx 51 Dnom 58 A Dy 547 Dmax 65 7 Dmin 35 Axial Nonuniformity 88 avg 13 2 Yaug 13 1 Unused ECC 100x Eact A Emax 18 GRADING Cell Dam 0 I Total Read Tine 99 ms Capture Tin 65 ms Locate Tine 27 ms Decode Tim 7 ms Pixels Element Sky ECC Lev 200 Matrix Size 14 14 Quiet Zone PASS If you want to view the results in a report format click the Save Report button The report will be output in the format you chose in the Preferences dialog Save Report 8 16 Quadrus MINI Velocity User s Manual Ree 9 Matchcode Contents Matehcode by ESPs criticos RG ee eee errr 9 2 Matchcode Serial COMMANAS ccccscsssecceceeeeeeeeececceceseeseeeeseesescueaeeeauauaeecueeeeeeeseseeseeessersnteeees 9 3 Overview Of MatChCOde ccccccccccccccococicininananananannnnonnnnnonnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn non nn nn nr e a Eaa 9 4 Matchcode Type EPR TEE TA E A 9 5 Match Replace neinna tot 9 10 Mismatch Rep laO six cnc a e ar raaa e a araa Te a aaae a a aaa aa aao EEE elect 9 11 New Master e AEE PEET E E E EA AEE EAE EET 9 12 This section explains the Quadrus MINI Velocity s matchcode
43. Host receives data IMAGER_TX RES Terminate Transfer 1 The protocol makes 3 retry attempts before data is flushed and transfer is aborted Quadrus MINI Velocity User s Manual A 19 Communications Protocol Setup 2 Address 0x01 translates to Poll Req 0x1C Unit Select O 0x1D RES 0x04 REQ 0x05 STX 0x02 ETX 0x03 ACK 0x06 NAK 0x15 LRC enabled Transfer 1 HOST_TX RES 0x1D REQ Select Unit 1 to receive data IMAGER_TX 0x1D ACK Unit responds with its address HOST_TX STX lt T gt ETX LRC IMAGER_TX 0x1D ACK Unit responds with its address HOST_TX RES Terminate Transfer 2 Transfer 2 HOST_TX RES 0x1C REQ Poll Unit 1 for data IMAGER_TX 0x1C STX lt T 00000 gt ETX LRC IMAGER_TX ACK HOST_TX RES Terminate Transfer 1 Starting with a RES ensures a clean transaction without leftovers from the previous transaction Error Condition 1 HOST_TX RES 0x1C REQ Poll Unit 1 for data IMAGER_TX 0x1C STX lt T 00000 gt ETX LRC HOST_TX Nothing Host should ACK here timeout reached IMAGER_TX REQ Unit requests an ACK again timeout reached IMAGER_TX REQ Unit requests an ACK again timeout reached IMAGER_TX REQ Unit requests an ACK again timeout reached IMAGER_TX RES Termi
44. Host to Imager TX to Imager STX lt command gt ETX LRC Response from Imager ACK NAK Sent when LRC ETX or command ending angle bracket gt are received depending on what is enabled Command Response from Imager to Host TX to host STX preamble COMMAND RESPONSE DATA postamble ETX LRC Response from host ACK NAK Sent when LRC ETX postamble command ending angle bracket gt or timeout waiting for more data are detected depending on what is enabled As with Polling Mode lt K140 5 gt the imager can optionally perform the REQ and RES event sequences in ACK NAK mode If the sender does not receive an ACK or NAK it will send REQ to request such a response if enabled When the sender receives an ACK too many NAKs or times out if already enabled it will send a RES if enabled to terminate the transaction Note See ACK NAK Data Flow Examples in Appendix D for sample ACK NAK communication scenarios Note See USB HID Interface on page 3 23 for protocol information relating to USB Quadrus MINI Velocity User s Manual 3 7 Polling Mode Options Polling Mode Options Definition These parameters only take effect for Polling Mode lt K140 5 gt on the main RS 232 or RS 422 ports not on the Auxiliary Port and are completely independent of the ACK NAK Options lt K147 gt The values of protocol characters can be changed but the protocol events cannot be disabled The polling mode address is
45. Limited lt K483 status gt DataBar Expanded RSS Expanded lt K484 status fixed symbol length status fixed symbol length gt MicroPDF417 lt K485 status unusea fixed symbol length status fixed symbol length gt Quadrus MINI Velocity User s Manual 6 3 Data Matrix Data Matrix Important If Q Mode is enabled Data Matrix ECC status is autodiscriminating and all ECC levels are active if any of the ECC status fields are set to Enabled Usage Very useful where information needs to be packed into a small area and or where symbols need to be applied directly to the substrate with laser etching chemical etching dot peen or other methods Definition Data Matrix is a type of Matrix symbology and has subsets ECC 000 ECC 200 ECC 200 symbols have an even number of rows and an even number of columns Most of the symbols are square with sizes from 10x10 to 144x144 Some symbols however are rectangular with sizes from 8x18 to 16x48 All ECC 200 symbols can be recognized by the upper right corner module being light binary 0 instead of dark ECC 200 Definition When enabled will decode ECC 200 Data Matrix symbols Serial Cmd lt K479 ECC 200 status ECC 000 status ECC 050 status ECC 080 status ECC 100 status ECC 140 status ECC 120 status ECC 130 status gt Default Enabled Note This is the only symbol type enabled by default Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled ECC 000 Definition When enabl
46. O Parameters Good Read Usage Good Read is used when an application requires all symbol data to be transmitted It s typically used in tracking applications in which each object is uniquely identified Definition With Good Read enabled the imager transmits symbol data on any good read regardless of Matchcode Type setting Note A No Read can still be transmitted if Enabled Quadrus MINI Velocity User s Manual 7 5 Symbol Data Output When to Output Symbol Data Definition Serial Cmd Default Options This command allows the user to choose when symbol data can be sent to the host lt K705 symbol data output status when to output gt As Soon As Possible 0 ASAP 1 End of Read Cycle As Soon As Possible Usage Definition As Soon As Possible is useful in applications in which symbol data needs to be moved quickly to the host typically when the host is making decisions based on symbol data Enabling As Soon As Possible causes symbol data to be sent to the host immediately after a symbol has been successfully decoded Note More than one decode might in fact be required to qualify as a good read depending on how Decodes Before Output is set End of Read Cycle Usage Definition 7 6 End of Read Cycle is useful in timing based systems in which the host is not ready to accept data at the time that it is decoded Enabling End of Read Cycle means that symbol data does not get sent to the host until
47. OCR A characters 12345 lt K462 8 0101070707070700 gt five OCR A characters Quadrus MINI Velocity User s Manual 6 45 OCR User Template Template String Examples cont 0987 lt K462 7 01010707070700 gt four OCR A characters ABDEFGHI JKLMNOPQ lt K462 20 0103070707070707070702070707070707070700 gt two lines of eight OCR A characters ABDEFGHI JKLMNO lt K462 28 010307070707070707070207070707070700 gt one line of eight and one line of 6 OCR A characters ABDEFGHI OCR A JKLMNOPQ OCR B lt K462 20 010307070707070707070103070707070707070700 gt two templates OCR A and OCR B Will read these two lines in the field of view as two symbols 6 46 Quadrus MINI Velocity User s Manual Symbologies OCR Configuration by ESP OCR optimization is greatly simplified by using ESP s OCR user interface OCR Template Interface S OCR y Template Test OCR is enabled or disabled using the OCR Enable check box Additional check boxes allow the user to refine OCR configuration so that the imager will look only for the selected Busy Background Ignore Period Characters OCR attributes The Orientation dropdown menu Right left to right v Orientation e SCR omna Up Fatty LOMO R Right to Left V OCR Enable lt a Strip Checksum Allow Uncertain Characters Templates User Defined v 1 v Row Count The Templates dropdown menu allows R
48. Parse M Enable Parse Symbols Send and Save Receive P Show Parse Table Quadrus MINI Velocity User s Manual 14 3 Format Assign Format Symbol Definition Assign Number Symbol Number refers to the number of the symbol to which output formatting will apply For example if you wish to enable user defined formatting to symbol 2 in a multisymbol read cycle you would send the command lt K742 2 1 gt Note that the number of symbols may exceed the format capabilities Serial Cmd lt K742 symbol number status gt Options 1 to 10 1 Formatted output status for symbol 1 2 Formatted output status for symbol 2 10 Formatted output status for symbol 10 Status Definition Status refers to the user defined formatting of a selected symbol position in the read cycle result Note that there is also a global formatting enable command that must be set for the formatting to be applied Serial Cmd lt K742 symbol number status gt Default Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Assign parameters to specified symbol Format Assign by ESP IV Enable Output Format Use the Set Number of Symbols spin box to F p etermine the number of symbols to be include Set Number of Symbols A in the output phrase Output Phrase Symbol Preamble Symbol 1 Separator Symbol 2 Symbol 3 Symbol 4 Symbol 5 Postamble V Enable Iv Parse IV Parse i Parse Parse Pars
49. Postal Alphanumeric Encoding Technique is a symbology used by the United States Postal Service to track and identify items during delivery Each PLANET symbol is either 12 or 14 digits long and encodes data in half height and full height bars making PLANET a 2 state symbology The symbol always starts and ends with a full height bar or guard rail and each individual digit is represented by a set of five bars in which two of the bars are always short If U S Post and PLANET Status are both enabled the imager will decode PLANET symbols lt K460 postal symbology type POSTNET status PLANET status USPS4CB status POSTNET allow B and B fields Australia Post allow O FCC gt Enabled 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Quadrus MINI Velocity User s Manual Symbologies USPS4CB Status Usage USPS4CB also called Intelligent Mail is used by the United States Postal Service to sort and track individual items as well as flats of mail USPS4CB combines the capabilities of POSTNET and PLANET and can encode 31 digits 65 bars USPS4CB symbols are slightly longer than POSTNET symbols and offer additional flexibility in choosing symbol height and width Data is encoded in four types of bars states each of which is identified by a name and a value This type of postal symbol is known as 4 state Each bar has a tracker or middle section to which an ascender top section or descender bottom section may
50. Press and Y Recall Customer Default Parameters lt Zre gt No hold while and Save for Power On powering on Imager a When you right click in a menu tree and select Default Current Menu Settings or Default All ESP Settings it is important to note that only ESP settings are defaulted To save these defaults to the reader itself you need to follow up with a Save to Reader Send and Save command b Only available in ESP if enabled under the Options pulldown menu Resets Resets A commands affect only the current settings active memory and are not saved for power on Saved for Power on Power on parameters Z commands are saved to NOVRAM and recalled and loaded into current parameters when power is cycled to the imager or the lt Arp gt command is issued Defaults Defaults are Microscan firmware settings or saved customer settings that can be recalled either by software or hardware reset 13 18 Quadrus MINI Velocity User s Manual Utilities Customer Default Parameters Customer default parameters saved by lt Zc gt are the same set of parameters as power on parameters but are saved in a different isolated section of NOVRAM This allows a user essentially to create a backup set of parameters that can be recalled in the event that the current parameters or power on parameters have been accidentally changed or are no longer desired It is important to note that a hardware default does not affect customer def
51. Printable Characters gt Default Settings Keyboard Macros Copy selected text to clipboard Paste from Terminal or other text Clear all text in Terminal window Select All text in the Terminal window Save brings up a Save As dialog Change Font of text in Terminal brings up a Font dialog aoe Echo Font to change typed text brings up a Font ialog Enable Echo enables Echo text typed by user Change Background Color of Terminal window Non Printable Characters allows you to hide non printable characters or to show them in Standard or Enhanced format Default Settings returns all the above settings to default Keyboard Macros allows you to create new keyboard macro commands that can be sent from function keys F2 F4 F5 etc Terminal Dropdown Menu The dropdown Terminal menu has Capture Text Save Current Text Send File Find Next and Find Previous functions as well as the same functions defined above Terminal e Capture Text lets you append data in real time to a CAPA text file of your choice While in operation the text file Save Current Text cannot be opened You can select Pause to interrupt Send File the capture flow or Stop to end the flow and open the file Change Font e Save Current Text saves all text in the Terminal Change Echo Font window to a text file Enable Ech Send File allows you to browse for specific files and da send them to the reader Change Backgr
52. Scan Lines Minutes Mirrored Image Mismatch Mismatch Counter Mismatch Counter Reset Mismatch or No Read Mismatch Replace Model Model Memo Mounting the Imager Multidrop Multisymbol Multisymbol Separator N Narrow Margins Narrow Margins Configuration Database Narrow Margins Symbology Identifier Narrow Margins 2D Enhanced Narrow Margins Enabled Navigating in ESP New ESP File New Master Load Status New Master Pin New Model New Trigger Next Row No Read No Read Counter No Read Counter Reset No Read Message No Read Message Mode No Read or Good Read No Symbol No Symbol Message Noise Non Printable Characters Normally Closed Normally Open 14 Quadrus MINI Velocity User s Manual O Notes on Symbol Type Number of Active Indexes Number of Active Indexes by ESP Number of Captures Number of Focal Distances Number of Image Frames Number of Symbols Number of Symbols in Field of View Number to Output On O Object Detector Object Info Output Object Plane Object Qualification Dimension Mode Object Qualification Orientation Mode Object Qualification Symbol Size Mode OCR Add 524288 OCR Background OCR Configuration OCR Configuration by ESP OCR Status OCR Template Interface in ESP OCR Template Length OCR Template String OCR Template String Examples OCR Test Interface in ESP OCR User Template ON When in the Read Cycle Target Pattern ON When Not in the Read C
53. Some jurisdictions do not allow the exclusion or limitation of incidental or consequential damages or limitations on an implied warranty so the above limitation or exclusion may not apply to you This warranty gives you specific legal rights and you may also have other rights which may vary from state to state Tel 425 226 5700 Fax 425 226 8250 helpdesk microscan com Quadrus MINI Velocity User s Manual iii Table of Contents Table of Contents Chapter 1 Quick Start Step 1 Check Required Hardware cccccceesceeeceseeeeeseeeeeeeeeeteneesteeeeeeeeaes 1 2 Step 2 Connect the SYSteM cceeesesesseecseeteaeeeeeteeeeeeeeeeeeaeesseeeeaeetaes 1 3 Step 3 Position Imager and Symbol eeceeeceeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeneetseeeeeeeaes 1 4 Step 4 Install ES Poiree anios 1 5 Step 5 Select Model nico ii Rania 1 6 Step 6 Select Protocol and Connect c ccceeseceeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeees 1 7 Step 7 Locate the Symbol in the Field of View ceccsceseeteeeeeees 1 9 Step 8 Calibrate viii i eee 1 11 Step 9 Test Read Ratis sisisi meriin a 1 12 Step 10 Configure the Imager in ESP eceeeeeseeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeee 1 13 Step 11 Save Configuration in ESP ou eee eeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteneeeeeeeeeteees 1 14 Chapter 2 Using ESP EZ MOd 23 saiiects ote detest eet tae hited ee eats 2 2 Application Modei pni aai 2 3 Menu Toolbar asrin alae a 2 4 AUTOCOMNGCE ici ia 2 12 WVIOW Gi O 2 14 Navigating im ES Posna soinn i
54. StandardS ooooccconccnonccnnncnccnnonnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnonnnnnnn cnn eireta iaaea pEi nn A 23 PACTA A vasenes aE R a ses E a r yaseas tenet eines A 24 Appendix H Operational TIPS seccion aae eaa pice a e a pie a RE aeeie oiei A 25 Appendix USB to Serial Virtual COM Port Driver c ceceeeceeeceeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeseaeeeaeeeseresseeeeneeeaes A 26 Appendix J Glossary Of TEMES ii ti ERSE ai Eei A 29 Quadrus MINI Velocity User s Manual A 1 General Specifications Appendix A General Specifications Mechanical Height 1 25 4 mm Width 1 8 45 7 mm Depth 2 10 53 3 mm Weight 2 oz 57 g Environmental Enclosure IP54 category 2 Operating Tempurature 0 to 50 C 32 to 122 F Storage Tempurature 50 to 75 C 58 to 167 F Humidity up to 90 non condensing CE Mark General Immunity for Light Industry EN 55024 1998 A1 2001 A2 2003 Radiated and Conducted Emissions of ITE Equipment EN 55022 1998 A1 2000 A2 2003 for Class A products Light Source Type High output LEDs Light Collection Options Progressive scan square pixel Software adjustable shutter speed electronic shutter WVGA 752 x 480 pixels Connector Type 3 ft cable terminated with High Density 15 pin D Sub socket connector or USB type A connector Indicators LEDS Read Performance Power Read Status Green Flash Good Read Blue Target Pattern Symbol locator
55. Stored Frame Number of Symbols Frame 1 Frame 2 Frame 3 Read Cycle Result Stored Frame Number of Symbols Frame 1 Frame 2 Frame 3 Read Cycle Result Stored Frame 5 26 y No Read No Read Good Read Symbol 1 Good Read None y No Read No Read No Read No Read Frame 3 2 No Read No Read Good Read Symbol 1 No Read Frame 2 Quadrus MINI Velocity User s Manual Read Cycle Minimum Good Reads Definition This value specifies the number of times a symbol needs to be read to qualify as a good read Serial Cmd lt K221 minimum good reads gt Default 1 Options 1 to 255 Quadrus MINI Velocity User s Manual 5 27 Compare Mode Compare Mode In Compare Mode the imager attempts to compare the data in two symbols in the field of view The compare function sets Number of Symbols to 2 at the start of the read cycle to force the image system to capture and process two symbols At the end of the read cycle Number of Symbols is re set to 1 This causes the imager to format the output as if only one symbol was processed If the data in both symbols is identical only one data string is sent to the host If the data in both symbols is not identical or if there is only one symbol in the field of view or if there are no symbols in the field of view the read cycle will result in a No Read Serial Cmd lt K233 status gt Default 0 Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled 5 2
56. Symbol Quality Global Total Read Time Disabled Output Mode C Data Matrix ISOJIEC 16022 Parameters NUL SH ST Elx EA Symbol Contrast ACK BEL Bs HT BUE MT Print Growth _FF feai e DLE DCI Axial Non uniformity DC2 DC3 DC4 NAK SYN ETB Unused ECC CAN EM SUB ESC FS GS Grading Percent Cell Damage LAS us SPI Capture Time Click Delete to remove characters 8 8 Quadrus MINI Velocity User s Manual Symbol Quality Data Matrix Output Mode Note Data Matrix Output Mode applies only to ISO IEC 16022 symbol quality parameters Definition Output Mode specifies how output parameters are formatted if enabled Serial Cmd lt K708 symbol quality separator output mode gt Default Grade Options 0 Grade 1 Value Grade If in Grade Mode a grade A B C D is appended to the symbol data Value If in Value Mode the calculated value for the given parameter is appended to the symbol data Quadrus MINI Velocity User s Manual 8 9 ISO IEC 16022 Symbol Quality Output ISO IEC 16022 Symbol Quality Output Symbol Quality Parameters for Data Matrix symbols specified by ISO IEC 16022 Symbol Contrast Note Symbol Contrast is not supported when Q Mode is enabled Usage Lets the user know if contrast settings are less than acceptable Definition All the pixels that fall within the area of the test symbol including its required zone will be sorted by their reflecta
57. Threshold is met Serial Cmd lt K800 output on symbol contrast symbol contrast threshold output on print growth print growth threshola output on axial non uniformity axial non uniformity threshold output on UEC UEC threshold gt Default Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Output on Print Growth Usage Lets the user know if symbol quality is less than acceptable Definition If enabled toggles Output 1 to an active state when Print Growth Threshold is met Serial Cmd lt K800 output on symbol contrast symbol contrast threshold output on print growth print growth threshold output on axial non uniformity axial non uniformity threshold output on UEC UEC threshold gt Default Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled 7 38 Quadrus MINI Velocity User s Manual I O Parameters Output on Axial Non Uniformity Usage Lets the user know if symbol quality is less than acceptable Definition If enabled toggles Output 1 to an active state when Axial Non Uniformity Threshold is met Serial Cmd lt K800 outout on symbol contrast symbol contrast threshold output on print growth print growth threshold output on axial non uniformity axial non uniformity threshold output on UEC UEC threshold gt Default Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Output on Unused Error Correction Usage Lets the user know if symbol quality is less than acceptable Definition If enabled toggles Output 1 to an active state when
58. Used in a daisy chain setup in cases where the host needs to know which reader in the chain sent the data Definition Each reader in a daisy chain can be assigned a one or two character ID that will appear in front of decoded data and identify its source Serial Cmd lt K101 aux port mode baud rate parity stop bits data bits daisy chain i d status daisy chain i d gt Default Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Note Enable disable and length must be the same in all readers Daisy Chain ID Usage Used in a daisy chain setup in cases where the host needs to know which reader in the chain sent the data A one or two character prefix which identifies the particular daisy chain DANRINON reader from which the data is being sent to the host lt K101 aux port mode baud rate parity stop bits data bits daisy chain i d Serial Cmd status daisy chain i d gt Default 1 Options Any one or two ASCII characters Important The ASCII characters lt gt and can only be entered as hex pairs For lt lt K101h 3C gt For gt lt K101h 3E gt For lt K101h 2C gt See ASCII Character Entry Modifier on page 3 32 for a detailed explanation of how to enter ASCII characters as hex values Quadrus MINI Velocity User s Manual 3 17 Auxiliary Port System Data Status Auxiliary Port System Data Status Definition When enabled system data will be routed to the Auxiliary Port This includes decoded
59. Window of Interest columns will be modified to vertically frame the symbol plus an additional margin area around the symbol determined by the WOI Margin parameter Refer to the diagram below Row If the calibration process is successful the Window of Interest rows will be modified to horizontally frame the symbol plus an additional margin area around the symbol determined by the WOI Margin parameter Refer to the diagram below A 4 8 Quadrus MINI Velocity User s Manual Calibration Straight Line This feature is intended for use with linear symbologies If the calibration process is successful the orientation of the symbol is determined and the Window of Interest is modified according to the symbol orientation The scan line orientation is determined to be vertical if the symbol tilt is between 225 and 315 or between 45 and 135 Otherwise the scan line will be horizontal If the symbol is vertical the image column size will be set by the scan height parameter and will be configured for full row resolution If the symbol is horizontal the image row size will be set by the scan height parameter and will be configured for full column resolution The scan line will be centered in the middle of the symbol If the symbol is tilted such that the scan line will not pass completely through the symbol the scan width will be adjusted to include the entire symbol Refer to the diagram below ZA A Straight Line Framed
60. a command with multiple fields is processed some of the fields may have been processed properly while others were not The changes will appear in the string echoed back so that the user will know which fields did or did not change Serial Cmd lt K701 serial command echo status serial command beep status control hex output gt Default Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Serial Command Beep Status Usage Used to audibly verify the acceptance and validity of a command Definition Causes the imager to beep once whenever a K command is entered to indicate that the command was accepted and processed Function If an invalid command is entered the imager beeps 5 times to indicate an invalid entry However this does not necessarily mean that all data fields have been entered incorrectly Only one bad field needs to be found in order to activate the 5 beep response Serial Cmd lt K701 serial command echo status serial command beep status control hex output gt Default Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Quadrus MINI Velocity User s Manual 7 25 Serial Verification Control Hex Output Usage Useful for viewing settings with binary characters when using serial commands on a terminal Definition Determines the response to a Serial Command Echo or status request command When set to Control two characters are transmitted to represent a non displayable character For example a carriage return will be shown
61. a single row There are standard guidelines for how data is represented on checks and other financial documents but a great deal of flexibility is left to the discretion of the document designer As a result the internal MICR template reads any MICR string whose length is between 4 and 40 characters Only one consecutive space is allowed in a template On many checks the MICR string contains fields separated by more than one space These fields will be read and output as individual MICR strings Because of the wide variety of strings that will produce MICR output users are cautioned to check for partial reads of MICR text where only part of the targeted MICR string is actually in the image User Defined ISBN A user defined string and an ISBN string will be read simultaneously User Defined Price Field A user defined string and a Price field string will be read simultaneously User Defined MICR E 13B A user defined string and a Micro E 13B string will be read simultaneously Quadrus MINI Velocity User s Manual 6 41 OCR Configuration Orientation Definition The Orientation property tells the OCR algorithm how to interpret rotationally ambiguous results It specifies how to orient decoded OCR data output when the orientation cannot be determined from the physical OCR text itself OCR text does not provide true omnidirectionality Given the following OCR B text one would not know if the final output should be HOHOHOHO right or
62. aa A aa a aes 6 6 OR GOde ainda 6 7 Micro QRGOdO pakinat eia a 6 8 Coda 39 si ate ashlee Ad 6 9 Gode 128 EAN 1 28 aciccit cots ante ee dies eee ob 6 12 BEA Li ee a ee 6 15 Interleaved 2 0f 57 nui wane een Aaa 6 16 Code 93 ii ln tit 6 19 Codabab saves Ae ee ee eed 6 20 UPC EAN cti AAA 6 23 Ph rmac de sinisa iin a AB AR N NAS 6 27 Postal SyMbOlOGieS iiini eii ein ia eai 6 29 GS1 DataBar AS iii i e i naa 6 34 PDF ip ea nna a ee 6 36 MicroP DFAT Pisa e a Git annua ice a 6 38 COMPOSING secs te aaron 6 39 OGR Configurations 2 6 an anata acai heel ae ea 6 40 Quadrus MINI Velocity User s Manual v Table of Contents OCR User Templates ias 6 45 OCR Configuration by ESP isseire eerie neatenta nEn EPT TA 6 47 Narrow Margins Symbology D c cceeceeeceseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeseeeeeeeesneteas 6 49 Background Color tocata aa a a A 6 51 Chapter 7 1 O Parameters I O Parameters by ESP iii etnan an e a e i 7 2 I O Parameters Serial Commands eecceeceeeeeeeteeeeeeeeeeteeeteaeetenetsatens 7 3 Symbol Data QUtp t cion a eee 7 4 No Read Message iiris ianoaaeie aid 7 7 Bad Symbol Message cecceesceescessceeeeeeseeeeaeeeaeeseeseaeeeeeteaeeneeeeeteas 7 10 No Symbol Message ceccceesceeseesececeeeeeaeeceaeeeaeesseeseaeeeaeesseeeeaeeeeetaas 7 10 1D Stacked Symbology Qualification oonnonnicnnnnnn nnicnncnononncncncnnrnnnnns 7 11 2D Symbology Qualification o ooonicnnnnnnininnnconnnconncnoccnnccnnncnrarcann
63. alphanumeric symbol with a set of 35 characters each encoded by a set of 4 bars in 12 module positions All bars have a single width it is the presence 1 or absence 0 of bars in each of the twelve module positions that make BC412 binary This symbology is also bi directional and self clocking with a start character and a stop character Note BC412 is not supported when Q Mode is enabled Serial Cmd lt K481 status check character output fixed symbol length status fixed symbol length gt Default Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Check Character Output BC412 Usage Check Character Output added to the symbol provides additional security Definition When enabled the check character character is read and compared along with the symbol data When disabled symbol data is sent without the check character Serial Cmd lt K481 status check character output fixed symbol length status fixed symbol length gt Default Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Fixed Symbol Length Status BC412 Definition When enabled the imager will check the symbol length against the symbol length field If disabled any length will be considered valid Serial Cmd lt K481 status check character output fixed symbol length status fixed symbol length gt Default Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Fixed Symbol Length BC 412 Definition When enabled the check character character is read and compared alon
64. applications It is not recommended for applications that use very small symbols Quadrus MINI Velocity User s Manual 4 5 Calibration Options Symbol Type Serial Cmd lt K529 gain shutter speed focus position symbol type WOI framing WOI margin line scan height processing gt Default Enabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Disabled When this feature is disabled only the currently enabled symbologies will be considered during the calibration process Enabled When this feature is enabled autodiscrimination will be in effect during the calibration process All symbologies that are readable by the imager except PDF417 and Pharmacode will be considered during calibration Any new symbologies successfully decoded during calibration will remain enabled at the end of the process All enabled symbologies will remain enabled For example assume that only Code 39 is enabled at the beginning of calibration If a Code 128 symbol is read during calibration then Code 128 as well as Code 39 will be enabled after the calibration process is complete 4 6 Quadrus MINI Velocity User s Manual Calibration Window of Interest WOI Framing Definition If a WOI framing mode is enabled it will set the camera WOI to a full size image when calibration begins Once a symbol is decoded the camera WOI will be zoomed in both vertically and horizontally regardless of which WOI mode is enabled to include the symbol plus an additional marg
65. are to adjust image luminance to shown in this field the desired value 10 4 Quadrus MINI Velocity User s Manual Camera and IP Setup Evaluation In Evaluation you can view images currently in the imager capture and Receive Capture Decode Delete decode a symbol save it as a digital file and perform histogram and line ele Actee Image scan evaluations Save When you click on the Evaluation tab you will see the images that are currently Evaluation Histogram stored in the imager Line Scan Click Receive to refresh this view V JPEG Images Click Capture Decode to display the current stored image Only one capture and decode event will occur regardless JPEG Image Quality of read cycle settings High Click Read to trigger a read cycle If 100 1 100 there is enough time in the read cycle nen up to 32 good reads or 6 full scale unavailable when images can be captured and displayed using JPEG depending on the size of the images Contrast and depending on the number enabled in Number of Captures under Capture Mode in the Camera Setup menu tree to the left of the tabs If you click Save the current image will be saved to the location of your choice Note An image can only be saved in the format in which it was uploaded to ESP JPEG images will be saved as jpg and bitmaps will be saved as bmp peneing 182002 64 me When you click the JPEG Image box notice that the Line Scan butt
66. as 4M Serial Cmd lt K701 serial command echo status serial command beep status control hex output gt Default Control Options 0 Control 1 Hex 7 26 Quadrus MINI Velocity User s Manual I O Parameters EZ Button The EZ Button has four positions selectable by the length of time the button is held down and indicated by one two three and four beeps in succession Each position can be programmed for any of eight options Definition Serves as a master switch to enable disable the EZ Button status Serial Cmd lt K770 global status default on power on load configuration database save for power on gt Default Enabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled 2 Trigger 3 Unlatch Outputs 4 Parameter Switch Global Status Disabled When set to Disabled the EZ Button does not function Enabled When selected the EZ Button is enabled and the function of each button position is selected by the EZ Button Mode command Trigger When selected the EZ Button acts as a trigger for the imager to start and end read cycles All other button operations are inactive In External The read cycle endures for as long as the EZ Button is pressed unless a Level timeout occurs and Timeout is enabled for End of Read Cycle In External As with Level Edge allows a read cycle to be initiated by pressing the EZ Edge Button but unlike Level the read cycle ends with a good read output a timeout or a new trigger Unlatc
67. at any time Good Read Match Counter Reset Sending lt W gt sets the Match Counter to 00000 Mismatch Counter Sending lt X gt displays the number of decoded symbols since the last reset that do not match the master symbol Mismatch Counter Reset Sending lt Y gt sets the Mismatch Counter to zero 13 6 Quadrus MINI Velocity User s Manual Utilities Device Control Device Control by ESP Outputs Output 2 Pulse Output 3 Pulse Extras Disable Reader Enable Reader Device Control by Serial Command Output 1 Pulse Sending lt L1 gt activates the link between Output 1 and Output 1 of the host connector regardless of Master Symbol or Output 1 status Output 2 Pulse Sending lt L2 gt activates the link between Output 2 and Output 2 of the host connector regardless of Master Symbol or Output 2 status Output 3 Pulse Sending lt L3 gt activates the link between Output 3 and Output 3 of the host connector regardless of Master Symbol or Output 3 status Disable Reader Sending lt I gt will turn the imager OFF end the current read cycle and will not allow the imager to enter another read cycle until turned ON This feature is useful during extended periods of time when no symbols are being decoded or the imager is being configured Disabling the imager will not affect any commands that have already been downloaded Enable Reader Sending lt H gt will turn the imager ON and
68. based on a 16 mil 60 dpi POSTNET symbol ESP ESP Untitled File Model Options Connect Help E App Mode Autoconnect Switch Model Locate Calibrate M Fast Welcome to Easy Setup Program i Liae 1 First position the imager at the desired Focal Distance Position the postal symbol in the center of the imager s field of view Note To avoid glare set the angle of the reader about 15 degrees relative to the symbol 2 Click Locate to begin A A sacl Daall sUleral U Test Stop ES I Decodes per Second M AEC 30 2 131034 64 For Help press F1 Quadrus MINI Velocity User s Manual 6 29 Postal Symbologies Postal Symbology Type Usage The following 1D Postal Symbologies are used in mail sortation auditing certified mail registered mail metered mail and point of sale POS applications Definition Determines the postal symbology that will be decoded by the imager Postal symbology decode performance depends on accurate sampling density information Sampling density is determined by measuring the width in pixels of a symbol image and then dividing that value by the width of the actual symbol in inches or meters For example an image of a one inch wide symbol that is 200 pixels across would have a sampling density of 200 dots per inch The following table shows the range of supported sampling densities 5 cae Maximum Unit of ymbology ample Sam
69. capture time locate time decode time pixels per element ECC level matrix size quiet zone symbol angle gt Default Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Symbol Angle Data Matrix Only Definition When this feature is enabled the symbol orientation is appended to data output as a degree value representing the angle of the Data Matrix symbol s L shaped finder pattern relative to the imager Serial Cmd lt K710 percent cell damage total read time capture time locate time decode time pixels per element ECC level matrix size quiet zone symbol angle gt Default Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Quadrus MINI Velocity User s Manual 8 15 Microscan Symbol Quality Output by ESP Microscan Symbol Quality Output by ESP ESP s Symbol Quality interface allows you to evaluate Data Matrix symbols for compliance with a rigorous set of standards such as Locate Time Capture Time and Decode Time First determine which parameters you want to evaluate using the Symbol Quality tree control Grading Percent Cell Damage Disabled Capture Time Disabled Locate Time Disabled Decode Time Disabled Pixels Per Element Disabled ECC Level Disabled Matrix Size Disabled Quiet Zone Disabled Symbol Angle Disabled Once you have set these Data Matrix evaluation parameters go to the Preferences Tab and set your Data Matrix Grading Report output preferences After your output preferences are set click the Data Matrix
70. data and diagnostic warning messages When disabled system data will not be routed to the Auxiliary Port Serial Cmd lt K146 aux port system data status gt Default Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled 3 18 Quadrus MINI Velocity User s Manual Communications Daisy Chain Autoconfigure Usage For quick setup and configuration of your daisy chain network Definition The command to autoconfigure the daisy chain is sent to the primary imager and the software responds in the following ways Counts the number of secondary readers in the daisy chain Assigns an internal ID number 1 n to each secondary reader where the first secondary reader is number 1 the primary reader s ID being a 0 Propagates the communications settings and the relevant operating modes of the primary imager to the host and auxiliary ports of each secondary reader Resets each secondary reader Confirms that each secondary reader has acquired the new settings Serial Cmd lt K150DAISY gt Note All secondary readers must be set to Serial for Daisy Chain to function When setting up a daisy chain operation perform the following steps 1 Set the primary imager the one connected to the host to Serial This sets all the imagers in the chain to Serial when the command is executed Before Autoconfigure you must set the primary imager to Serial S gt Primary Secondary Secondary Imager Imager Imager
71. enabled Code 93 will be active for this database index Interleaved 2 of 5 Add 128 If enabled Interleaved 2 of 5 will be active for this database index UPC EAN Add 256 If enabled UPC EAN will be active for this database index PDF417 Add 512 If enabled PDF417 will be active for this database index MicroPDF417 Add 1024 If enabled MicroPDF417 will be active for this database index BC412 Add 2048 If enabled BC412 will be active for this database index Note BC412 is not supported when Q Mode is enabled Pharmacode Add 4096 If enabled Pharmacode will be active for this database index DataBar 14 RSS 14 Add 8192 If enabled DataBar 14 will be active for this database index Important If the stacked and non stacked operation is required the DataBar 14 command must be configured as follows lt K482 2 gt If the DataBar 14 status parameter in the lt K482 gt command is set to either DISABLED or ENABLED the imager will only read non stacked DataBar 14 symbols DataBar Limited RSS Limited Add 16384 If enabled DataBar Limited will be active for this database index DataBar Expanded RSS Expanded Add 32768 If enabled DataBar Expanded will be active for this database index Important If the stacked and non stacked operation is required the DataBar Expanded command must be configured as follows lt K484 2 gt If the DataBar Expanded status parameter in the lt K484 gt command is set
72. end the test Calibrate The calibration routine that will optimize the imager by comparing Read Rates at various camera and image processing settings Enter App Mode to access configuration trees and other setup features Click Calibrate to begin the initial calibration routine Calbration is explained at the left of the EZ Mode screen and also in Quick Start ESP ESP Untitled File Model Options Connect Help gt E App Mode Autoconnect Switch Model Calibrate I Fast z o gt Welcome to Easy Setup Program Click Locate to activate the Quadrus MINI Velocity s blue target pattern LEDs Center the target pattern on the symbol The display shows you where the symbol is located in the imager s field of view Starts Read Rate test amp M ac 30 0 00 inches For Help press Fl CONNECTED I Decodes per Second v Ends Read Rate test 2 2 Quadrus MINI Velocity User s Manual Using ESP Application Mode From EZ Mode you can click on the App Mode button to access specific configuration menus Utilities tools Camera setup Output Format options and a Terminal window where serial commands can be entered gt App Mode Note The App Mode and EZ Mode buttons appear in the same position to allow easy switching between these primary modes
73. for EZ Trax e eeceeccececeseseeeseeeeeeeeeeeseaeeseeeeeeeeaeessaeeeaeesaaeeeaeeseeseaeeseeeseneesas 5 29 After you ve established communications and completed basic read rate testing you will need to address the spatial and timing parameters associated with your application This section explains those parameters Quadrus MINI Velocity User s Manual 5 1 Read Cycle by ESP Read Cycle by ESP Parameters ESP Values we Read Cycle App Mode Multisymbol Click this button Trigger to bring up the Serial Trigger App Mode view Decodes Before Output 1 End of Read Cycle i O Mode Timeowe y A Read Cycle Timeout Capture Mode New Trigger Capture Time Timeout or New Trigger Read Ere P Last Frame Store Noread Image Click this button to Image Processing Settings bring up the Read Cycle tree control To open nested options To change a setting single click the double click the setting and use your cursor to scroll through the options 5 2 Quadrus MINI Velocity User s Manual Read Cycle Read Cycle Serial Commands Trigger Mode Filter Duration lt K200 trigger mode leading edge trigger filter trailing edge trigger filter gt Serial Trigger Character lt K201 serial trigger character gt External Trigger State lt K202 external trigger state gt End of Read Cycle lt K220 end of read cycle read cycle timeout gt Minimum
74. gt gt Processing Settings Current 1000 20 f400 Disabl M fo fo 480 E Adapt 128 Stand Disabl White Code 39 10 fiooo f20 faoo Disab J 0 lo faso 752 f dapii 128 Stand Disabl White Disabled Test Show Database Index in Output I Sort Index Positions on Good Reads 000000000 V Capture for Every Index Calibrate Receive Settings Send Settings Load Current To Index Load Index To Current Camera parameters Capture Index Shutter Speed Gain Focal Distance Pixel Binning located in the left half of the highlighted area Image capture dimensions Top Left Height Width located in the right half of the highlighted area Quadrus MINI Velocity User s Manual 11 13 Database Mode Region of Interest ROI When Image Dimensions is set to Region of Interest the database image dimension parameters are IP and decode settings and they determine the region or area of the captured image to be processed ROI coordinate data is based on the full image size The WOI of the captured image will be configured to cover all the ROI settings in the current active database entry In the following example there are three active database settings each with a different ROI configuration Their coordinates are based at point 0 0 of the full scale image 752 x 480 In this example DB1 and DB3 determine the size of the captured image WOI while DB2 has no impact The image WOI is not configu
75. host requires redundant check character verification An error correcting routine in which the check character character is added lt K472 status check character status check character output status symbol length 1 symbol length 2 guard bar status range mode status gt Disabled 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Check Character Output Status Interleaved 2 of 5 Definition Serial Cmd Default Options 6 16 When enabled a check character character is sent along with the symbol data for added data security lt K472 status check character status check character output status symbol length 1 symbol length 2 guard bar status range mode status gt Disabled 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Quadrus MINI Velocity User s Manual Symbologies Symbol Length 1 Interleaved 2 of 5 Usage Useful in applications where 2 5 symbols of a specific length are required Definition The Symbol Length 1 field is one of two fields against which the decoded symbol is compared before accepting it as valid or rejecting it Serial Cmd lt K472 status check character status check character output symbol length 1 symbol length 2 guard bar status range mode status gt Default 10 Options O to 64 even only Important If Range Mode is disabled the length of the symbol must match either Symbol Length 1 or Symbol Length 2 to be considered a valid symbol If Range Mode is enabled Symbol Length 1 and Symbol Length 2 form a rang
76. imager returns lt b BOOT_CHECKSUM gt lt a APP_CHECKSUM gt lt p PROFILE_CHECKSUM gt When you send lt la gt a request for the application code checksum the imager returns lt a APP_CHECKSUM gt When you send lt b gt a request for the boot code checksum the imager returns lt b BOOT_CHECKSUM gt e When you send lt p gt a request for profile module checksum the imager returns lt p PROFILE_CHECKSUM gt Quadrus MINI Velocity User s Manual 13 17 Default Reset Save Default Reset Save Understanding and controlling your imager s active saved and default settings is critical to its successful operation Serial ESP first right click in Function Cmd any menu tree EZ Button Save to Reader gt Reset lt A gt Sand No Save No 0 E a Reset and Recall Microscan Defaults lt Ard gt No No o g g Reset and Recall Microscan White lt ArdWB gt No No g 3 Balance Defaults Reset and Recall Power On Parameters lt Arp gt No No Reset and Recall Customer Default ates No No Parameters Save to Reader Save Current Settings for Power On lt Z gt Send and Save No 5 Save Current Settings as Customer lt Ze gt la ro as No 9 Default Parameters for Power On Defaults for Power On S Recall Microscan Default Parameters and Save for Power On ae No No Reset Microscan Default White Balance 3 Parameters and Save for Power On lt 2 WB gt Me No a
77. initiates the read cycle A delimited trigger character is one that either starts or ends the read cycle and is enclosed by delimiters such as lt gt lt K201 serial trigger character gt Space bar Any single ASCII character including control characters except NUL 00 in hex an existing host command character or an on line protocol character Control characters entered on the command line are displayed in the menu as mnemonic characters Note Serial Data or Serial Data or External Edge triggering mode must be enabled for Serial Trigger Character to take effect Important The ASCII characters lt gt and can only be entered as hex pairs For lt lt K201h 3C gt For gt lt K201h 3E gt For lt K201h 2C gt See ASCII Character Entry Modifier on page 3 32 for a detailed explanation of how to enter ASCII characters as hex values 5 12 Quadrus MINI Velocity User s Manual Read Cycle Start Trigger Character Non Delimited Usage Definition Serial Cmd Default Options Useful in applications where different characters are required to start a read cycle A single ASCII host serial trigger character that starts the read cycle and is not enclosed by delimiters such as lt and gt Non delimited Start characters can be defined and will function according to the trigger event When defining Start trigger characters the following rules apply In External Edge the imager looks only for t
78. is necessary because the USB HID standards define HID Reports as fixed length yet the imager or host may require a smaller data size in any given report DATA Size 62 bytes fixed length Value 0x00 to OxFF Note The Data field is left justified meaning it begins immediately after the Length field All unused data space is NUL 00 in hex padded Data values can be binary meaning that they span the entire 8 bit range of 0x00 to OxFF 3 26 Quadrus MINI Velocity User s Manual Communications Report Format Examples For clarity all report format examples are shown as follows report fields separated by an underscore _ REPORT ID and LENGTH fields shown as decimal values data fields shown as printable ASCII characters and the number of NUL padding bytes shown as decimal values nn IN report to host 1_11_A 002374938 51 REPORT ID 1 Microscan HID LENGTH 11 DATA A 02374938 This is a Code 39 symbol NUL padding 51 bytes OUT report from host to imager 1_27_ lt K200 3 gt lt K220 0 300 gt lt K714 gt 35 REPORT ID 1 Microscan HID LENGTH 27 DATA lt K200 3 gt lt K220 0 300 gt lt K714 gt These commands enable External Edge set a 3 second timeout and request the No Read configuration command NUL padding 35 bytes IN report to host 1_62 lt K714 1 ALONG MESSAGE STREAMED OVER MULTIPLE MICROSCAN HID RE 0 REPORT ID 1 Microscan HID LENGTH 62 DATA
79. is useful if you want to receive upload the imager s settings and save them as a file for future use For example if your imager has settings that you do not want to change choosing Yes would allow you to load those settings to ESP and save them in an ESP file for later retrieval Receiving the imager s settings will also assure that you will not be subsequently saving any unwanted changes that you or someone else has made previously in ESP Saving Send No Save lt A gt Saves ESP settings to current memory Receive Reader Settings i Send and Save Send and Save lt Z gt Derat current Men sorting Send and Save as Customer Defaults i 4 Default all ESP Settings Activates all changes in current memory and saves to the imager Advanced Options for power on Send and Save as Customer Defaults lt Zc gt Saves your default settings for quick retrieval This option will be visible only if you have checked Enable Send and Save as Customer Defaults in ESP Preferences 2 16 Quadrus MINI Velocity User s Manual Using ESP Defaulting When you select Default Current Menu Settings or Default all ESP Settings you are only defaulting the ESP settings Advanced Options Send Current View This is the same as Save to Reader gt Send No Save except that only the commands in the current configuration Save to Reader tree are sent Receive Reader Settings Default Current Menu Settings Default all Setti Send
80. lt K472 status check character status check character output symbol length 1 symbol length 42 guard bar status range mode status gt Default Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Range Mode Status Interleaved 2 of 5 Usage Useful in applications where 2 5 symbols of a specific length are required Definition When Range Mode is disabled the imager checks the value of the symbol length against the values set in Symbol Length 1 and Symbol Length 2 If the symbol length does not match either of the preset values then it is rejected as invalid When Range Mode is enabled Symbol Length 1 and Symbol Length 2 are combined to form a range of valid symbol lengths Any symbol length that does not fall into this range is rejected as an invalid symbol Either of the preset symbol length values in the Symbol Length 1 and Symbol Length 2 fields can form the start or end of the range Serial Cmd lt K472 status check character status check character output symbol length 1 symbol length 2 guard bar status range mode status gt Default Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled 6 18 Quadrus MINI Velocity User s Manual Symbologies Code 93 Usage Used in some clinical applications Definition Code 93 is a variable length continuous symbology employing four element widths Each Code 93 character has nine modules that may be either black or white Each character contains three bars and three spaces Serial Cmd
81. lt K475 status fixed symbol length status symbol length gt Default Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Fixed Symbol Length Status Code 93 Definition When disabled the imager will accept any Code 93 symbol provided is doesn t exceed the system s maximum capabilities When enabled the imager will reject any Code 93 symbol that doesn t match the fixed symbol length Serial Cmd lt K475 status fixed symbol length status symbol length gt Default Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Symbol Length Code 93 Definition This is the symbol length value against which all Code 93 symbols will be compared Serial Cmd lt K475 status fixed symbol length status symbol length gt Default 10 Options 1 to 64 Quadrus MINI Velocity User s Manual 6 19 Codabar Codabar Usage Used in photo finishing and library applications Previously used in medical applications but not typically used in newer medical applications Definition Codabar is a 16 bit character set 0 through 9 and the characters and with start stop codes and at least two distinctly different bar widths Serial Cmd lt K471 status start stop match start stop output large intercharacter gap fixed symbol length status symbol length check character type check character output gt Default Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Start Stop Match Codabar Definition When disabled the imager will decode C
82. message is output 7 12 Quadrus MINI Velocity User s Manual I O Parameters Symbol Size 1 Definition Checks for symbol sizes for a specified number of elements In the case of rectangular symbols checks the longer side Serial Cmd lt K718 finder pattern status symbol size mode symbol size 1 symbol size 2 symbol size tolerance dimension mode dimension 1 dimension 2 dimension tolerance orientation mode orientation value gt Default 10 Options 8 to 88 elements Symbol Size 2 Definition Checks for symbol sizes for a specified number of elements In the case of rectangular symbols checks the shorter side Serial Cmd lt K718 finder pattern status symbol size mode symbol size 1 symbol size 2 symbol size tolerance dimension mode dimension 1 dimension 2 dimension tolerance orientation mode orientation value gt Default 10 Options 8 to 88 elements Symbol Size Tolerance Definition Sets the allowable deviation up or down for symbol sizes specified in Symbol Size 1 and Symbol Size 2 Serial Cmd lt K718 finder pattern status symbol size mode symbol size 1 symbol size 2 symbol size tolerance dimension mode dimension 1 dimension 2 dimension tolerance orientation mode orientation value gt Default 2 Options 0 to 10 Quadrus MINI Velocity User s Manual 7 13 2D Symbology Qualification Dimension Mode Definition Enables searches for symbol Dimension 1 and Dimension 2 Serial Cmd lt K718 finder pattern
83. mismatch replacement string gt Quadrus MINI Velocity User s Manual 9 3 Overview of Matchcode Overview of Matchcode Definition Matchcode allows the user to store master symbol data in the imager s memory compare that data against other symbol data and define how symbol data and or discrete signal output will be directed A master symbol database can be set up for up to 10 master symbols Note Matchcode will function with multiple symbols however if Matchcode Type is set to Sequential or if Triggering Mode is set to Continuous Read 1 Output the imager will behave as if Number of Symbols were set to 1 regardless of the user defined configuration Usage Matchcode is used in applications to sort route or verify data based on matching the specific symbol in a variety of ways as defined in this section For example a manufacturer might sort a product based on dates that are embedded in the symbol Steps for Entering and Using Master Symbols 1 Set Triggering Mode to External or Serial 2 Choose the method of symbol comparison that fits your application 3 Define the output you want to achieve with your matchcode setup a Symbol data output b Discrete output 4 Select the number of master symbols you want to create 5 Decide which of 4 ways you want to enter your master symbol s a Use ESP to type master symbol data directly b Send a serial command with symbol data in the form of lt M231 master symbol data
84. nn nn rnr cnn nc 11 2 Number of Active INd x S su ices ceccaus ecos inicia a in idad 11 3 Gonfiguration Database Status ici 11 4 Database Mode ici oe 11 11 Save Current Settings to Configuration DatabaS oocicccincnninicnnccnncnnccnnnnccnonnnonn crac cnnncnnncnnc 11 16 Load Current Settings from Configuration DatabaSe oooncccinnnnnnccinncnnccnncccnonncnnnnnnnnnnncannncnnnncno 11 17 Request Selected Index Settings eccececcsececeeeeeneeceeeeeeeeeseeseeeeeaeecaaeeeaeesseeseaeeeeeseaeeneeeenaeee 11 18 Request All Configuration Database Settings ooooococinnccinccinconoccconccnocnnanc conc n nan nnnnnnnrnnann cnn 11 19 This section concerns the various capture settings and processing settings that can be used to fine tune the Quadrus MINI Velocity s performance in your application Quadrus MINI Velocity User s Manual 11 1 Configuration Database Serial Commands Configuration Database Serial Commands Number of Active Indexes lt K252 number of active database settings database sort gt Configuration Database Status lt K255 index shutter speed gain focal distance pixel binning row pointer column pointer row depth column width threshold mode fixed threshold value processing mode narrow margins background color symbology gt Save Current Settings to Database lt K255 index gt Load Current Settings from Database lt K255 index gt Request Selected Index Settings lt K255 in
85. of the cycle mode Serial Cmd lt K512 threshold mode fixed threshold value cycle min cycle max cycle step adaptive contrast percent gt Default 0 Options 0 to 255 Important Cycle Min must be a smaller numerical value than Cycle Max Quadrus MINI Velocity User s Manual 10 21 IP Threshold Cycle Max Definition Ending value of the cycle mode Serial Cmd lt K512 threshold mode fixed threshold value cycle min cycle max cycle step adaptive contrast percent gt Default 255 Options 0 to 255 Important Cycle Max must be a greater numerical value than Cycle Min Cycle Step Definition The numerical value of a single cycle mode increment Serial Cmd lt K512 threshold mode fixed threshold value cycle min cycle max cycle step adaptive contrast percent gt Default 10 Options 0 to 255 Adaptive Contrast Percent Definition Serial Cmd Default Options 10 22 The percentage value that sets the adaptive threshold map Useful for underprinted or overprinted symbols For example if a value of 110 is entered the adaptive threshold will be 110 of the original values lt K512 threshold mode fixed threshold value cycle min cycle max cycle step adaptive contrast percent gt 100 1 to 200 Quadrus MINI Velocity User s Manual Camera and IP Setup Number of Symbols in Field of View Definition Serial Cmd Default Options This command allows the user to determine how FLM will beh
86. of the processing is complete when the image has been captured the time required to complete the processing of the image frame will be less approx 10 ms frame However while an image is being captured the imager is dedicated to operating on the current image being captured This means that an image capture event will impact the processing time of previously captured image frames The benefit of this mode is the decrease in capture to decode time Quadrus MINI Velocity User s Manual 5 21 Capture Timing Capture Timing Note Capture Timing applies only to Rapid Capture Mode Time Before First Capture Usage In almost any moving line application a time delay is needed to ensure that a symbol will be in the imager s field of view at the beginning of the capture sequence Definition Time Before First Capture in a moving line application is the time between an external trigger event and the occurrence of the first capture Serial Cmd lt K242 time before 1st capture time between capture 1 and capture 2 311 me between capture 7 and capture 8 gt Default 0 Options 0 to 65535 2 097 seconds in 32 uS increments Start of gt Read Cycle y B B y Time Before First Capture i Processing 5 22 Quadrus MINI Velocity User s Manual Read Cycle Time Between Captures Usage Definition Serial Cmd Default Options This is useful in applications
87. of this feature Before After 240 250 32 8792 Focus Shutter Gain Quality Beginning calibration Processing Gain 32 Medum gt i Shutter Speed 250 hd L Focal Distance Quick Focus zj Symbology Settin ce Symbology Type ECC 200 Code 39 z Cancel M Composite Enabled Save Window of Interest WOI Framing Disabled X WOI Margin 75 aj Linescan Height 64 Before After 240 250 38 8792 Fan Focus Shutter Gain Quality Capture Settings Processing Gai 38 Rad Medium Y Shutter Speed 250 bA Focal Distance Quick Focus zi Symbology Settings aoe Symbology Type ECC 200 Code 39 z Cancel IV Composite Enabled Save Window of Interest WOI Framing Disabled X WOI Margin 75 4 Linescan Height 64 gt ESP s Calibration interface shown during a calibration routine Quadrus MINI Velocity User s Manual ESP s Calibration interface shown after a calibration routine 10 9 Window of Interest Window of Interest The active pixel area of the image sensor is called the Window of Interest WOI The WOI allows the user to select an area of the field of view in which the desired symbol is located The programmable window of interest increases decode speed improves threshold and makes it easy to select specific symbols from among several in the field of view The user provides the upper left pixel location and the size
88. orientation mode orientation value gt Default 0 Options 0 to 752 pixels Dimension 2 Definition Checks symbol dimension for a specified number of pixels In the case of rectangular symbols checks the shorter side Serial Cmd lt K718 finder pattern status symbol size mode symbol size 1 symbol size 2 symbol size tolerance dimension mode dimension 1 dimension 2 dimension tolerance orientation mode orientation value gt Default 0 Options 0 to 480 pixels Dimension Tolerance Definition Sets the allowable deviation in percentage for symbol sizes specified in Dimension 1 and Dimension 2 Serial Cmd lt K718 finder pattern status symbol size mode symbol size 1 symbol size 2 symbol size tolerance dimension mode dimension 1 dimension 2 dimension tolerance orientation mode orientation value gt Default 10 Options 0 to 100 Quadrus MINI Velocity User s Manual 7 15 2D Symbology Qualification Orientation Mode Definition Sets the orientation value Serial Cmd lt K718 finder pattern status symbol size mode symbol size 1 symbol size 2 symbol size tolerance dimension mode dimension 1 dimension 2 dimension tolerance orientation mode orientation value gt Default Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Bad No Symbol Output 2 Object Qualification 3 Enable Both Disabled Decoded messages are output but no attempt is made to qualify symbols or to output Bad Symbol or No Symbol messages Bad No Symbol Out
89. read cycle active state to begin when a trigger change of state from an external sensing device is received However the passing of an object out of sensor range does not end the read cycle The read cycle ends with a good read output or depending on the End of Read Cycle setting a timeout or new trigger occurs lt K200 3 gt Quadrus MINI Velocity User s Manual Read Cycle Serial Data Usage Serial Data is effective in a highly controlled environment where the host knows precisely when the object is in the field of view It is also useful in determining if a No Read has occurred Definition In Serial Data the imager accepts an ASCII character from the host or controlling device as a trigger to start a read cycle A Serial Data trigger behaves the same as an External Edge trigger Serial commands are entered inside angle brackets as shown here lt t gt Serial Cmd lt K200 4 gt Note In Serial Data sending a non delimited start serial character will start a read cycle however a non delimited stop serial character has no effect Serial Data and Edge Usage Serial Data or External Edge is seldom used but can be useful in an application that primarily uses an external sensing device but occasionally needs to be triggered manually An auxiliary terminal can be connected to the auxiliary port so the user can send the serial trigger character through the imager to the host Definition In this mode the imager a
90. read cycle will only end once it receives the first trigger after reaching the predetermined Number of Captures setting First trigger Starts the read Captures on every trigger Capture cycle F a yY y gt Read cycle ends PA on New Trigger or Timeout as AS configured Processing 5 20 Quadrus MINI Velocity User s Manual Read Cycle Pre Processing Definition When enabled this feature reduces the time between image capture and decode by beginning the processing task while an image is being captured Serial Cmd lt K241 capture mode number of captures rapid capture mode pre processing gt Default Enabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Disabled When Pre Processing is disabled the imager can process previously captured images while image capture events are taking place The benefit of this operation is that the image capture events have minimal impact on image processing Therefore if the imager is configured to capture 4 consecutive frames but it is only looking for one decode it could process and decode a symbol on the first image frame before all 4 image frames were captured If Pre Processing were enabled the imager could not start processing an image frame until all 4 image frames were captured since they are consecutive captures Enabled When Pre Processing is enabled the imager performs pre processing tasks while an image is being captured Since some
91. second and release when you hear one short beep The amber 20 LED will illuminate and you will see the blue target pattern projected from the front of the imager e Center the target pattern on the symbol Note To end all EZ Button functions press the EZ Button once and quickly release 1 10 Quadrus MINI Velocity User s Manual Quick Start Step 8 Calibrate Quadrus MINI Velocity settings can be adjusted automatically for optimum symbol decoding performance by either the EZ Button or by ESP During the calibration routine the reader will flash its amber Read Rate percent LEDs and red illumination LEDs while searching camera settings and determining the best configuration for decoding symbol data Upon successful completion of this routine a green LED pattern will flash brightly and illuminate the symbol If unsuccessful the imager will emit 5 short beeps and stop searching i P fo Calibrate by EZ Button 1 Hold down the EZ Button for about two seconds and release when you hear two short beeps The 20 and 40 LEDs will illuminate 2 The imager will search camera settings to determine the best configuration for decoding symbol data Note To end all EZ Button functions press the EZ Button once and quickly release Calibrate by ESP 1 Click the Calibrate button Calibrate 2 The imager will search camera settings to determine the best configuration for decoding
92. sets of object coordinates for the first successfully decoded symbol are attached to the symbol data output in the following format nnn mmm where nnn is a 3 digit X coordinate and mmm is a 3 digit Y coordinate The validation separator is located between the end of the already formatted data and the first coordinate point The point with the lowest X Y sum will be output first followed by the next three points in a clockwise direction Example 032 040 287 056 287 279 048 271 Quadrus MINI Velocity User s Manual 7 47 Image Output Image Output Usage This feature allows the user to select what read cycle condition triggers the image file output Definition Used to output an image file when a specified read cycle condition has been met such as No Read or Good Read When the read cycle is complete the normal read cycle output will occur including any configured postamble or preamble data The read cycle will the check if image output is enabled and if the specified read cycle condition has been met If both these conditions are true the image file will be output to the user specified communication port in the user specified image file format Serial Cmd lt K739 image output mode communication port file format JPEG quality gt Default Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Good Read 2 No Read 3 No Read or Good Read 4 Mismatch Good Read If a Good Read condition is met during the read cycle
93. size 2 symbol size tolerance dimension mode dimension 1 dimension 2 dimension tolerance orientation mode orientation value gt Default Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Symbol Size Mode Note If Symbol Size 1 is larger than Symbol Size 2 it will be automatically reversed in the algorithm Definition Specifies the outputs resulting from the searches for Symbol Size 1 and Symbol Size 2 Serial Cmd lt K718 finder pattern status symbol size mode symbol size 1 symbol size 2 symbol size tolerance dimension mode dimension 1 dimension 2 dimension tolerance orientation mode orientation value gt Default Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Bad No Symbol Output 2 Object Qualification 3 Enable Both Disabled Decoded messages are output but no attempt to qualify symbols or output Bad or No Symbol messages is undertaken Bad No Symbol Output Checks first for decodes If no symbol is decoded checks for symbol size If both Symbol Size 1 and Symbol Size 2 requirements are met a Bad Symbol message is output If neither are met aNo Symbol message is output Object Qualification Checks first for matches to symbol size If qualified attempts to decode If no decodes are found within the specified read cycle parameters outputs a No Read message Enable Both Same as Object Qualification except that if no objects qualify then a No Symbol message is output if at least one object qualifies then a Bad Symbol
94. status symbol size mode symbol size 1 symbol size 2 symbol size tolerance dimension mode dimension 1 dimension 2 dimension tolerance orientation mode orientation value gt Default Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Bad No Symbol Output 2 Object Qualification 3 Enable Both Disabled Decoded messages are output but no attempt to qualify symbols or output Bad Symbol or No Symbol messages is undertaken Bad No Symbol Output Checks first for decodes If no symbol is decoded checks for symbol dimension If both Dimension 1 and Dimension 2 requirements are met a Bad Symbol message is output If neither are met aNo Symbol message is output Object Qualification Checks first for matches to symbol dimension If qualified attempts to decode If no decodes are found within the specified read cycle parameters outputs a No Read message Enable Both Same as Object Qualification except that if neither Dimension 1 nor Dimension 2 qualifies then a No Symbol message is output if either Dimension 1 or Dimension 2 qualifies then a Bad Symbol message is output 7 14 Quadrus MINI Velocity User s Manual I O Parameters Dimension 1 Definition Checks symbol dimension for a specified number of pixels In the case of rectangular symbols checks the longer side Serial Cmd lt K718 finder pattern status symbol size mode symbol size 1 symbol size 2 symbol size tolerance dimension mode dimension 1 dimension 2 dimension tolerance
95. symbols are present in the same image capture and one of them is successfully decoded no image will be output No Read and Good Read Outputs the first No Read or Good Read image in the read cycle Mismatch Outputs the image of the first mismatch condition Image Format Definition Selects the format of the image output file Serial Cmd lt K757 status comm port image mode image format JPEG quality object info output grade output gt Default Compressed Options 0 Lossless 1 Compressed Lossless A lossless image is one that is in a high resolution format and that will not lose resolution even when manipulated and saved multiple times When Lossless is enabled the JPEG Quality setting has no effect Compressed Outputs the image in JPEG format Image quality is determined by the JPEG Quality setting JPEG Quality Definition Sets the amount of JPEG image compression A value of 1 represents the highest compression and lowest image quality and 100 represents the lowest compression and highest image quality Serial Cmd lt K757 status comm port image mode image format JPEG quality object info output grade output gt Default 90 Options 1 to 100 percent Quadrus MINI Velocity User s Manual 7 57 Configuring EZ Trax Output Object Info Output Definition If a symbol is decoded during an image capture the symbol type and other supplementary symbol information is also included Serial Cmd lt K757 co
96. the image file corresponding with the first Good Read will be output The image file will immediately follow the read cycle output and postambles For a Good Read condition to occur all symbols in the read cycle must qualify No Read If a No Read condition occurs during the read cycle the image file corresponding with the first No Read will output The image file will immediately follow the read cycle output and postambles There are conditions in which the read cycle may have a No Read condition but the image will not be output For example if the read cycle is looking for two No Read symbols in the same image capture but one is a Good Read the image will not be output because it is not considered a No Read image No Read or Good Read If a No Read condition or a Good Read condition occurs the first image of either kind will be output Mismatch If a Good Read occurs during the read cycle but the image is a Mismatch condition the first Mismatch image will be output 7 48 Quadrus MINI Velocity User s Manual I O Parameters Communication Port Definition This setting selects the communication port through which the image file will be transferred to the host Serial Cmd lt K739 image output mode communication port file format JPEG quality gt Default Host Options 0 Host 1 Auxiliary 2 USB File Format Definition This setting selects the format of the image file to be output Note If JPEG is the chosen image f
97. time of capture and transfer of the image When enabled the capture time is appended to the symbol data Serial Cmd lt K710 percent cell damage total read time capture time locate time decode time pixels per element ECC level matrix size quiet zone symbol angle gt Default Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Locate Time Definition The time in milliseconds from the start of image processing until the symbol has been located and is ready to be decoded When enabled the locate time is appended to the symbol data Serial Cmd lt K710 percent cell damage total read time capture time locate time decode time pixels per element ECC level matrix size quiet zone symbol angle gt Default Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Quadrus MINI Velocity User s Manual 8 13 Microscan Symbol Quality Output Decode Time Definition The time in milliseconds required to decode a symbol When enabled the decode time is appended to the symbol data Serial Cmd lt K710 percent cell damage total read time capture time locate time decode time pixels per element ECC level matrix size quiet zone symbol angle gt Default Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Pixels Per Element Data Matrix Only Note Pixels Per Element is not supported when Q Mode is enabled Definition The number of pixels for each element either dark or light for both x and y directions When enabled the pixels per element value is
98. timeout gt Default 200 x10 ms Options 1 to 65535 5 16 Quadrus MINI Velocity User s Manual Read Cycle Capture Mode Definition Serial Cmd Default Options Capture Mode relates to the way that images are captured and processed lt K241 capture mode number of captures rapid capture mode pre processing gt Continuous Capture 0 Rapid Capture 1 Continuous Capture Rapid Capture Definition In a rapid capture mode one or multiple captures as many as 64 can be taken at an interval specified by the time between captures parameter In this mode the only limiting time factor is integration and transfer timing Continuous Capture Usage Definition Continuous Capture is useful in applications with slower line speeds or where symbol spacing may be random or not time dependent In Continuous Capture Mode image captures are taken throughout the read cycle in a multi buffered format see diagram below The imager begins processing the first captured image at the same time that it captures the second image Captures will continue occurring throughout the read cycle until an end condition occurs such as a timeout a new trigger the last frame in a capture sequence or a combination of the above Capture y A 4 Processing time Start of Read E End of Cycle read cycle a Quadrus MINI Velocity User s Manual 5 17 Capture Mode Number of Captures Us
99. user can control Capture Number of Captures and Number of Symbols using these spin boxes 0 Number of Number of Capture H Captures Symbols Read Rate 1 6 1 Delay Sec Delay Adjustment E fe ph0 086464 Coarse C Fine Decrease Increase gl A 2 The Delay Adjustment slider allows the user extremely precise control of the time delays between image captures in a read cycle Delay values are shown in seconds in the field above the slider The Coarse and Fine Delay Adjustment options determine whether larger or smaller adjustment increments will be used 10 14 Quadrus MINI Velocity User s Manual Camera and IP Setup Camera Features Pixel Binning Definition Pixel Binning shows an entire captured image by averaging signals from adjacent pixels Usage lt K542 pixel binning AEC AGC mode AEC AGC brightness gt Default Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 4 1 2 16 1 4 1 At 4 1 4 pixel signals from 2 adjacent rows and columns are combined so that only 1 pixel is output for every 4 pixels sampled An image with the dimensions 640 x 480 is scaled to 320 x 240 Since the resolution of the output image is reduced the frame rate will increase but not by the factor of the image reduction This is due to the overhead time of digital pixel data processing and minimum row time requirements of the image sensor 16 1 At 16 1 16 pixel signals from 4 adjacent rows and columns are comb
100. where more than one symbol can appear during a single read cycle multisymbol or where line speeds are slow enough that captured frames might overlap or miss a symbol A time delay can be inserted between individual frame captures in Rapid Capture Mode lt K242 time before 1st capture time between captures time 1 time 2 time7 Entering Os will result in no time between captures Entering a different value in each field will vary the time delays accordingly Note You must enter time values along with comma separators for each field you want to change If you omit fields or enter only commas the fields will remain as previously set Important If the imager is configured to capture more than 8 images the last or 8th delay value will be repeated for the remaining captures 0 O to 65535 2 097 seconds in 32 uS increments Note Number of Captures and number of frame delays Time Between Captures must be the same Start of Read Cycle Time Delay Between Captures 0 Diagram A O L oysyats ee 0 End of 9 l 2 3 a 5 gt Read Cycle Time Delay Between Captures varies Diagram B o A p pe Quadrus MINI Velocity User s Manual 5 23 Image Processing Timeout Image Processing Timeout Usage Useful in higher speed applications where image processing time is long enough that not all captures have an opportunity to be processed Definition S
101. which to dial ina decoded symbol Running Medium Pass Locate Prog Rating 51 4216 53 8436 55 6336 57 8448 59 8456 61 8464 63 8472 65 8488 67 8504 69 8512 71 8528 73 8584 75 8644 Rating List Best Decode N RRR HRHRHRHHH ROA Quality 8 20 24 32 40 48 56 72 88 96 112 168 228 Focus 386 386 386 386 386 386 386 386 386 386 386 386 386 Rating 8606 Focus 386 Shutter 250 Gain 48 Rating 8581 Focus 386 Shutter 250 Gain 44 Rating 8553 Focus 386 Shutter 250 Gain 40 Rating 8527 Focus 386 Shutter 250 Gain 36 Rating 8505 Focus 386 Shutter 250 Gain 32 Rating 8488 Focus 386 Shutter 250 Gain 28 Rating 8476 Focus 386 Shutter 250 Gain 24 Quadrus MINI Velocity User s Manual Shutter 250 250 250 250 250 250 250 250 250 250 250 250 250 Gain 0 4 8 12 16 20 24 28 32 36 40 44 48 al ndo dan q lt 0o2 AA 4 17 Initiating Calibration Fine Tune Pass The theory behind Fine Tune Pass is to dial in a decoded symbol based on the range supplied by the Medium Pass Running Fine Tune Pass Prog Rating Decode Quality Focus Shutter Gain Locate 77 6416 3 104 386 250 38 7 79 6424 3 112 386 250 39 6 81 6424 3 112 386 250 40 6 84 6432 3 120 386 250 41 6 86 6448 3 136 386 250 42 5 88 6464 3 152 386 250 43 5 90 6476 3 164 386 250 44 5 93 6488 3 176 386 250 45 5 95 6506 3 194 386 250 46 6 97 6524 3 212 386
102. will be used to transfer image files Determines which read cycle condition triggers image file output Disabled Selects the format of the image output file Quadrus MINI Velocity User s Manual I O Parameters JPEG Quality EZ Trax Output Enabled Comm Port Host Image Mode Disabled Image Format Compressed JPEG Quality 90 1 100 he Sets the amount of JPEG image compression A value of 1 represents the highest compression and lowest image quality and 100 represents the lowest compression and highest image quality Object Info Output Disabled Grade Output Disabled Object Info Output EZ Trax Output Enabled Comm Port Host Image Mode Disabled Image Format Compressed 90 Disabled JPEG Quality Object Info Output Grade Output Disabled Grade Output EZ Trax Output Enabled Comm Port Host Image Mode Disabled Image Format Compressed JPEG Quality 90 Object Info Output Disabled Disabled y Disabled Enabled Quadrus MINI Velocity User s Manual If a symbol is decoded during an image capture the symbol type and other supplementary symbol information is also included Symbol quality information will be output in the form of an abbreviated identifier for each read cycle 7 55 Configuring EZ Trax Output Configuring EZ Trax Output by Serial Command Usage Useful for when you want to
103. your connection Select Protocol Please select the protocol to use RS 232 C USB Select the com port to use and press Finish to autoconnect to the reader Otherwise select the Force Connect checkbox to connect at the specified settings If you choose RS 232 protocol Compor com gt Pes Porro Click Connect Select Protocol Select the Quadrus MINI A Velocity from lamentos the Select Device menu Select Devos MEE and click Finish Please select the protocol to use C RS 232 USB If you choose USB protocol ce Quadrus MINI Velocity User s Manual 1 7 Select Protocol and Connect cont Step 6 Select Protocol and Connect cont When you are connected you will see the green connection indicator in the status bar at the bottom right of your screen RS 232 GGMNEGTEDIIIN Point to Point Com 115 2K N 8 1 USB COMETE use Hip e If your RS 232 connection attempt fails click the Autoconnect button select a different communications port and try again Note If your RS 232 host settings cannot be changed to match the imager s settings e Click Connect on ESP s menu toolbar Pme and then select Connection Wizard e When the Select Protocol dialog filo appears select RS 232 and click Next gt Rs 232 C USB lt Back Cancel e When the RS 232 dialog appears check the Force Connect box and o click the
104. 0 Quadrus MINI Velocity User s Manual I O Parameters Target Pattern Usage Assists users in positioning and locating symbols in the center of the imager s field of view Definition The user can control when the targeting system is ON or OFF and can save this condition for power on Serial Cmd lt K750 green flash mode target pattern status green flash duration gt Default Always ON Options 0 Always OFF 1 ON only when not in the read cycle 2 ON only when in the read cycle 3 Always ON Always OFF The target pattern will remain OFF at all times unless overridden by the EZ Button or operational command ON Only When Not in the Read Cycle The target pattern is always ON except during the read cycle If the EZ Button or operational command overrides this setting the target pattern will remain on at all times ON Only When in the Read Cycle The target pattern will remain OFF except during the read cycle If the EZ Button or operational command overrides this setting the target pattern will remain on at all times Always ON The target pattern is always ON Quadrus MINI Velocity User s Manual 7 21 Output Indicators Green Flash Duration Usage Provides visual verification that a good read has occurred Definition When a good read occurs the green LEDs will illuminate and stay on for the time set in the Green Flash Duration value Serial Cmd lt K750 green flash mode target pattern status green f
105. 04 04 EOT AD 36 24 68 44 D 100 64 d 05 05 ENQ E 37 25 69 45 E 101 65 e 06 06 ACK AF 38 26 amp 70 46 F 102 66 f 07 07 BEL AG 39 27 j 71 47 G 103 67 g 08 08 BS H 40 28 72 48 H 104 68 h 09 09 HT A 41 29 73 49 l 105 69 i 10 OA LF J 42 2A s 74 4A J 106 6A j 11 0B VT MK 43 2B 75 4B K 107 6B k 12 oc FF AL 44 2C 76 4C L 108 6C 13 0D CR AM 45 2D 77 4D M 109 6D m 14 OE SO AN 46 2E 78 4E N 110 6E n 15 OF Sl O 47 2F 79 4F O 111 6F O 16 10 DLE AP 48 30 0 80 50 P 112 70 p 17 11 DC1 Q 49 31 1 81 51 Q 113 71 q 18 12 DC2 AR 50 32 2 82 52 R 114 72 r 19 13 DC3 AS 51 33 3 83 53 S 115 73 s 20 14 DC4 AT 52 34 4 84 54 T 116 74 t 21 15 NAK AU 53 35 5 85 55 U 117 75 u 22 16 SYN AV 54 36 6 86 56 V 118 76 v 23 17 ETB W 55 37 7 87 57 W 119 77 w 24 18 CAN X 56 38 8 88 58 X 120 78 x 25 19 EM AY 57 39 9 89 59 Y 121 79 y 26 1A SUB AZ 58 3A 90 5A Z 122 7A Zz 27 1B ESC A 59 3B 91 5B 123 7B 28 1C FS AN 60 3C lt 92 5C 124 7C 29 1D GS 61 3D 93 5D 125 7D 30 1E RS AN 62 3E gt 94 5E A 126 7E 31 1F US i 63 3F 2 95 5F 127 7F D A 22 Quadrus MINI Velocity User s Manual Appendices Appendix F Interface Standards Interface Standards established by the Electronic Industries Association EIA specify such things as the signaling voltage levels maximum cable lengths and number of drivers In the Quadrus MINI Velocity selection of interface is made by pin assig
106. 140 5 gt Poll Address Serial Cmd lt K140 protocol address gt Default 1 Options 1 to 50 1 Poll address 0x1C Select address 0x1D 2 Poll address 0x1E Select address 0x1F 50 Poll address 0x7E Select address 0x7F Note See USB HID Interface on page 3 23 for protocol information relating to USB 3 6 Quadrus MINI Velocity User s Manual Communications ACK NAK Options Definition These parameters take effect for ACK NAK lt K140 4 gt on the main RS 232 or RS 422 ports not on the Auxiliary Port and are completely independent of the Polling Mode Options lt K148 gt The imager always follows the protocol in both directions to and from the host There is no option to disable it from either direction Serial Cmd lt K147 RES REQ STX ETX ACK NAK gt RES NAK Defaults RES Reset 00 disabled REQ Request 00 disabled STX Start of Text 00 disabled ETX End of Text 00 disabled ACK Acknowledge 06 NAK Negative Acknowledge 15 The following are general outlines of the ACK NAK protocol Items that are framed by brackets can either be disabled or enabled LRC does not include STX but it does include preamble postamble and ETX Symbol Data Output TX to host STX preamble SYMBOL DATA postamble ETX LRC Response from host ACK NAK Sent when LRC ETX postamble or timeout waiting for more data are detected if REQ is disabled depending on what is enabled Commands from
107. 2 002 003 003 abc 004 sequence on mismatch 004 004 005 005 def 006 Sequence on mismatch 006 ghi 007 Sequence on mismatch 007 007 008 As an example of Sequence on Mismatch Disabled consider the following decodes Master Symbol Decoded Symbol Master Symbol after Decode 001 001 002 002 002 003 003 abc 004 sequenced because of previous match 004 004 005 005 def 006 sequenced because of previous match 006 ghi 006 not sequenced 006 006 007 Quadrus MINI Velocity User s Manual 9 9 Match Replace Match Replace Usage Provides a convenient shortcut for applications that need to output a predefined text string whenever a symbol matches a master symbol Definition Outputs a user defined data string whenever a match occurs and Matchcode is enabled Serial Cmd lt K735 status replacement string gt Default Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Replacement String Definition User defined data string that when enabled replaces symbol data whenever a match occurs Serial Cmd lt K735 status replacement string gt Default MATCH Options An ASCII string up to 64 characters Important The ASCII characters lt gt and can only be entered as hex pairs For lt lt K735h 3C gt For gt lt K735h 3E gt For lt K735h 2C gt See ASCII Character Eniry Modifier on page 3 32 for a detailed explanation of how to enter ASCII characters as hex values 9 10 Q
108. 230 gt To use Edge Mode you must enable and use the Undelimited Start Trigger Character lt K229 gt To use Serial Mode you must use the Delimited Trigger defined by lt K201 gt or enable and use the Undelimited Start Trigger Character lt K229 gt To use Serial and Edge Mode you must use the Delimited Trigger defined by lt K201 gt or enable and use the Undelimited Start Trigger Character lt K229 gt Communications For the USB version of the Quadrus MINI Velocity no communications serial commands have any effect on the imager except the following e USB HID Report Status lt K149 gt e Preamble lt K141 gt Postamble lt K142 gt EZ Button Default on power on cannot be disabled lt K770 default gt lt K770 1 gt This ensures a level of safety for recovering from misconfigured Power On settings lt Z gt However it is not foolproof as defaulting with the EZ Button only recovers Custom Default settings which can be misconfigured themselves For this reason do not save to Custom Default settings lt Zc gt until the imager s configuration has been tested Symbologies If the imager is going to be configured with Data Matrix symbols do not disable Data Matrix lt K479 gt Disabling Data Matrix will prevent the imager from reading configuration symbols Quadrus MINI Velocity User s Manual 3 31 ASCII Character Entry Modifier ASCII Character Entry Modifier Commands that require ASCII text fields suc
109. 40 0 gt Point to Point with RTS CTS Usage A reader initiates a data transfer with an RTS request to send transmission The host when ready responds with a CTS clear to send and the data is transmitted RTS and CTS signals are transmitted over two dedicated wires as defined in the RS 232 standard Used only with RS 232 Definition Point to Point with RTS CTS request to send clear to send is a simple Heras handshake protocol that allows a reader to initiate data transfers to the host Serial Cmd lt K140 1 gt Point to Point with XON XOFF Usage If an XOFF has been received from the host data will not be sent to the host until the host sends an XON During the XOFF phase the host is free to carry on other chores and accept data from other devices Used only with RS 232 Definition This option enables the host to send the XON and XOFF command as a single byte transmission command of start Q or stop S Serial Cmd lt K140 2 gt Quadrus MINI Velocity User s Manual 3 5 Host Port Protocol Point to Point with RTS CTS and XON XOFF Usage Used only with RS 232 Definition This option is a combination of Point to Point with RTS CTS and Point to Point with XON XOFF Serial Cmd lt K140 3 gt ACK NAK Definition See the ACK NAK Options command lt K147 gt on page 3 7 Serial Cmd lt K140 4 gt Polling Mode Definition See the Polling Mode Options command lt K148 gt on page 3 8 Serial Cmd lt K
110. 6 37 MicroPDF417 MicroPDF417 Usage Used for labelling small items that need large data capacity Definition A variant of PDF417 a very efficient and compact stacked symbology that can encode up to 250 alphanumeric characters or 366 numeric characters per symbol Serial Cmd lt K485 status unused fixed symbol length status fixed symbol length gt Default Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Fixed Symbol Length Status MicroPDF417 Serial Cmd lt K485 status unused fixed symbol length status fixed symbol length gt Default Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Fixed Symbol Length MicroPDF417 Usage Used to increase data integrity by ensuring that only one symbol length will be accepted Definition When enabled the MicroPDF417 symbol must contain the same number of characters as the symbol length setting before it can be considered a good read The imager will ignore any symbol not having the specified length Serial Cmd lt K485 status unused fixed symbol length status fixed symbol length gt Default 10 Options 1 to 366 Note Fixed Symbol Length Status must be enabled for Fixed Symbol Length to take effect 6 38 Quadrus MINI Velocity User s Manual Symbologies Composite When set to Enabled or Required will decode the 2D composite component of a linear symbol The linear symbol can be DataBar 14 DataBar Expanded DataBar Limited EAN 128 UPC A EAN 13 EAN 8 and UPC E Usage A
111. 8 Quadrus MINI Velocity User s Manual Read Cycle Setting Up the Imager for EZ Trax If you are using EZ Trax software it is important to set up the Quadrus MINI Velocity correctly before beginning Click the Read Cycle button to display the Read Cycle tree control Read Cycle y Parameters ESP Values Read Cycle Multisymbol Trigger Mode External Edge Trigger Filter Duration External Trigger State Positive Serial Trigger Decodes Before Output 1 End of Read Cycle Mode Timeout Read Cycle Timeout 200 Capture Mode Rapid Capture Capture Time Store Noread Image Image Processing Settings Set Trigger Mode lt K200 gt to External Edge Trigger Extemal Edge Trigger Filter Duration Continuous Read External Trigger State Continuous Read 1 Output Extemal Level Extemal Edge Serial Data and Edge Set Capture Mode lt K241 gt to Rapid Capture ETT Rapid Capture Rapid Capture Once these Read Cycle parameters are set you will be ready to connect to EZ Trax Fora description of how to configure EZ Trax using serial commands or ESP see Configuring EZ Trax Output in Chapter 7 I O Parameters For more detailed information about using EZ Trax refer to the Help menu in EZ Trax software or the EZ Trax Quick Start Guide available on the Microscan Tools CD Quadrus MINI Velocity User s Manual 5 29 Setting Up the Imager for EZ Trax 5 30 Quad
112. Analysis 5 Symbol Quality 6 Diagnostic Warning 7 In Read Cycle Note If Output On is set to Match or Mismatch a transition switching will not occur unless Matchcode Type is enabled and a master symbol is loaded into memory Mismatch or No Read Activates discrete output when the data does not match that of the master symbol or the symbol has not been decoded before the end of the read cycle Match or Good Read Activates a discrete output when the symbol data matches the master symbol Note If you want to output for a good read and Matchcode is not enabled you can enable any output for Match 7 32 Quadrus MINI Velocity User s Manual I O Parameters Mismatch Activates a discrete output whenever the symbol data does not match that of the master symbol No Read Activates a discrete output whenever the symbol data is not decoded before the end of the read cycle Trend Analysis Usage Typically used when successful decodes are occurring but a discrete output is needed to flag a trend in quality issues Definition Activates discrete output when a trend analysis condition is met depending on the trend analysis option enabled Symbol Quality Usage Typically used when a discrete indication is needed to flag a symbol quality condition Definition Activates discrete output when a symbol quality condition is met depending on the symbol quality option enabled Diagnostic Warning Usage Typically used whe
113. C AGC enables Automatic Gain Control In this mode the optimal setting for gain is computed and updated for every frame It may take several frames to adjust the gain value to the correct setting The current camera gain parameter is updated at the end of the read cycle see Camera Settings AEC AGC AEC AGC enables both Automatic Exposure Control and Automatic Gain Control In this mode the optimal settings for exposure shutter and gain are computed and updated for every frame It may take several frames to adjust the shutter and gain values to the correct settings Important In this mode only the Automatic Exposure Control AEC is active while the gain value remains fixed at its minimum setting The Automatic Gain Control AGC only becomes active if the AEC has driven the shutter value to its minimum slowest setting and the desired image brightness has still not been obtained When this occurs the shutter value will remain fixed while gain is adjusted The current camera shutter and camera gain parameters are then updated at the end of the read cycle see Camera Settings AEC AGC Brightness Definition AEC AGC Brightness allows the desired image luminance to be adjusted within the range of 1 darkest to 56 brightest Usage lt K542 pixel binning AEC AGC mode AEC AGC brightness gt Default 30 Options 1 to 56 10 16 Quadrus MINI Velocity User s Manual Camera and IP Setup Camera Settings Camera Settings are t
114. Codabar Guard Bar Status Interleaved 2 of 5 Codeword Collection PDF417 Print Growth ISO IEC 16022 Symbol Quality Output Axial Non Uniformity Data Matrix Only ISO IEC 16022 Symbol Quality Output Unused Error Correction Data Matrix Only ISO IEC 16022 Symbol Quality Output Percent Cell Damage Data Matrix Only Microscan Symbol Quality Output Pixels Per Element Data Matrix Only Microscan Symbol Quality Output Error Correction Level Data Matrix Only Microscan Symbol Quality Output Matrix Size Data Matrix Only Microscan Symbol Quality Output Detailed No Read Message No Read Message Bad Symbol Message No Symbol Message 1D Stacked Symbology Qualification 2D Symbology Qualification Both Standard Mode and Q Mode In Both the imager attempts to process the image using both Standard Mode and Q Mode Quadrus MINI Velocity User s Manual 10 25 IP Mode Fast Linear Mode FLM Direction Definition This mode assumes that the whole image is the candidate and reads the image either horizontally or vertically When the number of symbols in the field of view lt K518 gt is set to 2 Fast Linear Mode will try to locate the candidates first and then decode The candidate symbols cannot be side by side they must be parallel Usage lt K527 P Mode FLM direction gt Default Auto Options 0 Auto 1 Horizontal 2 Vertical Auto The imager tries to read both horizontally and vertically It decides which direct
115. Code 39 Disabled Focus Distance 435 Focus Position Calibrate Symbol Type Don t Calibrate Processing High Gain 30 Message 2272 Bad Symbol Message 2777 No Symbol Message 2222 Send configuration settings to the imager without saving by clicking Send to Reader i s Send and Save Send to Reader m Click Save As to save the report as plain text or a tab delimited text file Send configuration settings to the imager and save in ESP by clicking Send and Save To create a symbol containing any of the command settings in the table click Generate Barcode This will bring up the Bar Code Dialog To save the Differences from Default report either as plain text or as a tab delimited text file click Save As e Click Send and Save to send the settings to the imager and save them or Send to Reader to send the settings without saving them Important The use the Differences from Default feature you must connect to the imager and Receive Reader Settings via the Send Recv button on the toolbar 13 8 t vr Send Recv Quadrus MINI Velocity User s Manual Utilities Master Database Important The Master Database is used for all Matchcode modes except Sequential and Wild Card both of which use Master Database Index 1 Master Database Overview Usage Used where more than one master symbol is required as in a Multisymbol setup for matchin
116. Command Format Serial commands are of two types utility and configuration Rules that apply to both utility and configuration commands A less than lt and greater than gt character enclose the commands Commands and data are case sensitive That is characters must be entered as upper or lower case as specified Serial Utility Commands These are sent during operations and are not followed by lt A gt or lt Z gt Serial Configuration K Commands These begin with a single K character followed by a 3 digit numeric character data fields and an initializing command as follows lt Knumeric parameter data data etc gt lt initializing command gt An initializing command lt A gt or lt Z gt may follow the command A lt Z gt initializes the imager s memory and saves for power on an lt A gt initializes the imager s memory but does not save for power on For example to enable UPC and save the change for power on send lt K473 1 gt lt Z gt To change Baud Rate and reset without saving changes for power on send lt K100 3 gt lt A gt Serial Configuration Command Conventions All data fields except the last must be followed by a comma without a space NUL cannot be used The characters lt gt and can be used but only if entered as hex pairs see ASCII Character Entry Modifier on page 3 32 All fields preceding a modified field must be included If there is no change in preceding f
117. Connect button rado ibarvie sec he Face Cerrectchactharia connect at the specified settings ComPort COM1 vi Iv Force Connect Settings lt Back Cancel 1 8 Quadrus MINI Velocity User s Manual Quick Start Step 7 Locate the Symbol in the Field of View Locate by ESP In ESP s EZ Mode click the Locate button to enable the blue target pattern Calibrate Fast Test Stop amp Decodes per Second AEC jo 4 4 00 inches The symbol in the field of view will appear in the video view beneath the Locate and Calibrate buttons and you will see the blue target pattern projected from the front of the imager e Center the target pattern on the symbol At 2 to 3 inches the pattern resembles an X At 3 to 6 inches the pattern resembles a V Center on object in field of view Target pattern shown as it would appear between 3 and 6 inches Important The entire symbol should fall within the field of view FOV of the imager The field of view is what appears in ESP s Locate Calibrate window in EZ Mode Click the Stop button to end the Locate function Quadrus MINI Velocity User s Manual 1 9 Locate the Symbol in the Field of View Locate by EZ Button If you are not connected to a host computer the EZ Button allows you to locate a symbol in the imager s field of view 80 STATUS EZ Button 60 40 20 w PWR Hold down the EZ Button for about one
118. Control Characters flunerfontedlepiaved on menu sedis pas ena or Value Effectoft Command RES AD 04 Reset REQ AE 05 Request EOT AD 04 Reset STX AB 02 Start of Text ETX AC 03 End of Text ACK AE 06 Acknowledge NAK AU 15 Negative Acknowledge XON Q 11 Begin Transmission XOFF S 13 Stop Transmission Quadrus MINI Velocity User s Manual A 13 Communications Protocol ACK NAK Data Flow Examples Setup 1 RES 0x00 disabled REQ 0x00 disabled STX 0x00 disabled ETX 0x00 disabled ACK 0x06 NAK 0x15 LRC disabled Transfer 1 HOST_TX lt K141 0 gt IMAGER_TX ACK Transfer 2 HOST_TX lt K141 gt IMAGER_TX ACK IMAGER_TX lt K141 0 gt HOST_TX ACK Error Condition Transfer 1 IMAGER_TX symbol data HOST_TX NAK host rejects IMAGER_TX symbol data resend data HOST_TX ACK transaction complete Transfer 2 HOST_TX lt K141 gt IMAGER_TX ACK IMAGER_TX lt K141 0 gt timeout reached timeout reached timeout reached Timeout Reached transaction aborted data is flushed Quadrus MINI Velocity User s Manual Setup 2 RES 0x00 disabled REQ 0x00 disabled STX 0x00 disabled ETX 0x00 disabled ACK 0x06 NAK 0x15 LRC enabled Transfer 1 HOST_TX lt K141 0 gt a IMAGER_TX ACK Transfer 2 HOST_TX lt K141 gt B IMAGER_TX ACK IMAGER_TX lt K141 0 gt a HOST_TX ACK Error Condition Transfer 1 HOST_TX lt k141 0 gt x BAD LRC IMAGER_TX NA
119. Database Master Symbol Database Size Definition Serial Cmd Default Options Number of Master Symbols allows you to select 1 to 10 master symbols for the master symbol database lt K231 master symbol database size gt Note You must follow this command with a save command lt A gt or lt Z gt 1 1 to 10 Master Symbol Database Size V Matchcode Type Read Symbol into Selected Index 5 4 Receive Reader s Database Send Database to Reader Set Master Symbol Database Size here Caution Since the total number of characters available for the master symbol database is 3000 changes to the Master Symbol Database Size will re allocate the number of characters available for each master symbol and could cause existing master symbols to be deleted except master symbol 1 unless it also exceeds the size limitation The table below specifies the maximum number of characters available to each symbol according the number of master symbols defined from 1 to 10 Master Symbol Maximum Master Symbol Maximum Number Characters Number Characters 1 3000 6 500 2 1500 7 428 3 1000 8 375 4 750 9 333 5 600 10 300 13 10 Quadrus MINI Velocity User s Manual Utilities Enter Master Symbol Data Usage Allows you to enter master symbol data for any enabled master symbol index number 1 to 10 provided the total number of characters does not exceed the maximum allowed S
120. E as UPC A gt Default Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled 6 26 Quadrus MINI Velocity User s Manual Symbologies Pharmacode Important Pharmacode is only available when Q Mode is enabled Usage Used mostly in pharmaceutical packaging Definition Encodes up to five different numbers each with its own color which may be entered in decimal or binary format with a 1 represented by a thick bar and a 0 represented by a thin bar Bar width is independent of height In decimal format each part can be up to 999 999 In binary format each input can have up to 19 ones and zeros Important When Pharmacode is enabled other linear symbologies will not decode properly Disable Pharmacode before reading other linear symbologies SerialCmd lt K477 status fixed symbol length status fixed symbol length minimum number of bars bar width status direction fixed threshold value gt Default Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Fixed Symbol Length Status Pharmacode Definition When enabled the imager will check the symbol length against the symbol length field If disabled any length will be considered valid Serial Cmd lt K477 status fixed symbol length status fixed symbol length minimum number of bars bar width status direction fixed threshold value gt Default Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Fixed Symbol Length Pharmacode Definition Specifies the exact number of bars that must be presen
121. GER_TX 0x1D ACK Unit responds with its address HOST_TX STX lt T gt ETX IMAGER_TX 0x1D ACK Unit responds with its address HOST_TX RES Terminate Transfer 2 Transfer 2 HOST_TX RES 0x1C REQ Poll Unit 1 for data IMAGER_TX 0x1C STX lt T 00000 gt ETX HOST_TX ACK IMAGER_TX RES Terminate Transfer 1 Starting with a RES ensures a clean transaction without leftovers from the previous transaction Error Condition 1 HOST_TX RES 0x1C REQ Poll Unit 1 for data IMAGER_TX 0x1C STX lt T 00000 gt ETX HOST_TX Nothing Host should ACK here timeout reached IMAGER_TX REQ Unit requests an ACK again timeout reached IMAGER_TX REQ Unit requests an ACK again timeout reached IMAGER_TX REQ Unit requests an ACK again timeout reached IMAGER_TX RES Terminate Transfer 1 data is flushed A 18 Quadrus MINI Velocity User s Manual Appendices Error Condition 2 HOST_TX RES 0x1C REQ Poll Unit 1 for data IMAGER_TX 0x1C STX lt T 00000 gt ETX HOST_TX Nothing Host should ACK here timeout reached IMAGER_TX REQ Unit requests an ACK again HOST_TX NAK Host rejects data frame Retry Event IMAGER_TX 0x1C STX lt T 00000 gt ETX Unit sends again HOST_TX ACK
122. Good Reads lt K221 minimum good reads gt Multisymbol lt K222 number of symbols multisymbol separator gt Start Trigger Character lt K229 start character gt Stop Trigger Character lt K230 stop character gt Compare Mode lt K233 status gt Capture Mode lt K241 capture mode number of captures rapid capture mode pre processing gt Capture Timing lt K242 time before first capture time between first and second captures time between seventh and eighth captures gt Image Storage lt K244 image storage type image store mode gt IP Timeout lt K245 image processing timeout gt Quadrus MINI Velocity User s Manual 5 3 Read Cycle Setup Read Cycle Setup Setting up read cycle and triggering parameters will involve a series of decisions based on your particular application as follows 1 2 oo kK Ww Select the number of symbols to be read in a single cycle The Quadrus MINI Velocity can read multiple symbols in a single image frame Decide on the trigger type to be used if serial choose a serial character if external choose either Level or Edge Designate how the read cycle should end Timeout New Trigger Last Frame Select Capture Mode Continuous Mode or Rapid Mode Select Number of Captures if in Rapid Capture Mode Set the Time Before First Capture and Time Between Captures if any Note The Quadrus MINI Velocity s camera captu
123. HID Reports Report Type Data Content Microscan HID IN imager to host Symbol data No Reads Service messages Microscan HID OUT host to imager Commands serial triggers Note The imager is always able to receive commands and serial triggers from the host through Microscan HID OUT Reports regardless of the Microscan HID IN Report status If the imager receives a command that requests a response such as a part number query the imager will send a Microscan HID IN Report regardless of the IN Report status Serial Cmd lt K149 Microscan HID IN Report status Keyboard IN Report status gt Default 1 Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Microscan HID IN Reports Enabled When this feature is enabled the imager will send Microscan HID IN Reports to the host containing data originated by the imager Microscan HID IN Reports Disabled When this feature is disabled the imager will not send Microscan HID IN Reports to the host containing data originated by the imager 3 24 Quadrus MINI Velocity User s Manual Communications Keyboard IN Reports The host operating system will interpret Keyboard IN Reports from the imager as if the user were typing keyboard text The host operating system sends keystrokes to the current application This is commonly called a Keyboard Wedge configuration There is one type of Keyboard Report used Report Type Data Content Keyboard IN imager to host Symbol data No Reads Service messages Note If
124. I Velocity User s Manual Camera and IP Setup IP Mode Definition Determines the decode algorithm that will be used to process images Important Options 2 and 3 are not available in non Q Mode imagers Usage lt K527 P Mode FLM direction gt Default Both Standard Mode and Q Mode Options 0 Standard Mode 1 Fast Linear Mode 2 Q Mode 3 Both Standard Mode In Standard Mode the imager processes the image using the standard decode algorithm Fast Linear Mode In Fast Linear Mode the imager quickly locates and decodes linear symbols that are oriented in the field of view in such a way that a horizontal or vertical scan line can pass completely through the symbol The entire image is assumed to be a candidate and is read horizontally vertically or in both directions When the number of symbols in the field of view lt K518 gt is set to 2 Fast Linear Mode will try to locate the candidates first and then decode The candidate symbols cannot be side by side they must be parallel Q Mode In Q Mode the image is processed using a special algorithm that is designed to provide quick consistent decode times Standard Mode may be required for more challenging symbols Note The following items are not supported when Q Mode is enabled Hollow Mode Number of Symbols in Field of View Damaged Symbol IP Threshold BC412 Symbology 2D Enhanced Narrow Margins Large Intercharacter Gap Code 39 Large Intercharacter Gap
125. K HOST_TX lt K141 0 gt a GOOD LRC IMAGER_TX ACK Quadrus MINI Velocity User s Manual Appendices Communications Protocol Setup 3 RES 0x00 disabled REQ 0x00 disabled STX 0x28 ETX 0x29 ACK 0x06 NAK 0x15 LRC enabled Transfer 1 HOST_TX lt K141 0 gt H IMAGER_TX ACK Transfer 2 HOST_TX lt K141 gt k IMAGER_TX ACK IMAGER_TX lt K141 4M gt w HOST_TX ACK A 16 Quadrus MINI Velocity User s Manual Setup 4 RES 0x21 REQ 0x3D STX 0x28 ETX 0x29 ACK 0x06 NAK 0x15 LRC enabled y Transfer 1 HOST_TX IMAGER_TX Transfer 2 HOST_TX IMAGER_TX HOST_TX IMAGER_TX HOST_TX IMAGER_TX Error Condition Transfer 1 HOST_TX IMAGER_TX HOST_TX IMAGER_TX HOST_TX IMAGER_TX lt K141 0 gt H ACK lt K100 gt n ACK d lt K100 8 0 0 1 gt X ACK it lt K141 0 gt H ACK lt K100 gt n ACK q lt K100 8 0 0 1 gt X timeout reached IMAGER_TX timeout reached IMAGER_TX timeout reached IMAGER_TX timeout reached IMAGER_TX p Quadrus MINI Velocity User s Manual Appendices Communications Protocol Polling Mode Data Flow Examples Setup 1 Address 0x01 translates to Poll Req 0x1C Unit Select 0x1D RES 0x04 REQ 0x05 STX 0x02 ETX 0x03 ACK 0x06 NAK 0x15 LRC disabled Transfer 1 HOST_TX RES 0x1D REQ Select Unit 1 to receive data IMA
126. K474 status fixed symbol length status fixed symbol length EAN 128 status output format application record separator status application record separator character application record brackets application record padding gt Default Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Fixed Symbol Length Status Code 128 EAN 128 Definition When enabled the imager will check the symbol length against the symbol length field If disabled any length will be considered a valid symbol Serial Cmd lt K474 status fixed symbol length status fixed symbol length EAN 128 status output format application record separator status application record separator character application record brackets application record padding gt Default Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Fixed Symbol Length Code 128 EAN 128 Usage Fixed Symbol Length helps prevent truncations and increases data integrity by ensuring that only one symbol length will be accepted Definition This specifies the exact number of characters that the imager will recognize this does not include start stop and check character characters The imager ignores any symbol not having the specified length Serial Cmd lt K474 status fixed symbol length status fixed symbol length EAN 128 status output format application record separator status application record separator character application record brackets application record padding gt Default 10 Options 1 to 64
127. K479 ECC 200 status ECC 000 status ECC 050 status ECC 080 status ECC 100 status ECC 140 status ECC 120 status ECC 130 status gt Default Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled ECC 130 Definition When enabled will decode ECC 130 symbols Serial Cmd lt K479 ECC 200 status ECC 000 status ECC 050 status ECC 080 status ECC 100 status ECC 140 status ECC 120 status ECC 130 status gt Default Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Quadrus MINI Velocity User s Manual 6 5 Aztec Code Aztec Code Note Aztec Code is only supported when Q Mode is enabled Usage Used in document imaging railway ticket validation and some postal applications Definition A 2D matrix symbology built on a square grid with a square bull s eye pattern at the center Aztec Code can encode up to 3 832 numeric or 3 067 alphabetical characters or 1 914 bytes of data The level of Reed Solomon error correction used with Aztec Code is configurable from 5 to 95 of the total data region The recommended error correction level is 23 of symbol capacity plus codewords Serial Cmd lt K458 status gt Default Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled 6 6 Quadrus MINI Velocity User s Manual Symbologies QR Code Usage Definition Serial Cmd Default Options Widely implemented in the automotive industry in Japan and throughout their worldwide supply chain QR Code is capable of handling numeric alphanumeric and by
128. Keyboard IN Reports is enabled and Microscan HID IN Reports is disabled the read cycle must be Continuous Read 1 Output because there will be no External Trigger or Serial Trigger It is not possible to send commands to the imager as Keyboard OUT Reports To send commands to the imager via USB the host application must establish a connection with the imager and send Microscan HID OUT Reports Serial Cmd lt K149 Microscan HID IN Report status Keyboard IN Report status gt Default 0 Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Keyboard IN Reports Enabled When this feature is enabled the imager will send Keyboard IN Reports to the host containing data originated by the imager Keyboard IN Reports Disabled When this feature is disabled the imager will not send Keyboard IN Reports to the host containing data originated by the imager Quadrus MINI Velocity User s Manual 3 25 USB HID Interface Microscan HID Report Format Size 64 bytes fixed length The USB HID standard defines all reports as being fixed length Structure REPORT ID 1 LENGTH 1 DATA 62 Values in parentheses indicate the size in bytes of the field Field Descriptions REPORT ID Size 1 byte Value 0x01 Note Report ID is the method employed by USB HID to allow multiple report formats to be sent and received from the same interface LENGTH Size 1 byte Value 0 62 Note Length indicates the number of valid data bytes in the fixed length data field This
129. LED Configuration Left Column Pointer Left Right to Left Length Lens Light Collection Options Light Emitting Diode Light Source Limitation of Liability Line Scan Line Scan Height Linear Stacked Symbology Qualification Linear Symbols Load Configuration Database 12 Quadrus MINI Velocity User s Manual M Load Current Settings from Configuration Database Load Current Settings from Configuration Database by ESP Load New Master Locate by ESP Locate by EZ Button Locate Tab Locate the Symbol in the Field of View Locate Time Longitudinal Redundancy Check LRC Status M Machine Vision Macro Name Macro Value Macros Master Database Master Database Overview Master Symbol Database Size Match Match Length Match or Good Read Match Replace Match Start Position Matchcode Matchcode by ESP Matchcode Serial Commands Matchcode Type Matrix Size Data Matrix Only Mechanical Medium Pass Menu Toolbar MICR E 13B Micro QR Code Micro QR Code Add 65536 MicroPDF417 MicroPDF417 Add 1024 Microscan Default Parameters Microscan ESP Help Microscan HID IN Reports Microscan HID IN Reports Disabled Microscan HID IN Reports Enabled Microscan HID Report Format Microscan Symbol Quality Output Quadrus MINI Velocity User s Manual Index 13 N Microscan Symbol Quality Output by ESP Minimum Good Reads Minimum Number of Bars Minimum Number of Bars Pharmacode Minimum Number of Qualified
130. MICROSCAN Quadrus MINI Velocity User s Manual P N 83 006302 Rev B Copyright and Disclaimer Copyright 2008 by Microscan Systems Inc 1201 S W 7th Street Renton WA U S A 98057 425 226 5700 FAX 425 226 8682 ISO 9001 2000 Certified Quality Management System Issued by TUV USA Inc Member of TUV NORD Group Cert No 06 1080 All rights reserved The information contained herein is proprietary and is provided solely for the purpose of allowing customers to operate and or service Microscan manufactured equipment and is not to be released reproduced or used for any other purpose without written permission of Microscan Throughout this manual trademarked names might be used Rather than place a trademark symbol at every occurrence of a trademarked name we state herein that we are using the names only in an editorial fashion and to the benefit of the trademark owner with no intention of infringement Disclaimer The information and specifications described in this manual are subject to change without notice Latest Manual Version For the latest version of this manual see the Download Center on our web site at www microscan com Technical Support For technical support email helpdesk microscan com Microscan Systems Inc 1201 S W 7th Street Renton WA 98057 U S A Tel 425 226 5700 Fax 425 226 8250 helpdesk microscan com Microscan Europe Tel 31 172 423360 Fax 31 172 423366 Micr
131. Microscan HID Interface When a connection is made the host can send serial configuration default commands The imager will always be able to receive configuration commands from the host application and send responses to those commands However the imager can be configured to stop producing IN Reports to the host from symbol data output and diagnostics service messages 3 30 Quadrus MINI Velocity User s Manual Communications Configuration Exceptions for USB Read Cycle Mode By default the imager operates in Continuous Read Mode f the imager is configured using Data Matrix symbols the read cycle mode should be the last item changed before saving the configuration settings and beginning operation This is because all read cycle modes other than Continuous Read Mode require a trigger event In USB a trigger event can only be initiated by serial command To send a trigger command the imager the host application must establish a connection with the imager s Microscan HID interface and send the trigger command in a Microscan HID Report The following read cycle conditions are required for USB Quadrus MINI Velocity Serial Cmd lt K200 read mode gt Default Continuous Options 0 Continuous Mode 1 Coninuous Read 1 Output Mode 2 Level Mode 3 Edge Mode 4 Serial Mode 5 Serial and Edge Mode Important e To use Level Mode you must enable Undelimited Start Trigger Character lt K229 gt and Undelimited End Trigger Character lt K
132. OS Codabar Quadrus MINI Velocity User s Manual Index C Codabar Add 32 Code 128 Add 8 Code 128 EAN 128 Code 39 Code 39 Add 16 Code 93 Code 93 Add 64 Codeword Collection PDF417 Column Column Pointer Configuration Database Column Width Configuration Database Comm Port Command Processing Mode Command Response from Imager to Host Commands from Host to Imager Communication Port Communication Protocols Communications Communications by ESP Communications Protocol Communications Protocol Command Table Communications Serial Commands Compare Mode Complementary Metal Oxide Semiconductor Composite Concatenating Configuration Commands Concentrator Configurable Output 1 Configurable Output 2 Configurable Output 3 Configuration Database Configuration Database Index Configuration Database Serial Commands Configuration Database Status Configuration Exceptions for USB Configuration Setting Changes Configuration Symbols Data Matrix with Configure Reader Flag Configure the Imager in ESP Configuring EZ Trax Output Configuring EZ Trax Output by ESP Configuring EZ Trax Output by Serial Command Connect the System Connect to Readers via TCP IP Connecting by RS 232 RS 422 RS 485 Connector 4 Quadrus MINI Velocity User s Manual D Constant Illumination Continuous Capture Continuous Read Continuous Read 1 Output Control Characters Control Hex Output Copy Counter Counters Counter
133. Options Used primarily in point of sale applications in the retail industry It is commonly used with Microscan readers in applications in combination with Matchcode when there is a need to verify that the right product is being placed in the right packaging UPC Universal Product Code is a fixed length numeric continuous symbology UPC can have two or five digit supplemental bar code data following the normal code The UPC Version A UPC A symbol is used to encode a 12 digit number The first digit is the number system character the next five are the manufacturer number the next five are the product number and the last digit is the checksum character When enabled the imager will read UPC Version A and UPC Version E only lt K473 UPC status EAN status supplementals status separator status separator character supplemental type format UPC E as UPC A gt Disabled 0 Disabled 1 Enabled EAN Status Usage Definition Serial Cmd Default Options EAN is the European version of the UPC symbology and is used in European market applications Note UPC must be enabled for EAN to take effect EAN is a subset of UPC When enabled the imager will read UPC Version A UPC Version E EAN 13 and EAN 8 It also appends a leading zero to UPC Version A symbol information and transmits 13 digits If transmitting 13 digits when reading UPC Version A symbols is not desired disable EAN Note The extra character identifies th
134. Options 1 to 65535 Resolution Serial Cmd lt K409 status service message threshold resolution gt Default Seconds Options 0 Seconds 1 Minutes 7 46 Quadrus MINI Velocity User s Manual I O Parameters Frame Information Output Frame Number Serial Cmd lt K734 output frame number output coordinates gt Default Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Disabled When Output Frame Number is set to Disabled the frame number is not output as part of the symbol data Enabled When Output Frame Number is set to Enabled the number of the frame in which the symbol was first decoded is attached to the symbol output information The output format is Fnnr where nnn is a 3 digit decimal value from O to 255 The frame number rolls over to 0 once it passes 255 If this feature is enabled the frame information will follow the symbol data and it will precede any symbol quality data if symbol quality settings are enabled see Symbol Quality Separator on page 8 8 The symbol quality separator is located between the end of the already formatted data and the F that precedes the frame number Output Coordinates Serial Cmd lt K734 output frame number output coordinates gt Default Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Disabled When Output Coordinates is set to Disabled the coordinates are not output as part of the symbol data Enabled When Output Coordinates is set to Enabled the four
135. P Firmware Update Firmware Verification App Code v Request Part No App Code v Request Checksum Firmware Update Firmware Update is used to download application code to the imager Application code versions are specific to your imager Consult with your sales representative before downloading application code If needed an application boot code will be sent to you in the form of a mot file To download application code 1 First be sure that your imager is connected to the host computer 2 Apply power to the imager 3 In the Firmware Update dropdown menu select App Code This will open a dialog that allows you to browse for the application code file 4 Navigate to where the application code file a mot file is located on your host computer 5 Allow approximately a minute for firmware to download As the application code begins to download the imager will be silent the LEDs will flash intermittently and a progress indicator at the bottom of the ESP window will let you know when the download is complete Caution Do not interrupt power or disconnect the host cable while download is in progress Quadrus MINI Velocity User s Manual 13 15 Firmware Firmware Verification Request Part Number by ESP You can send a request to the imager for part numbers checksums boot code and application code 1 Click the Firmware tab in ESP s Utilities 2 From the dropdown menu to the left of the Request Part N
136. Port COM1 Once you have chosen the correct 9600 N 7 1 port click Start to connect Stop When you are connected you will see the green connection indicator in the status bar at the bottom right of your screen COMEDIA Point to Point COMI 115 2K N 8 1 Important If you are using a USB model you must connect the device to the host computer before powering on Otherwise the unit will not be recognized as a USB device 2 12 Quadrus MINI Velocity User s Manual Using ESP Autoconnect cont If your RS 232 host settings cannot be changed to match the imager s settings e Click Connect on ESP s menu toolbar and then select Connection Wizard be When the Select Protocol dialog Please select the protocol to use appears select RS 232 and click Next 0 nsz C USB lt Back Cancel e When the RS 232 dialog appears check the Force Connect box and l click the Connect button E sues e E connect at the specified settings ComPort COM1 y Force Connect Settings Quadrus MINI Velocity User s Manual 2 13 View View The View menu allows you to move quickly between interfaces without using the icon buttons on the App Mode toolbar It also allows you to access the Bar Code Dialog Bar Code Dialog In the Bar Code Dialog you can create symbols by typing the text you wish to encode This is a useful tool for creating configuration symbols allowing you to configure your rea
137. Quadrus MINI Velocity each byte output is equivalent to a keystroke with a key pressed report and a no key pressed report For this reason data rates are much slower when using Keyboard Reports Field Descriptions REPORT ID Size 1 byte Value 0x02 Note Report ID is the method employed by USB HID to allow multiple report formats to be sent and received from the same interface MODIFIER Size 1 byte Value 0x00 to OxFF Note Modifier is an 8 bit field corresponding to the state of the modifier keys at the time the keycode field was generated w Key LEFT CTRL LEFT SHIFT LEFT ALT LEFT GUI RIGHT CTRL RIGHT SHIFT RIGHT ALT RIGHT GUI NO FBR WDM O 3 28 Quadrus MINI Velocity User s Manual Communications Field Descriptions RESERVED Size 1 byte Value 0x00 Note This field is Reserved Its value is always NUL 00 in hex KEYCODES Size 6 bytes Value 0x00 to OxFF Note The Quadrus MINI Velocity translates 8 bit data values into Keycode data in the following ways 8 Bit Data Value Keycode Data 0x00 to Ox1F and 0x7F to OxFF Decimal key unless otherwise noted CR 0x0D Enter key TAB 0x09 Tab key ESC 0x1B ESC key Printable characters 0x20 to Ox7E These all translate to the keystrokes that produce them This includes a z 0 9 punctuation and SHIFT in the Modifier field when necessary Only the first Keycode in the 6 byte array will be populated Quadrus MINI Veloci
138. Settings lt K541 shutter speed gain gt Camera Features lt K542 pixel binning AEC AGC mode AEC AGC brightness gt Configuration Database Number of Active Indexes lt K252 number of active database settings database sort gt Configuration Database Status lt K255 index shutter speed gain focal distance pixel binning row pointer column pointer row depth column width threshold mode fixed threshold value processing mode narrow margins background color symbology gt Save Current Settings to Database lt K255 index gt Load Current Settings from Database lt K255 index gt Request Selected Index Settings lt K255 index gt Request All Database Settings lt K255 gt Database Mode Quadrus MINI Velocity User s Manual lt K256 switch mode frame counttime image process looping image dimensions gt A 9 Communication Protocol Commands Output Format Format Extract lt K740 output index start location length gt Format Insert lt K741 output index length hex string gt Format Assign Format Status lt K742 symbol number status gt lt K743 output format status gt Output Filter Configuration lt K744 filter number symbology type length wildcard placeholder data unused database index gt Ordered Output Filter A 10 lt K745 number of filters gt Quadrus MINI Velocity User s Manual Appendices Serial
139. Status Disabled When this command is disabled no database identifier information will be output Enabled When this command is enabled the imager will append a two digit number and the char acters DB to the data output following the separator for each symbol decoded using Configuration Database For example if the separator is an underscore character and the second database entry reads a symbol encoded with data capture during the read cycle the symbol data output will be data capture_DB02 If the database is not active no identifiers will be attached to output Separator Usage The separator character separates the symbol data from the database identifier Serial Cmd lt K759 status separator gt Default lt space gt Options Any ASCII character Important The ASCII characters lt gt and can only be entered as hex pairs For lt lt K759h 3C gt For gt lt K759h 3E gt For lt K759h 2C gt See ASCII Character Entry Modifier on page 3 32 for a detailed explanation of how to enter ASCII characters as hex values Quadrus MINI Velocity User s Manual 7 51 Quality Output Quality Output Separator Definition The separator character separates quality output data from symbol data Serial Cmd lt K704 separator decodes trigger status gt Default Options Any ASCII character Important The ASCII characters lt gt and can only be entered as hex pairs For lt lt K704h 3C g
140. Symbology Settings Symbology Type ECC 200 Code 39 si V Composite Enabled Window of Interest Processing Medium i The calibration progress bar indicates that the process has been completed Calibrate Cancel Save tE Saves the optimal configuration parameters determined by calibration results WOI Framing Disabled y WOI Margin 75 Linescan Height 64 4 12 Quadrus MINI Velocity User s Manual Initiating Calibration Calibration Calibration can be initiated by serial command the EZ Button or from the Calibration interface in ESP In ESP the Calibrate button starts the calibration routine To initiate calibration by serial command enter the serial command lt CAL gt from a terminal such as ESP s Terminal interface lt CAL is a calibration routine that emphasizes contrast and readability File Model Options Connect View Terminal Help n gt B 39 be O BQ o EZ Mode Autoconnect Switch Model Configuration Camera Terminal Utilities Output Format Next Row Read Rate decode sec Read Rate percent EndReadRate Locator Pattern On Locator Pattern OFF hal Send lt caL gt For Help press Fl See Calibrate by EZ Button on page 1 11 for the EZ Button calibration procedure Quadrus MINI Velocity User s Manual 4 13 Initiating Calibration Calibration Progress Indicator
141. The purpose of ESP is to provide a quick and easy way to set up and configure Microscan readers When the Quadrus MINI Velocity is connected to a host computer Windows Vista XP or 2000 ESP can be used to configure reader settings and to set up communications between the reader and host If installing from the Microscan Tools CD AUNI Insert the Microscan Tools CD in your computer s CD drive Select ESP Software from the navigation bar at the left of the screen Click on ESP Software under the Current Version heading Click the Run button and follow the prompts in the ESP Setup Wizard Note During installation you may see an Internet Explorer Security Warning that states The publisher could not be verified If you see this warning click Run to continue installation If downloading from the web 1 Go to the Download Center at www microscan com 2 Create a new member account or if you are already a member enter your user name and password 3 Navigate to the Microscan Software section of the Download Center near the top of the page 4 Click on the link showing the latest version of ESP Extract the ESP installation files to a location of your choice on the host computer Note where your ESP exe file is stored on your hard drive 5 At the end of the installation process the following icon will appear on your desktop 6 Click the ESP icon to start the program System Requirements for ESP
142. This parameter is the same as Straight Line except that the Window of Interest will also frame the scan line on the symbol length as well The scan line includes the symbol plus an additional margin area determined by the WOI Margin parameter Quadrus MINI Velocity User s Manual 4 9 Calibration Options Window of Interest WOI Margin Definition Sets the margin size that is applied to the calibrated symbol This parameter is expressed in number of pixels If the margin causes the image to exceed the maximum image size it will be reduced accordingly Serial Cmd lt K529 gain shutter speed focus position symbol type WOI framing WOI margin line scan height processing gt Default 75 pixels Options 20 to 752 Line Scan Height Definition This parameter is only used with the Straight Line modes lt sets the scan height of the straight line image and it is expressed in number of pixels Serial Cmd lt K529 gain shutter speed focus position symbol type WOI framing WOI margin line scan height processing gt Default 64 pixels Options 3 to 480 Processing Definition This setting defines the amount of time and effort the imager will spend attempting to decode a symbol for each parameter configuration Serial Cmd lt K529 gain shutter speed focus position symbol type WOI framing WO margin line scan height processing gt Default Medium Options 0 Low 1 Medium 2 High 3 Definable Low
143. Timeout Usage Definition lt K220 end of read cycle read cycle timeout Timeout 0 Timeout 1 New Trigger 2 Timeout or new Trigger 3 Last Frame 4 Last Frame or New Trigger Typically used with Serial Data or External Edge and Continuous Read 1 Output It is effective in highly controlled applications when the maximum length of time between objects can be predicted It assures that a read cycle ends before the next symbol appears giving the system extra time to decode and transmit the data to the host Timeout ends the read cycle causing the reader to stop reading symbols and send the symbol data or No Read message when the time set in Timeout elapses times out if When to Output is set to End of Read Cycle If in Continuous Read 1 Output a timeout initiates a new read cycle and allows the same symbol to be read again With External Edge Serial Data or Serial Data or External Edge enabled a timeout ends the read cycle and symbol data or a No Read message is sent to the host With External Level enabled the read cycle does not end until the falling edge trigger occurs or a timeout occurs The next read cycle does not begin until the next rising edge trigger Quadrus MINI Velocity User s Manual 5 15 End of Read Cycle New Trigger Usage New Trigger is an effective way to end a read cycle when objects move past the reader at irregular intervals not timing dependent Definition New Trigger ends the curren
144. Timeout is set to one second the imager sends the symbol data immediately and repeats the output at intervals of one second for as long as it continues to capture the symbol If End of Read Cycle is set to New Trigger the imager will send the current symbol data immediately but only once A new symbol appearing in the imager s range will be read and sent immediately provided it is not identical to the previous symbol Serial Cmd lt K200 1 gt Caution In automated environments Continuous Read 1 Output is not recommended because there is typically no reliable way to verify that a symbol was missed Note If Trigger Mode is set to Continuous Read 1 Output the imager will behave as if Number of Symbols were set to 1 regardless of the user defined configuration Quadrus MINI Velocity User s Manual 5 7 Trigger Mode and Filter Duration External Level Object y Initiate Read Cycle gt lt q Object 1 moving in front of the Object _ which initiates the read cycle gt pl q The same object moving out of deeco AD another change in the trigger detector beam causes a change in the trigger state End Read Cycle the detector beam causes state which ends the read cycle Usage Definition Serial Cmd This mode is effective in an application where the speeds of the conveying apparatus are variable and the time the imager spends reading each object is not predictable It also allows the us
145. UEC Threshold is met Serial Cmd lt K800 output on symbol contrast symbol contrast threshold output on print growth print growth threshold output on axial non uniformity axial non uniformity threshold output on UEC UEC threshold gt Default Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Symbol Contrast Threshold Usage Lets the user set the acceptable level of symbol quality Definition Conforms to ISO IEC 16022 symbol quality grading A B C D Serial Cmd lt K800 output on symbol contrast symbol contrast threshold output on print growth print growth threshold output on axial non uniformity axial non uniformity threshold output on UEC UEC threshold gt Default Grade C Options 0 Grade A 1 Grade B 2 Grade C 3 Grade D Quadrus MINI Velocity User s Manual 7 39 Print Growth Threshold Usage Definition Serial Cmd Default Options Lets the user set the acceptable level of symbol quality Conforms to ISO IEC 16022 symbol quality grading A B C D lt K800 output on symbol contrast symbol contrast threshold output on print growth print growth threshold output on axial non uniformity axial non uniformity threshold output on UEC UEC threshold gt Grade C 0 Grade A 1 Grade B 2 Grade C 3 Grade D Axial Non Uniformity Threshold Usage Definition Serial Cmd Default Options Lets the user set the acceptable level of symbol quality Conforms to ISO IEC 16022 symbol quality
146. Unused ECC Data Matrix Only Unused Error Correction Threshold Up Bottom to Top UPC EAN UPC EAN Add 256 UPU USB HID Configuration Options USB HID Interface USB Interface Standard USB protocol Use Default Storage Location Use Higher Quality Images User Defined ISBN User Defined MICR E 13B User Defined Price Field User Defined OCR Template User Defined Polling Mode Main Port Using ESP Using EZ Trax USPS4CB Status Utilities V Value Vertical FLM Very Large Scale Integration Video View VLSI 24 Quadrus MINI Velocity User s Manual W W Warning and Caution Summary Warranty Watchdog Timer When to Output Symbol Data White Background White Balance Calibration Width Column Width Wild Card Character Wildcard Window of Interest Window of Interest WOI by ESP Window of Interest WOI Framing Window of Interest WOI Margin Window of Interest by ESP Window of Interest by Serial Command Y Y Modem Download Transfer Options Y Modem Upload Transfer Options Quadrus MINI Velocity User s Manual Index 25
147. Usage Used to increase data integrity by ensuring that only one symbol length will be accepted Definition When enabled the PDF symbol must contain the same number of characters as the symbol length setting before it can be considered a good read The imager will ignore any symbol not having the specified length Serial Cmd lt K476 status unused fixed symbol length status fixed symbol length unused codeword collection gt Default 10 Options 1 to 2710 Note Fixed Symbol Length Status must be enabled for Fixed Symbol Length to take effect 6 36 Quadrus MINI Velocity User s Manual Symbologies Codeword Collection PDF417 Note Codeword Collection is not supported when Q Mode is enabled Usage Multiple Codeword Collection is useful in applications where portions of subsequent images can be read and pieced together so that no opportunity or time is lost to assemble codewords for decoding Definition When set to Multiple PDF codewords are collected from multiple images and assembled throughout the read cycle until the read cycle ends or the symbol is fully decoded It is important to note that when this feature is enabled only one PDF symbol should be presented to the imager per read cycle Serial Cmd lt K476 status unused fixed symbol length status fixed symbol length unused codeword collection gt Default Single Image Options 0 Single Image 1 Multiple Image Quadrus MINI Velocity User s Manual
148. a view or by right clicking an image in any other image capture view and then saving Send XON with Autoconnect Sends an XON Begin Transmission command to the imager before starting the Autoconnect routine Quadrus MINI Velocity User s Manual 2 9 Menu Toolbar Preferences gt Advanced Tab cont Ask to Save ESP File when Quitting When enabled prompts the user to save a esp file when ending a session 2 J Save changes to session 9 esp o coma The esp file will be saved in the location of your choice S My Documents DAR a Fie Edit View Favorites Tools Help Links Q Back gt E j Search gt Folders Ez Address 3 my Documents es e a Go x Name Size Type A EBsession 9 esp 6KB ESP Document a My Documents E 3 My Computer q 3 Floppy 4 Local Disk C ii lt gt Connect to Readers via TCP IP When enabled shows a TCP IP option on the Select Protocol dialog Note This option should only be selected if you intend to connect using an Ethernet adapter Select Protocol Please select the protocol to use RS 232 C TCPAP lt j C USB lt Back Cancel Use Default Storage Location When enabled automatically stores data in ESP s Application Data folder 2 10 Quadrus MINI Velocity User s Manual Using ESP Document Memo The information you type in the Document Memo field will appear in a context sensitive text box whenever your cur
149. abled 8 10 Quadrus MINI Velocity User s Manual Symbol Quality Axial Non Uniformity Data Matrix Only Note Axial Non Uniformity is not supported when Q Mode is enabled Definition Axial non uniformity is a measure of how much the sampling point spacing differs from one axis to another namely AN abs XAVG YAVG XAVG YAVG 2 where abs yields the absolute value If a symbology has more than two major axes then AN is computed for those two average spacings which differ the most ANSI axial non uniformity grading is defined this way A 4 0 if AN lt 06 B 2 0 if AN lt 08 C 2 0 if AN lt 10 D 1 0 if AN lt 12 F 0 0 if AN gt 12 If enabled the axial non uniformity is appended to the symbol data according the ISO IEC 16022 Symbol Quality Output Mode setting Serial Cmd lt K709 symbol contrast print growth axial non uniformity UEC gt Default Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Unused Error Correction Data Matrix Only Note Unused Error Correction is not supported when Q Mode s enabled Definition The correction capacity of Reed Solomon decoding is expressed in the equation e 2d lt d p where e is the number of erasures d is the number of error correction code words and p is the number of code words reserved for error detection A 4 0 if UEC gt 62 B 3 0 if UEC gt 50 C 2 0 if UEC gt 37 D 1 0 if UEC gt 25 F 0 0 if UEC lt 25 If enabled the UEC is
150. ach configuration menu contains a list of all option settings that pertain to that specific element of imager operation For example the Communications menu shows a Host Port Connections option and then a list of the sub options Baud Rate Parity Stop Bits and Data Bits Each of these sub options is configurable by using dropdown menus Graphic User Interfaces Imager settings can be configured using such point and click tools as radio buttons zoom in zoom out sliders spin boxes check boxes and drag and drop functions Terminal ESP s Terminal allows you to send serial configuration and utility commands directly to the imager by typing them in the provided text field Information about using ESP in specific applications is provided in subsequent sections For ESP system requirements see ESP System Requirements in Chapter 1 Quick Start Quadrus MINI Velocity User s Manual 2 1 EZ Mode EZ Mode In EZ Mode you are presented with the Locate Calibrate and Test options After connecting to your imager EZ Mode is the screen you will see You will be provided with on screen instructions that will help you with positioning testing and calibration Test Click the Test button to start the Read Rate test for a quick indication of the imager s read capabilities and the limits of your application When Decodes per Second is unchecked the test will count the percentage of decodes relative to the number of actual scans Click Stop to
151. acter s gt Default Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled within any protocol Preamble Characters Serial Cmd lt K141 status preamble character s gt Default AM corresponds to carriage return Options To enter control characters within a serial command hold down the Ctrl key while typing the desired character Example lt K141 1 CNTL m gt to enter the control character M Important The ASCII characters lt gt and can only be entered as hex pairs For lt lt K141h 3C gt For gt lt K141h 3E gt For lt K141h 2C gt See ASCII Character Entry Modifier on page 3 32 for a detailed explanation of how to enter ASCII characters as hex values Quadrus MINI Velocity User s Manual 3 33 Postamble Postamble Postamble Status Usage Definition Serial Cmd Default Options Useful for identifying and controlling incoming data For example defining the postamble as a carriage return and a line feed causes each decoded message to be displayed on its own line Allows the user to enable or disable up to four postamble characters that can be added to the end of the decoded data lt K142 status postamble character s gt Enabled 0 Disabled 1 Enabled within any protocol Postamble Characters Serial Cmd Default Options lt K142 status postamble character s gt AMAJ corresponds to carriage return line feed To enter control characters within a serial command hold down the
152. ad Rate decode sec For Help press Fl v Send lt caL gt Click on Macros arrow to Add Macro X Click on desired Macro to run Target Pattern Off Counter Remove Macro or Edit Macro CO Z The Terminal screen allows you to send serial commands to the imager by using Macros by copying and pasting or by typing commands in the Send text field The Terminal screen also displays symbol data or information from the imager You can also right click on the Terminal screen to bring up a menu of further options 12 2 Quadrus MINI Velocity User s Manual Terminal Find The Find function allows you to enter text strings to be searched for in the Terminal window For example a series of symbols have been scanned into the Terminal view and you want to determine if a particular symbol whose data begins with ABC has been read 1 Type ABC into the Find box amp e H Find jasc v 2 Press Enter The first instance of ABC will be highlighted in the Terminal window 3 Click the Find button to the left of the text field to locate additional instances of ABC Quadrus MINI Velocity User s Manual 12 3 Send Send The Send function allows you to enter serial commands and then send them to the imager 1 Type the command into the Send box gt O B ou Configuration Camera Terminal Utilities Output Format Send lt CAL gt y 2 Press E
153. age Definition Serial Cmd Default Options Number of Captures is used to specify the number of captures to be processed in Rapid Capture Mode Sets the total number of captures that are processed during a read cycle in Rapid Capture Mode This feature is used in conjunction with Capture Timing parameters to specify the capture sequence of a rapid capture read cycle lt K241 capture mode number of captures rapid capture mode pre processing gt 1 1 to 64 Note The range of maximum number of captures is dynamic This range is dependent on the maximum image size in the system and the memory configuration of the product The Quadrus MINI Velocity can support up to 61 full size 752 x 480 images The number of possible captures will increase as image size is reduced but it cannot exceed 64 This command handles the dynamic range itself so that if the user enters a value greater than the allowed maximum the value will be limited to the number of system images This command also affects the number of stored images that are allowed in the system If the maximum number is used for the number of captures the number of allowed stored images will be 0 Rapid Capture Mode Definition Serial Cmd Default Options 5 18 In Rapid Capture Mode one or multiple captures as many as 64 can be taken at an interval specified by the time between captures parameter In this mode the only limiting time factor is integration and transfer
154. al non uniformity axial non uniformity threshold output on UEC UEC threshold gt Diagnostics Output 2 Note Output On under Output 2 Parameters must be set to Diagnostic Warning for this output to function Output 2 Parameters Output On Diagnostic Warning Serial Cmd lt K791 unused 1 service unit gt 7 42 Quadrus MINI Velocity User s Manual I O Parameters Configurable Output 3 Note Output 3 has the same parameters and default settings as Output 1 and Output 2 Output 3 Parameters Output On Mismatch or Noread Output State Negative Pulse Width 5 Output Mode Pulse Trend Analysis Symbol Quality ISO IEC 16022 Diagnostics Serial Cmd lt K812 output on output state pulse width output mode gt Trend Analysis Output 3 Note Output On under Output 3 Parameters must be set to Trend Analysis for this output to function Output 3 Parameters Output On Trend Analysis Serial Cmd lt K782 trend analysis mode trigger evaluation period number to output on gt ISO IEC 16022 Symbol Quality Output 3 Note Output On under Output 3 Parameters must be set to Symbol Quality for this output to function Note ISO IEC 16022 Symbol Quality Output 3 is not supported when Q Mode is enabled Output 3 Parameters Output On Symbol Quality Serial Cmd lt K802 output on symbol contrast symbol contrast threshold output on print growth print growth threshold output on axial non uniformity axial n
155. allow it to enter read cycles Enable PDF Information Sending lt a1 gt will cause PDF417 data to be prefaced with information consisting of ECC level ECC level n number of rows n rows number of columns n columns number of informative code words n info code words and the number of data characters n data bits Send lt a1 gt again to disable PDF Information Quadrus MINI Velocity User s Manual 13 7 Differences from Default Differences from Default Clicking the Differences from Default button will cause ESP to check all stored configuration settings and compare them to default settings All settings that are different than default will appear in the left column shown below and descriptions of those settings will appear in the right column Click this button for a list of ESP configuration settings that are different than default settings Click Generate Barcode to bring up the Bar Code Dialog Then create configuration symbols containing the configuration commands of your choice lt K200 4 gt lt K201h 52 gt lt K220 1000 gt lt K470 0 gt lt K525 435 gt lt K529 1 0 2 gt lt K541 30 gt lt K 14h Bbabababa gt lt K715h Sbababa5a gt lt K716h 5abababa gt I Read Rate Counters Device Control Differences Master Database Firmware Differences from Default Generate Barcode Mode Serial Data Character Delimited A Read Cycle Timeout 1000
156. appended to the symbol data Serial Cmd lt K710 percent cell damage total read time capture time locate time decode time pixels per element ECC level matrix size quiet zone symbol angle gt Default Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Error Correction Level Data Matrix Only Note Error Correction Level is not supported when Q Mode is enabled Definition Outputs the Data Matrix ECC level When enabled the ECC level is appended to the symbol data Serial Cmd lt K710 percent cell damage total read time capture time locate time decode time pixels per element ECC level matrix size quiet zone symbol angle gt Default Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Matrix Size Data Matrix Only Note Matrix Size is not supported when Q Mode is enabled Definition Defines the symbol matrix size in number of pixels in both the x and y axis When enabled the matrix size value is appended to the symbol data Serial Cmd lt K710 percent cell damage total read time capture time locate time decode time pixels per element ECC level matrix size quiet zone symbol angle gt Default Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled 8 14 Quadrus MINI Velocity User s Manual Symbol Quality Quiet Zone Data Matrix Only Definition When this feature is enabled the size of the quiet zone is evaluated and a PASS or FAIL message is appended to the symbol data Serial Cmd lt K710 percent cell damage total read time
157. appended to the symbol data according to the ISO IEC 16022 Symbol Quality Output Mode setting Serial Cmd lt K709 symbol contrast print growth axial non uniformity UEC gt Default Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Quadrus MINI Velocity User s Manual 8 11 ISO IEC 16022 Symbol Quality Output by ESP ISO IEC 16022 Symbol Quality Output by ESP ESP s Symbol Quality interface allows you to evaluate Data Matrix symbols for compliance with ISO IEC 16022 requirements First determine which ISO IEC 16022 Parameters you need to evaluate using the Symbol Quality tree control Data Matrix ISOJIEC 16022 Parameters Symbol Contrast Enabled Print Growth Enabled Axial Non uniformity Enabled Unused ECC Enabled Once you have set these Data Matrix evaluation parameters go to the Preferences Tab and set your Data Matrix Grading Report output preferences After your output preferences are set click the Data Matrix Grading button Data Matrix Grading There will be a wait of a few seconds and then the evaluation results will appear in the Symbol Quality view in a format similar to the one shown below Data Matrix Grading Report GRADE ISO IEC Symbol Contrast 88 i A 16022 Print Growth 8 26 Dx e Dnom 58 zx i A Dy a 4 Dmax 65 i Dmin 35 Axial Nonuniformity 6 68 Kavg 13 2 Yavg 13 1 Unused ECC 180 Eact A Emax 18 GRADING x Cell Damage LES Total Read Time
158. ard Character allows a user to define a wild card character as part of the master symbol Serial Cmd lt K223 matchcode type sequential matching match start position match length wild card character sequence on No Read sequence on mismatch gt Default asterisk Options Any ASCII character Important The ASCII characters lt gt and can only be entered as hex pairs For lt lt K223h 3C gt For gt lt K223h 3E gt For lt K223h 2C gt See ASCII Character Entry Modifier on page 3 32 for a detailed explanation of how to enter ASCII characters as hex values Quadrus MINI Velocity User s Manual 9 7 Matchcode Type Sequence on No Read Usage Sequence on No Read is useful when the imager needs to stay in sequence even if no decode occurs Definition When Sequence on No Read is Enabled and Matchcode is set to Sequential the imager sequences the master symbol on every match or No Read When disabled it does not sequence on a No Read Serial Cmd lt K223 matchcode type sequential matching match start position match length wild card character sequence on No Read sequence on mismatch gt Default Enabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled As an example of Sequence on No Read Enabled consider the following decodes Master Symbol Decoded Symbol Master Symbol after Decode 001 001 002 002 002 003 003 No Read 004 sequence on No Read 004 004 005 005 No Read 006 Sequence on N
159. at Image Library Request Image Mode Image Output Image Output Example Image Process Looping Image Process Looping Disabled Image Process Looping Enabled Image Processing Image Processing Timeout Image Resolution Image Sensor Image Storage Image Storage Example Image Storage Mode Image Storage Type Imager and Symbol Orientation Imager Status Requests Implementing the Host Operating System Import Export In Read Cycle Increment Focus Position Indicators Initialize Initiating Calibration Input Install ESP Installing ESP from a CD Integration Interface Standards Interleaved 2 of 5 Interleaved 2 of 5 Add 128 IP IP Mode IP Threshold ISBN ISO Certification ISO IEC 16022 Grade ISO IEC 16022 Symbol Quality Output ISO IEC 16022 Symbol Quality Output 1 ISO IEC 16022 Symbol Quality Output 2 Quadrus MINI Velocity User s Manual Index 11 J ISO IEC 16022 Symbol Quality Output 3 ISO IEC 16022 Symbol Quality Output by ESP J Japan Post JPEG Quality K Keyboard IN Reports Keyboard IN Reports Disabled Keyboard IN Reports Enabled Keyboard Macros Keyboard Report Format KIX L Ladder Orientation Large Intercharacter Gap Codabar Large Intercharacter Gap Code 39 Last Frame Last Frame or New Trigger Last Mode Latch Mode 2 Unlatch Opposite Condition Latch Mode 3 Unlatch Re enter Read Cycle Latest Manual Version Leading Edge Trigger Filter LED LED Aperture Window
160. ataBar 14 RSS 14 lt K482 status gt DataBar Limited RSS Limited lt K483 status gt DataBar Expanded RSS Expanded lt K484 status fixed symbol length status fixed symbol length gt MicroPDF417 lt K485 status unused fixed symbol length status fixed symbol length gt vo Parameters l Power On Reset Counts lt K406 power on resets oower on saves power on flash saves gt Time Since Reset lt K407 hours minutes gt Service Message lt K409 status service message threshold resolution gt Serial Verification lt K701 serial command echo status serial command beep status control hex output gt Beeper lt K702 status gt Quality Output lt K704 quality output separator decodes trigger status gt Symbol Data Output Quadrus MINI Velocity User s Manual lt K705 symbol data output status when to output gt A 7 Serial Configuration Commands Read Duration Output lt K706 status separator gt No Read Message lt K714 status message gt Bad Symbol Message lt K715 unused message gt No Symbol Message 1D Stacked Symbology Qualification lt K716 unused message gt lt K717 minimum number of bars minimum number of qualified scan lines start stop status gt 2D Symbology Qualification lt K718 finder pattern status symbol size status symbol size 1 symbol size 2 symbol size tolerance dimension status dimension 1 dimen
161. ation it will not be decoded When set to NW7 The imager will perform an NW7 modulus 11 check character calculation on the symbol If the symbol does not pass this calculation it will not be decoded When set to Both the imager will perform both the Mod 16 and NW7 modulus 11 check character calculations on the symbol If the symbol does not pass either calculation it will not be decoded Serial Cmd lt K471 status start stop match start stop output large intercharacter gap fixed symbol length status symbol length check character type check character output gt Default Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Mod 16 2 NW7 Mod 11 3 Mod 16 and NW7 Check Character Output Codabar Definition When this field is disabled and a check character calculation is enabled the imager will strip the verified check character from the symbol data out put This condition must be accounted for if a fixed length is also being used When enabled the imager will output the check character as part of the symbol data This condition must be accounted for if a fixed length is also being used Serial Cmd lt K471 status start stop match start stop output large intercharacter gap fixed symbol length status symbol length check character type check character output gt Default Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled 6 22 Quadrus MINI Velocity User s Manual Symbologies UPC EAN Usage Definition Serial Cmd Default
162. atus fixed symbol length status fixed symbol length EAN 128 status output format application record separator status application record separator character application record brackets application record padding gt Default Standard Options 0 Standard 1 Application Application Record Separator Status Code 128 EAN 128 Definition When enabled an EAN separator will be inserted into the output between fields whenever an EAN conforming symbol is decoded and EAN output formatting applies Serial Cmd lt K474 status fixed symbol length status fixed symbol length EAN 128 status output format application record separator status application record separator character application record brackets application record padding gt Default Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Quadrus MINI Velocity User s Manual 6 13 Code 128 EAN 128 Application Record Separator Character Code 128 EAN 128 Definition This is an ASCII character that serves as an EAN separator in formatted EAN output Serial Cmd lt K474 status fixed symbol length status fixed symbol length EAN 128 status output format application record separator status application record separator character application record brackets application record padding gt Default j Options Any ASCII character 7 bit Important The ASCII characters lt gt and can only be entered as hex pairs For lt lt K474h 3C gt For gt lt K474h 3E
163. atus check character output status large intercharacter gap fixed symbol length status fixed symbol length full ASCII set gt Default Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Check Character Status Code 39 Serial Cmd lt K470 status check character status check character output status large intercharacter gap fixed symbol length status fixed symbol length full ASCII set gt Default Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Check Character Output Status Code 39 Usage Check Character Output Status when added to the symbol provides additional data security Definition When enabled the check character character is read and compared along with the symbol data When disabled symbol data is sent without the check character Note With Check Character Output Status and an External or Serial trigger option enabled an invalid check character calculation will cause a No Read message to be transmitted at the end of the read cycle Serial Cmd lt K470 status check character status check character output status large intercharacter gap fixed symbol length status fixed symbol length full ASCII set gt Default Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Quadrus MINI Velocity User s Manual 6 9 Code 39 Large Intercharacter Gap Code 39 Note Large Intercharacter Gap is not supported when Q Mode is enabled Usage Definition Serial Cmd Default Options Large Intercharacter Gap is helpful f
164. ault parameters For example a user that has inadvertently changed communication settings and saved them with a lt Z gt command may not know the correct settings or have the capability to communicate within those settings By first doing an EZ Button default or hardware default to restore the known Microscan defaults the user can then recall the previous customer saved settings with an lt Arc gt or lt Zrc gt command Microscan Default Parameters Microscan default parameters are contained in the firmware and cannot be changed Software Defaults Microscan default parameters can be recalled loaded into current settings with the lt Ard gt command or recalled and saved for power on with the lt Zrd gt command Hardware Default If a software default and reset is not possible it may be necessary to reset the reader by shorting connecting specific pins This procedure has the same effect as the lt Zrd gt software command Important For this reset to occur this command must be executed within 60 seconds of a power on or a reset 1 Apply power to the reader 2 If using an IB 131 locate pins 7 and 11 on the host connector Caution Be certain that the correct pins are located Connecting the wrong pins could cause serious damage to the unit 3 Momentarily connect these wires or pins and listen for a series of short beeps 4 Within 3 seconds connect them again A longer beep should be heard If not repeat the proces
165. ave in relation to the candidate symbols in the field of view lt K518 number of symbols in field of view gt Any number of symbols 0 Any number of symbols 1 One symbol 2 More than one symbol Note When the number of symbols in the field of view is set to 1 codeword stitching from all scaled image processes is allowed for PDF417 and MicroPDF417 Note This variable is used in Fast Linear Mode FLM usually considers the whole image as one candidate but when Number of Symbols in Field of View is set to 2 FLM will try to locate the candidates first and then decode The symbols cannot be side by side they must be parallel Note Number of Symbols in Field of View is not supported when Q Mode is enabled Quadrus MINI Velocity User s Manual 10 23 Damaged Symbol Damaged Usage Definition Usage Default Options 10 24 Symbol This feature is useful with badly damaged symbols in which finder patterns or clock patterns are distorted margins are distorted or missing on one or both sides of a symbol or portions of data are damaged When enabled the imager will make additional attempts and try different processes in order to decode the symbol Due to the complexity of the algorithm required enabling this feature could significantly increase decode time lt K519 damaged symbol status gt Disabled 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Note Damaged Symbol is not supported when Q Mode is enabled Quadrus MIN
166. be added The 4 state format allows the symbol to contain more information and makes it easier to decode 4 state symbols can also be printed easily in a variety of media including dot matrix inkjet and laser Definition If U S Post and USPS4CB Status are both enabled the imager will decode USPS4CB symbols Serial Cmd lt K460 postal symbology type POSTNET status PLANET status USPS4CB status POSTNET allow B and B fields Australia Post allow 0 FCC gt Default Enabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled POSTNET Allow B and B Fields Definition If U S Post and POSTNET are enabled and POSTNET Allow B and B Fields is enabled the imager will allow B and B fields in POSTNET symbols Serial Cmd lt K460 postal symbology type POSTNET status PLANET status USPS4CB status POSTNET allow B and B fields Australia Post allow 0 FCC gt Default Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Australia Post Allow 0 FCC Definition If Australia Post is enabled and Australia Post Allow 0 FCC is enabled the imager will allow 0 FCC in Australia Post symbols Serial Cmd lt K460 postal symbology type POSTNET status PLANET status USPS4CB status POSTNET allow B and B fields Australia Post allow 0 FCC gt Default Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Quadrus MINI Velocity User s Manual 6 33 GS1 DataBar RSS GS1 DataBar RSS Note GS1 DataBar symbologies were previously known as Reduced Space S
167. below the OCR string without affecting read performance Serial Cmd lt K461 status active template orientation single row background uncertain characters strip checksum special character passport checksum gt Default Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Background Definition Background improves OCR performance when the background on which OCR text is printed is not a uniform color This option is recommended for use with passports which often have patterns behind their OCR text Serial Cmd lt K461 status active template orientation single row background uncertain characters strip checksum special character passport checksum gt Default Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Uncertain Characters Definition When Uncertain Characters is enabled the imager will decode OCR strings and include characters that the algorithm is unable to identify Uncertain characters are issued as a group starting with ASCII value 29 Group Separator followed by zero or more ASCII characters the first being the most likely followed by decreasingly likely characters The group is terminated by another Group Separator character If there are no characters between a pair of Group Separator characters then no possible character for that position was determined Counting each uncertain group as a single character the total number of characters output will match the length of the winning OCR template Important This pa
168. bol size 1 symbol size 2 symbol size tolerance dimension status dimension 1 dimension 2 dimension tolerance orientation status orientation value gt Frame Information lt K734 output frame number output coordinates gt LED Configuration lt K737 LED mode ISO IEC 16022 grade gt Image Output lt K739 image output mode communication port file format jpeg quality gt Target Flood LEDs EZ Trax Output lt K750 green flash LED status target pattern LED status green flash duration gt lt K757 comm port image mode image format jpeg quality object info output grade output gt Database Identifier Output lt K759 status separator gt EZ Button lt K770 global status default on power on load configuration database save for power on gt EZ Button Modes lt K771 single beep two beeps three beeps four beeps gt Trend Analysis Output 1 lt K780 trend analysis mode trigger evaluation period number to output on gt Trend Analysis Output 2 lt K781 trend analysis mode trigger evaluation period number to output on gt Trend Analysis Output 3 lt K782 trend analysis mode trigger evaluation period number to output on gt Diagnostic Output 1 lt K790 unused 1 service unit gt Diagnostic Output 2 lt K791 unused 1 service unit gt Diagnostic Output 3 lt K792 unused 1 service unit gt ISO IEC 16022 Symbol Quality Output 1 lt K800 output on s
169. bology Identifier Symbology Identifier Definition Symbology Identifier is an ISO IEC 16022 standard prefix set of characters that identifies the symbol type When enabled the imager analyzes and identifies the symbology and adds a three character identifying prefix to the data closed bracket character indicating the presence of a symbology identifier A C E F G L Q Y b d p Z A Code 39 C Code 128 E UPC EAN F Codabar G Code 93 l 2 5 L PDF417 and MicroPDF417 Q QR Code and Micro QR Code Y Postal Symbologies b BC412 d Data Matrix e GS1 DataBar RSS p Pharmacode z Aztec Z Non Bar Code e Modifier Example d indicates a Data Matrix symbol Serial Cmd lt K450 narrow margins symbology identifier status gt Default Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Explanation of Modifiers for Code 39 Codabar and l 2 5 For Code 39 Codabar and I 2 5 the modifier indicates Check Character and Check Character Output status e For Code 39 only Full ASCII must be enabled to see modifiers 4 5 and 7 Modifier Check Character Pa me ee ee ag 0 Disabled N A No 1 Enabled Enabled No 3 Enabled Disabled No 4 Disabled N A Yes 5 Enabled Enabled Yes 7 Enabled Disabled Yes Example JA5 indicates a Code 39 symbol with Check Character and Check Character Output enabled and Full ASCII conversion performed Explanation of Modifiers for Other Sy
170. by the use of individual device addresses and the RS 485 standard Noise The same as static in a phone line or snow in a television picture noise is any unwanted electrical signal that interferes with the image being read and transferred by the imager Normally Closed A discrete output state that is only active when open Normally Open A discrete output state that is only active when closed Object Plane An imaginary plane in the field of view focused by an imager s optical system at the corresponding image plane on the sensor A 32 Quadrus MINI Velocity User s Manual Appendices Output A channel or communications line Data or discrete signals that are transmitted or displayed by a device Parity An error detection routine in which one data bit in each character is set to 1 or 0 so that the total number of 1 bits in the data field is even or odd Picket Fence Orientation A linear symbol orientation in which the bars are perpendicular to the symbol s direction of travel Pitch Rotation of a linear or 2D symbol around an axis parallel to the symbol length on the Substrate See the illustration below _ Skew lt lt Symbol or other object e Tilt of interest y A Pitch Pixel An individual element in a digitized image array picture element PLC See Programmable Logic Controller Port Logical circuit for data entry and exit One or more ports may be included w
171. cation Read Duration Output Output Object Info Output Indicators Serial Verification Image Output EZ Trax Output Comm Port Image Mode Image Format JPEG Quality Object Info Output Grade Output E2 Button Calibration Options Database Identifier Output Output 1 Parameters Output 2 Parameters Output 3 Parameters Quality Output ESP Values Good Read Enabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Host Disabled Compressed 90 Disabled Disabled Enabled Disabled 7 53 Configuring EZ Trax Output EZ Trax Output I enabied y Comm Port Image Mode Image Format JPEG Quality Object Info Output Grade Output Comm Port EZ Trax Output Image Mode Image Format JPEG Quality Object Info Output Grade Output Image Mode EZ Trax Output Comm Port Image Format JPEG Quality Object Info Output Grade Output Image Format E2 Trax Output Comm Port Image Mode JPEG Quality Object Info Output Grade Output 7 54 Disabled Enabled Compressed 90 Disabled Disabled Disabled Host v When EZ Trax output is enabled the imager will attempt to output all enabled EZ Trax options EZ Trax will not function unless enabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Host Both Noread and Good Read o Disabled Good Read Noread Both Noread and Good Read Mismatch Enabled Host Disabled Compressed Selects the communication port that
172. ccepts either a serial ASCII character or an external trigger pulse to start the read cycle Serial Cmd lt K200 5 gt Note In Serial Data sending a non delimited start serial character will start a read cycle however a non delimited stop serial character has no effect Quadrus MINI Velocity User s Manual 5 9 Trigger Mode and Filter Duration Leading Edge Trigger Filter Usage Used to ignore spurious triggers when Trigger Mode is set to External Edge or External Level Definition To consider a change in state on the trigger input the level must be stable for the trigger filter duration In an edge mode the imager will trigger a read cycle if the active state has been uninterrupted for the entire trigger filter duration In a level mode the leading edge is filtered such that on an active edge the state must be held interrupted for the trigger filter duration before a trigger will occur Serial Cmd lt K200 trigger mode leading edge trigger filter trailing edge trigger filter gt Default 31 1 ms Options 1 to 65535 Trigger filter range 32 0 us to 2 10 seconds Trailing Edge Trigger Filter Usage Used to ignore spurious triggers when Trigger Mode is set to External Edge or External Level Definition To consider a change in state on the trigger input the level must be stable for the trigger filter duration In an edge mode the imager will trigger a read cycle if the active state has been uninterrupted for the enti
173. ce Focal Distance Configuration Database Focal Distance Table Read Only Focal Plane Focus Focus Pass Focus Position Force Connect Format Assign Format Assign by ESP Format Assign Status Format Extract Format Extract by ESP Format Insert Format Insert by ESP Format UPC E as UPC A UPC EAN Four Beeps Position 4 FPGA Frame Frame Count Time Frame Grabber Frame Information Front End System Full ASCII Set Code 39 Full Duplex Full Duplex Mode Full Image Size 752 x 480 Function Keys PASS AMAS A Quadrus MINI Velocity User s Manual Index G G Gain Gain Configuration Database Gain Optical Density General Specifications Global Status Glossary of Terms Good Read Good Read Match Counter or Good Read Counter Good Read Match Counter Reset Grade Grade Output Gradient Gray Scale Green Flash Duration Green Flash Mode GS1 DataBar RSS Guard Bar Status Interleaved 2 of 5 H Half Duplex Half Duplex Mode Hardware Configuration Hardware Default Hardware Required Height Row Depth Hex String Hex Values Highlighting Histogram Hollow Mode Horizontal FLM Host Host Communications Host Connector Pin Assignments Host Port Connections Host Port Protocol Hours j I O Parameters 1 0 Parameters by ESP 10 Quadrus MINI Velocity User s Manual l I O Parameters Serial Commands Illumination Brightness Image Image Dimensions Image Form
174. chcode Type is set to Sequential the imager will behave as if Number of Symbols were set to 1 regardless of the user defined configuration Quadrus MINI Velocity User s Manual 9 5 Matchcode Type Sequential Matching Usage Definition Serial Cmd Default Options Useful in tracking product serial numbers that increment or decrement sequentially With Sequential enabled Sequential Matching determines if a count is in ascending incremental or descending decremental order lt K223 matchcode type sequential matching match start position match length wild card character sequence on No Read sequence on mismatch gt Increment 0 Increment 1 Decrement Match Start Position Usage Definition Function Serial Cmd Default Options Match Start Position is useful in defining specific portions of a symbol for comparison For example if a symbol contains a part number manufacturing date and lot code info but you are only interested in the part number information you can set the imager to sort only the part number and ignore the other characters Match Start Position determines the portions of symbols that will be matched by defining the first character in the symbol from left to right that will be compared with those of the master symbol when Matchcode Type is set to Enabled or Sequential For example if Match Start Position is set to 3 the first 2 characters read in the symbol will be ign
175. cncnncnnn 7 12 Read Duration QUPUT osise eroine iocari aansen ieioea nr cnn 7 18 Output Indicator Sit e aid adds ah eae Sees 7 19 A E desta dillon eet ahi eae Lat pide een ace 7 23 LED Gonfiguratio oia 7 24 Serial Verification ii is 7 25 EZ ButtOnc tsa s ea ec eed hin ee RA eat 7 27 EZ Button Modes is v s c0sts stele entities etl vee nea aes 7 29 Configurable Output I poisis e 7 32 Trend Analysis Output 1 00 eee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseaeeseeeseeeeeaeeseaeeeeetaaee 7 35 ISO IEC 16022 Symbol Quality Output 1 ooo eee eee eeeeeeteeteeeeeneeeees 7 38 Diagnostic Output ai nie lots Se eek A ee 7 41 Configurable Output 2 coocccninicinccnonccnocanancconcnnnnnnnnnn rana nan cnn cnn cnn 7 42 Trend Analysis Output Booooonocincciniconcccnoccconccnoncnanononnnonnc nono nc nora cnn aran 7 42 ISO IEC 16022 Symbol Quality Output 2 ooooooccncccnccinccccnccnocncancccnnncnnns 7 42 Diagnostic Outputi2 ip Peete eee ears 7 42 Configurable Output 3 oo eeeceeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeaeeseaeeeaeessaeeneeteees 7 43 Trend Analysis Output 3 00 eeeeeeeeceseeeseeeeeeeeseeeeaeeeseeeeeeeeseeseaeteaeetaaes 7 43 ISO IEC 16022 Symbol Quality Output 3 ooo ee eect eeeeeeeeeteeeeeneeraees 7 43 Diagnostic QUtpUt dsc ie eee ei E 7 43 Power On Reset Counts cceccesceseceeseeceeeseaeeeeeeeaeeeeeseaeeseeeenaeetsaes 7 44 Time Sin e Resetear iia iii 7 45 Service Mess litro iii art EEE a SERA 7 46 Frame Informatica ceesecs 7 47 Image Outputs dit
176. conditions Definition Allows the user to set up the output to toggle to active when the service timer has expired This condition will only be held for one service timer click Note This feature cannot be used if the imager is in a Continuous Read mode Serial Cmd lt K790 unused 1 service unit gt Default 0 Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Quadrus MINI Velocity User s Manual 7 41 Configurable Output 2 Configurable Output 2 Note Output 2 has the same parameters and default settings as Output 1 Output 2 Parameters Output On Symbol Quality Output State Negative Pulse Width 5 Output Mode Pulse Trend Analysis Symbol Quality ISO IEC 16022 Diagnostics Serial Cmd lt K811 output on output state pulse width output mode gt Trend Analysis Output 2 Note Output On under Output 2 Parameters must be set to Trend Analysis for this output to function Output 2 Parameters Output On Trend Analysis Serial Cmd lt K781 trend analysis mode trigger evaluation period number to output on gt ISO IEC 16022 Symbol Quality Output 2 Note Output On under Output 2 Parameters must be set to Symbol Quality for this output to function Note ISO IEC 16022 Symbol Quality Output 2 is not supported when Q Mode is enabled Output 2 Parameters Output On Symbol Quality Serial Cmd lt K801 output on symbol contrast symbol contrast threshold output on print growth print growth threshold output on axi
177. configure EZ Trax output using serial commands instead of the EZ Trax graphic interface Definition When EZ Trax output is enabled the imager will attempt to output all enabled EZ Trax options EZ Trax will not function unless enabled Serial Cmd lt K757 status comm port image mode image format JPEG quality object info output grade output gt Default Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Comm Port Definition Selects the communication port that will be used to transfer image files Serial Cmd lt K 757 status comm port image mode image format JPEG quality object info output grade output gt Default Host Options 0 Host 1 Aux 2 USB Host Port Sends output using the current Host Port Aux Port Sends output using the Auxiliary Port USB Sends output using a USB connection Image Mode Definition Determines which read cycle condition triggers image file output Serial Cmd lt K 757 status comm port image mode image format JPEG quality object info output grade output gt Default Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Good Read 2 No Read 3 No Read and Good Read 4 Mismatch Good Read Outputs the first Good Read image in the read cycle The image file will immediately follow the symbol data 7 56 Quadrus MINI Velocity User s Manual I O Parameters No Read Outputs the first No Read image in the read cycle The image file will immediately follow the symbol data Note If two
178. configured in the lt K140 gt command see Poll Address on page 3 6 To enable true multidrop protocol the RS422 485 port must be enabled lt K102 1 gt in order to turn the transmitter on and off If RS 232 is enabled instead of RS422 485 lt K102 0 gt then Polling Mode will operate as a Point to Point polling protocol This is because the RS 232 transmitter is always left on when enabled Serial Cmd lt K148 RES REQ STX ETX ACK NAK gt RES NAK Defaults RES Reset 04 REQ Request 05 STX Start of Text 02 ETX End of Text 03 ACK Acknowledge 06 NAK Negative Acknowledge 15 Note See Polling Mode Data Flow Examples in Appendix D for sample Polling Mode communication scenarios Note See USB HID Interface on page 3 23 for protocol information relating to USB 3 8 Quadrus MINI Velocity User s Manual Communications RS 422 Status Usage RS 232 is an industry standard RS 422 is used when greater cable lengths are required and or where noise interference is an issue Definition RS 422 if enabled allows communication through RS 422 I O lines When RS 422 is enabled RS 232 is disabled When RS 422 is disabled RS 232 is enabled SerialCmd lt K102 status gt Default Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Note The default setting can only be changed in readers with multiplexed RS 232 RS 422 ports It is forced to 1 enabled in readers with dedicated RS 422 ports Quadrus MINI Velocit
179. control key while typing the desired character Example lt K142 1 CNTL m CNTL j gt to enter AMA Important The ASCII characters lt gt and can only be entered as hex pairs For lt lt K142h 3C gt For gt lt K142h 3E gt For lt K142h 2C gt See ASCII Character Entry Modifier on page 3 32 for a detailed explanation of how to enter ASCII characters as hex values 3 34 Quadrus MINI Velocity User s Manual eee 4 Calibration Contents Calibration Serial COMMANAS cccccccccccnnanananonancnoncnonononononononnnnnnanann no noo nnnnnnnnonnnnnnnnnnnnnanannnnannnnnn nos 4 2 Calibration OVO O aa a aa a a aa a a a nn nr n rn Eaa Eas 4 2 Calibration Option See ica a e E E a A E aa aea hehe hike 4 3 Calibration Dy ESP rar a a A AA E ee 4 11 Initiating Calibration cern nE At 4 13 Additional Notes about CalibratiON ooooonnnccnnnininnnanananananonononononononononononnnnnnnnnnnn non nrnnnonnnos 4 19 This section shows the Quadrus MINI Velocity s calibration options and explains the different ways that those options can be configured Quadrus MINI Velocity User s Manual 4 1 Calibration Serial Commands Calibration Serial Commands Calibration Options lt K529 gain shutter speed focus position symbol type WO framing WOI margin line scan height processing gt Calibrate lt CAL gt Calibration Overview Calibration is one of the most powerful features of the Quadrus MINI Ve
180. d Options 3 12 A common application in conjunction with handheld imagers is one that employs an auxiliary readout to detect misapplied symbols In Transparent Mode data is passed between the auxiliary port and the host The imager buffers data from the auxiliary port and echoes the keyed data on the auxiliary port Auxiliary port data is passed through to the host whenever a return key is pressed at the auxiliary port or whenever symbol data is sent If sent with symbol data it is processed y Y on a first in first out basis SS Auxiliary port data to the host is always sent Imager with a preamble and postamble If the imager is in a polling mode with the host auxiliary port data will still pass through Host pon Data Originating from the Imager Transmission to the auxiliary port occurs immediately upon a Good Read AUX Data sent to the auxiliary port does not include Port a preamble or a postamble y WG e Communications with the auxiliary port is gt always in Point to Point protocol even if the Imager host is in a polled protocol mode Data Originating from the Host All host data is echoed to the auxiliary port in Host Aux Port unpolled mode y a Imager Host lt K101 aux port mode baud rate parity stop bits data bits daisy chain i d status daisy chain i d gt 1 Transpa
181. d When this feature is enabled the focus position will be calibrated to provide the best possible image quality and performance This method is essentially a search method that attempts to identify the desired focus using a search algorithm that cycles through focus settings to try and locate the desired focus as quickly as possible This is accomplished when the given symbol in the field of view is decoded Once a focus distance that will decode the given symbol has been located the search algorithm will fine tune the search to locate the inside and outside focal distances The final focus distance will be between the inside and outside values Note This method can be time consuming if the focus is not found on the first pass Quick Focus Quick Focus is designed to quickly locate the focus setting for an object in the field of view This is accomplished with minimal processing of the image by analyzing a histogram of the image frame Before performing the focus calibration a value for shutter speed and gain is determined and then the calibration process will step through the focus range of the system capturing the required number of image frames for each focal position A histogram is performed on each image frame and the histogram results for each focus position are averaged When this process is completed the data is analyzed and the optimal focus position is determined Note Quick Focus may not work well for all
182. d When Image Process Looping is set to Enabled the last captured image frame is re processed with the new IP and decode parameters If camera settings have not been changed from the last capture event and when a database configuration is loaded to current active settings no new image is captured Note An exception to this is the first database index a new image is always captured when the first database index is used When a camera setting has been modified from one database setting to the next a new image is captured For example if all database entries contained the same camera setting values but had different IP and decode parameters an image frame would only be captured when the first database configuration was used 11 12 Quadrus MINI Velocity User s Manual Configuration Database Image Dimensions Definition Determines how the image dimension parameters will be implemented Serial Cmd lt K256 switch mode frame count time image process looping image dimensions gt Default 0 Options 0 Window of Interest 1 Region of Interest Window of Interest WOl by ESP When Image Dimensions is set to Window of Interest the database image dimension parameters are camera settings and they determine the size of the image to be captured Video Evaluation Calibration WOl Configuration Database Dynamic Setup Panas 5 V Auto Sync Database settings with Reader Advanced Options Capture Settings lt lt WOl ROI
183. d AEC AGC Mode Disabled AEC AGC Brightness 30 Window of Interest Top D Left 0 Height 480 To change a setting double click Width 752 the setting and use your cursor to scroll through the options Standard Auto 5000 White x Em Adaptive 128 0 255 10 100 Continuous Capture 10 2 t To open nested options single click the Quadrus MINI Velocity User s Manual Camera and IP Setup Camera and IP Setup Serial Commands IP Threshold lt K512 threshold mode fixed threshold value cycle min cycle max cycle step adaptive contrast percent gt Mirrored Image lt K514 mirrored image gt Window of Interest lt K516 row pointer column pointer row depth column width gt Hollow Mode lt K517 hollow mode status gt Number of Symbols in Field of View lt K518 number of symbols in field of view gt Damaged Symbol lt K519 damaged symbol status gt Focal Distance lt K525 focal distance gt Increment Focus Position lt K525 gt Decrement Focus Position lt K525 gt Focal Distance Table Read Only lt K526 number of focal distances focal distance gt IP Mode lt K527 P Mode FLM direction gt Illumination Brightness lt K536 brightness gt Camera Settings lt K541 shutter speed gain gt Camera Features Quadrus MINI Velocity User s Manual lt K542 pixel binning AEC AGC mode AEC AGC brightness gt 10 3
184. d the trend analysis operation Output will be activated based on whether or not the symbol decode count at the end of the read cycle crosses the decodes per trigger threshold Note Although this setup causes the imager to function in a Decodes per Trigger mode the decode count will only be appended to the symbol data if the status of the Decodes per Trigger command is enabled Serial Cmd lt K780 trend analysis mode trigger evaluation period number to output on decodes trigger threshold gt Default 0 Options 0 to 65535 Quadrus MINI Velocity User s Manual 7 37 ISO IEC 16022 Symbol Quality Output 1 ISO IEC 16022 Symbol Quality Output 1 Note Output On under Output 1 Parameters must be set to Symbol Quality for this output to function Note ISO IEC 16022 Symbol Quality Output 1 is not supported when Q Mode is enabled Output 1 Parameters Output On Symbol Quality Under Output 1 Parameters expand the Symbol Quality ISO IEC 16022 tree Symbol Quality ISO IEC 16022 Output on Symbol Contrast Disabled Output on Print Growth Disabled Output on Axial Non uniformity Disabled Output on Unused ECC Disabled Symbol Contrast Threshold Grade C Print Growth Threshold Grade C Axial Non uniformity Threshold Grade C Unused ECC Threshold Grade C Output on Symbol Contrast Usage Lets the user know if symbol quality is less than acceptable Definition If enabled toggles Output 1 to an active state when Symbol Contrast
185. decode regardless of this parameter s setting Serial Cmd lt K471 status start stop match start stop output large intercharacter gap fixed symbol length status symbol length check character type check character output gt Default Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Fixed Symbol Length Status Codabar Definition When disabled the imager will accept any Codabar symbol provided it doesn t exceed the system s maximum capabilities When enabled the imager will reject any Codabar symbol that doesn t match the fixed length Serial Cmd lt K471 status stan stop match start stop output large intercharacter gap fixed symbol length status symbol length check character type check character output gt Default Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Symbol Length Codabar Definition This is the value against which all Codabar symbol lengths will be compared Serial Cmd lt K471 status start stop match start stop output large intercharacter gap fixed symbol length status symbol length check character type check character output gt Default 10 Options 1 to 64 Quadrus MINI Velocity User s Manual 6 21 Codabar Check Character Type Codabar Definition When disabled the imager will not perform any character checking calculations on decoded Codabar symbols When set to Mod 16 the imager will perform a modulus 16 check character calculation on the symbol If the symbol does not pass this calcul
186. deo When you move your mouse pointer over the image display a Window of Interest menu will appear in the upper left corner The menu allows you to Reset the Window of Interest or to Define the Window of Interest dimensions ABD POM JRUANOP ah UV 12345 Capture and Test D Mirrorlmage 7 Contrast Attribute 1 ABDEFGHI 6 48 Quadrus MINI Velocity User s Manual Symbologies Narrow Margins Symbology Identifier Narrow Margins Usage Used when the leading and trailing edges of the symbols are smaller than the standard margin or other objects encroach into the margins Definition Allows the imager to read 1D symbols with quiet zones less than 8 times the width of the narrow bar element Quiet zone is the space at the leading and trailing ends of a symbol Each quiet zone can be as narrow as only five times the width of the narrow bar element when Narrow Margins is enabled Serial Cmd lt K450 narrow margins symbology identifier status gt Default 2D Enhanced Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled 2 2D Enhanced Note Do not use Narrow Margins when Large Intercharacter Gap is enabled for Code 39 Enabled When Narrow Margins is set to Enabled the imager uses a 5x margin requirement for standard linear symbols 2D Enhanced 2D Enhanced enables a special decode algorithm for narrow margin 2D symbols Quadrus MINI Velocity User s Manual 6 49 Narrow Margins Sym
187. der by reading the symbols you create Bar Code Configuration Print Save As Bar Code Value Drag specific configuration values from the control tree directly into this field to encode new symbols ew Configuration Camera Terminal Utilities Output Format Barcode Dialog new symbol Caption Same As Bar Code Value Choose a spatial orientation forthe gt Rotation fo Degrees New C Specify Add start configuration code Add end configuration code Save Settings Differences from Default Settings The symbol you create will be displayed in the field at the bottom of the Bar Code Dialog Create a caption for the symbol that matches the encoded data or write your own caption 2 14 Quadrus MINI Velocity User s Manual Using ESP Navigating in ESP To change imager settings or to access the Utilities Camera Terminal or Output Format views Click the App Mode button gt App Mode To return to EZ Mode click the EZ Mode button 2 EZ Mode To make changes to configuration settings in the tree controls Parameters ESP Values Camera Setup Camera Settings The X indicates 1 Left click on the to expand pia Po that the setting y Shutter Speed 1000 is the default menu items Illumination Brightness High Focus Distance 400 2 Double click the desir
188. determined symbol position lt K744 filter number symbology type length wildcard placeholder data unused database index gt 1 to 10 Symbology Type Definition Serial Cmd Default Options 14 10 Specifies the symbology type allowed to occupy this location in multisymbol output Note To filter or order a symbol the symbol must meet all the requirements of the selected filter index lt K744 filter number symbology type length wildcard placeholder data unused database index gt 0 any symbology type 0 Any type 1 Interleaved 2 of 5 2 Code 39 3 Code 128 4 Codabar 5 UPC 6 PDF417 7 EAN 128 8 Code 93 9 Pharmacode 10 GS1 DataBar RSS 11 MicroPDF417 12 Composite 13 BC412 14 Data Matrix 15 QR Code 16 Micro QR Code Only supported when Q Mode is enabled 17 Aztec Code Only supported when Q Mode is enabled 18 Postal Symbologies Only supported when Q Mode is enabled 19 OCR Quadrus MINI Velocity User s Manual Output Format Length Definition Specifies the length of the decoded symbol allowed to occupy this location in multisymbol output Note To filter or order a symbol the symbol must meet all requirements of the selected filter index Serial Cmd lt K744 filter number symbology type length wildcard placeholder data unused database index gt Default 0 Options 0 to 64 Wildcard Definition This is the characte
189. dex gt Request All Database Settings lt K255 gt Database Mode 11 2 lt K256 switch mode frame count time image process looping image dimensions gt Quadrus MINI Velocity User s Manual Configuration Database Number of Active Indexes Usage Useful for applications that require several different complex imager configurations to be applied sequentially Multiple database indexes allow you to concatenate configuration profiles and to perform more complex operations than would be possible with only one set of configuration parameters Definition This feature allows you to set the number of database records groups of settings that will be used automatically during the read cycle If Number of Active Indexes is set to 0 only the current imager settings will be used not database entry settings Serial Cmd lt K252 number of active indexes database sort gt Default 0 disabled Options 0 to 10 Database Sort Definition Database Sort moves the database entry that produced a successful decode to the first position in the list of database entries Serial Cmd lt K252 number of active indexes database sort gt Default Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Number of Active Indexes by ESP Video Evaluation Calibration woi Configuration Database Dynamic Setup Click the arrow on the Active mana T Mao Syme Dabas setings thet advanced tons Indexes dropdown menu and Capture Sett
190. e Read Duration Output Serial Cmd lt K706 status separator gt Default space character Options Any ASCII character Important The ASCII characters lt gt and can only be entered as hex pairs For lt lt K706h 3C gt For gt lt K706h 3E gt For lt K706h 2C gt See ASCII Character Entry Modifier on page 3 32 for a detailed explanation of how to enter ASCII characters as hex values 7 18 Quadrus MINI Velocity User s Manual I O Parameters Output Indicators The Quadrus MINI Velocity has a beeper and three LED arrays as follows 1 A target pattern of blue LEDs for centering the field of view which is projected from the front of the imager 2 An array of green LEDs projected from the front of the imager that can be programmed to flash in response to user defined conditions 3 A row of five status LEDs on the side of the imager Green Flash Mode Usage Used as a visual verification that a good read has occurred Definition An array of green LEDs in the front of the imager can be programmed to flash in response to user defined conditions Serial Cmd lt K750 green flash mode target pattern status green flash duration gt Default Good Read Options 0 Disabled 1 Good Read 2 Static Presentation 3 Match 4 Mismatch 5 Strobe Disabled Green flash LEDs are disabled Good Read Green flash LEDs will flash when a good read condition is met or when Matchcode is enabled and a ma
191. e To view a list of focal distances supported by your imager use the lt K526 gt command 10 18 Quadrus MINI Velocity User s Manual Camera and IP Setup Focal Distance Table Read Only Number of Focal Distances Definition Specifies the number of focal distances supported by the imager Serial Cmd lt K526 number of focal distances focal distance gt Options 1 to 255 Focal Distance Definition Each x output represents a focal distance that is supported by the imager The values are specified in 1 100ths of an inch but the focal distance increments and decrements are not that fine The focal distance is defined from a curve equation whose constants are calibrated during factory setup The output value is in terms of inches and it is multiplied by 100 to remove the decimal place For example an output of 375 would signify a focal distance of 3 75 Serial Cmd lt K526 number of focal distances focal distance gt Options 200 2 to 600 6 Standard Density 200 2 to 600 6 Ultra High Density Quadrus MINI Velocity User s Manual 10 19 Increment Focus Position Increment Focus Position Definition Increments the imager s focus setting to the next focal distance supported by the imager Note Use the Focus Distance Table command lt K526 gt to find the focal distance settings supported by your imager Serial Cmd lt K525 gt Options 200 2 to 600 6 Standard Density 200 2
192. e M Enable A A Then check the Parse boxes beneath the symbols that you wish to format for user defined output 14 4 Quadrus MINI Velocity User s Manual Output Format Format Extract Output Index Definition Serial Cmd Options Output Index refers to the database entry you wish to modify with this command A formatted output is built by extracting data from a symbol s original data output and or inserting user defined characters It may be helpful to think of individual indexes as positions in the final formatted output you wish to build Starting with index 1 enter either an extract or insert command to begin building your desired output string Then with the next index number enter either an extract or insert command to continue building the output string Continue this process until you are finished building the string lt K740 output index start location length gt 1 to 100 Start Location Definition Serial Cmd Default Options Length Definition Serial Cmd Default Options Defines the location within the symbol data where the character extraction will begin The first character extracted will also be the first character in the sequence displayed in user defined output lt K740 output index start location length gt 0 1 to n maximum number of characters in the symbol data Defines the length in consecutive characters that will be extracted and placed in user defined output l
193. e Mode Status Interleaved 2 of 5 Rapid Capture Rapid Capture Mode Read Cycle Read Cycle by ESP Read Cycle Serial Commands Read Cycle Setup Read Cycle Timeout Read Duration Output Read Duration Output Mode Read Duration Output Separator Read Next Symbol as Master Symbol Read Parameters Read Rate 18 Quadrus MINI Velocity User s Manual R Read Rate by ESP Read Rate by Serial Command Read Rate LEDs Read Symbol into Selected Index Read Only Memory Real Time Processing Receive After Connect Receive Settings from the Reader Receiving Region Region of Interest ROI Region of Interest ROI by ESP Regular and Mirrored Image Regular Image Reload Last File Replacement String Match Replacement String Mismatch Report Options Report Tab Request All Configuration Database Settings Request All Master Symbol Data Request Checksum by ESP Request Checksum by Serial Command Request Master Symbol Data Request New Master Status Request Part Number by ESP Request Part Number by Serial Command Request Selected Index Settings Resets RES NAK Defaults Resolution Response Timeout Right Left to Right ROM Row Row and Column Row Depth Configuration Database Row Pointer Configuration Database Royal Mail RS 232 Interface Standard RS 232 Protocol RS 422 485 Interface Standard RS 422 Status Rules for Output Filter Configuration Rules for Utility and Configuration Commands Quadrus MINI Vel
194. e country of origin lt K473 UPC status EAN status supplementals status separator status separator character supplemental type format UPC E as UPC A gt Disabled 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Quadrus MINI Velocity User s Manual 6 23 UPC EAN Supplementals Status UPC EAN Usage Reads Supplementals typically used in publications and documentation Definition A supplemental is a 2 to 5 digit symbol appended to the main symbol When set to Enabled or Required the imager reads supplemental code data that has been appended to the standard UPC or EAN codes Serial Cmd lt K473 UPC status EAN status supplementals status separator status separator character supplemental type format UPC E as UPC A gt Default Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled 2 Required Disabled UPC Supplementals will not be decoded Enabled When enabled the imager will try to decode a main and a supplemental However if a supplemental is not decoded the main will be sent by itself at the end of the read cycle Required When set to Required both the main and the supplemental symbols must be read or a single No Read condition results For example if Supplementals is set to Required Separator is enabled and an asterisk is defined as the UPC separator character Then the data is displayed as MAIN SUPPLEMENTAL Note Under no circumstances will the supplemental symbol data be sent without a main symbol Note If additional symbols
195. e diode within each pixel Unlike CCDs however each pixel in a CMOS imager has its own individual amplifier integrated inside Connector A plug or socket on a device or cable providing in out connectivity for various circuits and pins Concentrator Intermediary device that relays data from imagers to a host and commands from the host to the imagers or other devices Counter Memory space allocated to keep track of imager events DAC See Digital to Analog Converter Daisy Chain Linkage of primary and secondary imagers allowing data to be relayed up to the host via auxiliary port connections Decode A Good Read The successful interpretation and output of the information encoded in a symbol Default Restores ROM or flash settings initializes serial commands and resets all counters Delimited A delimited command or field is bracketed by predefined characters Decode Rate The number of good reads per second ahieved by an imager Darkfield Illumination Lighting of objects surfaces or particles at very shallow or low angles so that light does not directly enter a reader s optical hardware Depth of Field The in focus range of an imaging system Measured from the distance behind an object to the distance in front of the object with all objects appearing in focus Diffused Lighting Scattered soft lighting from a wide variety of angles used to eliminate shadows and specular glints from profi
196. e inserted in the user defined output string These two characters comprise the hex base 16 value of the ASCII character For example if you wanted to enter the three character sequence Hi you would enter 3 for the length of the string and a hex sequence of 486921 for the ASCII sequence to be inserted 48 H 69 i 21 Important Each pair of hex characters represents one ASCII character Hex character pairs range from 00 to FF Since you are limited to 4 ASCII characters per insertion per database entry you are likewise limited to 8 hex characters per insertion per database entry Serial Cmd lt K741 output index length hex string gt Default NUL 00 in hex Options 00 to FF As many as 4 bytes or hex pairs See ASCII Character Entry Modifier on page 3 32 for a detailed explanation of how to enter ASCII characters as hex values Quadrus MINI Velocity User s Manual 14 7 Format Insert Format Insert by ESP Symbol Parse Step Insert Data Extract Range Insert Add Step Remove Step Clear All Parsing Sample Symbol Parse Original ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPGRS TUVW lt 201 23456789 Output OK Cancel Insert SP sr E SoH sTx ETX E01 Ena ACK BEL Bs HT LF 1 FEI R sol si si per Dc2 pcs Deal ax SYN ETB CAN EM sup Esc Fs as AS us se Click Delete to remove characters Cancel The Format Insert process i
197. e into which the length of the symbol must fall to be considered valid Symbol Length 2 Interleaved 2 of 5 Usage Useful in applications where 2 5 symbols of a specific length are required Definition The Symbol Length 2 field is one of two fields against which the decoded symbol is compared before accepting it as valid or rejecting it Serial Cmd lt K472 status check character status check character output symbol length 1 symbol length 2 guard bar status range mode status gt Default 6 Options 0 to 64 even only Important If Range Mode is disabled the length of the symbol must match either Symbol Length 2 or Symbol Length 1 to be considered a valid symbol If Range Mode is enabled Symbol Length 2 and Symbol Length 1 form a range into which the length of the symbol must fall to be considered valid Quadrus MINI Velocity User s Manual 6 17 Interleaved 2 of 5 Guard Bar Status Interleaved 2 of 5 Note Guard Bar Status is not supported when Q Mode is enabled Note Whenever Guard Bar is enabled the presence of guard bars also called bearer bars is required for decoding to take place Usage Useful when l 2 5 multisymbols are enabled to prevent false data output This typically occurs with highly tilted or skewed symbols Definition A guard bar is a heavy bar at least twice the width of the wide bar surrounding the printed I 2 5 symbol and helping to prevent false reads Serial Cmd
198. e reader to another until the data reaches the host A primary reader has its host port linked to the host computer and its auxiliary port linked to the host port of the first secondary reader in the chain Thereafter each secondary reader s auxiliary port is linked to the host port of the secondary reader that is farther from the host in the daisy chain Each reader in the chain can be assigned an ID that accompanies any data that it sends Serial Cmd lt K101 aux port mode baud rate parity stop bits data bits daisy chain i d status daisy chain i d gt Options 4 Daisy Chain Function Before the primary reader times out it checks its auxiliary port for data It should be set to wait at least 30 ms for each secondary reader in the daisy chain If no data is received within the read cycle timeout the primary reader sends a No Read message to the host Otherwise the complete data is sent If for example the primary reader is set to timeout in 120 ms the first secondary reader reader downstream might be set to 90 ms the next to 30 ms and so forth thus assuring that at least 30 ms elapses between transmissions Daisy chained readers can send a series of symbols by enabling Multisymbol and a common multisymbol separator If the primary reader does not receive the expected number of symbols No Read messages are appended to the data string to make up the difference between the number of symbols enabled in Multisymbol and the number of sy
199. e type sequential matching match start position match length wild card character sequence on No Read sequence on mismatch gt Number of Master Symbols lt K224 number of master symbols gt New Master Pin lt K225 status gt Enter Master Symbol Data lt K231 master symbol number master symbol data gt Request Master Symbol Data lt K231 gt for all or lt K231 master symbol number gt Delete Master Symbol Data lt K231 master symbol number gt Match Replace Mismatch Replace Camera and IP Setup IP Threshold lt K735 status match replacement string gt lt K 736 status mismatch replacement string gt lt K512 threshold mode fixed threshold value cycle min cycle max cycle step adaptive contrast percent gt Mirrored Image lt K514 mirrored image gt Window of Interest lt K516 row pointer column pointer row depth column width gt Hollow Mode lt K517 hollow mode status gt Number of Symbols in Field of View Damaged Symbol lt K518 number of symbols in field of view gt lt K519 damaged symbol status gt Focal Distance lt K525 focal distance gt Increment Focus Position lt 525 gt Decrement Focus Position lt 525 gt Focal Distance Table Read Only lt K526 number of focal distances focal distance gt IP Mode lt K527 P Mode FLM direction gt Illumination Brightness lt K536 brightness gt Camera
200. each consist of two rows of 44 OCR B characters Format B Visas and TD 2 travel documents each have two rows of 36 OCR B characters while TD 1 travel documents employ three rows of 30 OCR B characters Each row is read separately and some rows may be omitted from data output if there are decoding problems Multisymbol should be used to decode and output multiple rows of data 6 40 Quadrus MINI Velocity User s Manual Symbologies ISBN The ISBN template is used to read International Standard Book Number ISBN numbers in machine readable form It will read an ISBN string in either OCR A or OCR B fonts Example ISBN 978 1 4251 3374 0 Price Field Price Field is used in a number of applications including book pricing Price Field is formatted as follows C1234 5678E The field begins with a C and ends with an E The first part of the field is a C followed by four numeric digits The second half begins with a currency character The Price Field template allows the following currency characters Ss f Following the currency character a numeric grouping of 3 4 5 or 6 digits is followed by a terminating letter E The template supports both OCR A and OCR B fonts The following examples will all be recognized Ccb7 12 B801E C0217 4399E CO6es 31559E C0331 Z7 06213E MICR E 13B MICR E 13B is used in financial applications to encode bank account numbers bank routing numbers check numbers and other information on
201. ead Rate percentage on the back of the unit 2 To end the test click the Stop button Note Read Rate can also be tested using the Read Rate interface in Utilities Test Read Rate by Serial Command You can also start a test with the lt C gt or lt Cp gt command and end it with the lt J gt command 1 12 Quadrus MINI Velocity User s Manual S Quick Start tep 10 Configure the Imager in ESP To make setup changes to Quadrus MINI Velocity click the App Mode button App Mode The following modes are accessible by clicking the buttons in the first row of App Mode icons Y ns 2 gt ugga m EZ Mode Autoconnect Send Recy Switch Model Configuration Camera Terminal Utilities Output Format Click the Autoconnect button to establish communications between ESP and the imager Click the Send Recv button to send or receive commands Click the Camera button to access a live Video view Evaluate image captures Calibrate the imager set the Window of Interest fine tune capture settings and processing settings in the Configuration Database and control multiple read cycle functions in Dynamic Setup Click the Terminal button to display decoded symbol data and to send serial commands to the imager using text or macros Click the Utilities button to test Read Rate request or clear Counters enable or disable the imager or send output pulses in Device Control determine the Differences from Default in the current
202. ed Camera Features parameter and single click _____j gt psy Dis sbied y in the selection box to view AEC AGC Mode options AEC AGC Brightness 4 1 Window of Interest 16 1 3 Place your cursor in the Top 0 selection box scroll down ve 0 Height 480 to the setting you want to Width D change and single click Image Processing Settings the setting 4 Left click again on the open screen to complete the selection 5 Right click on the open screen and select Save to Reader to implement the command in the imager You can send the command without saving it or you can send and save the command simultaneously Receive Reader Settings Save to Reader Send No Save Send and Save Send and Save as Customer Defaults Default Current Menu Settings Default all ESP Settings Advanced Options gt Quadrus MINI Velocity User s Manual 2 15 Send Receive Options Send Receive Options To access Receive Save and Default options click the Send Recv button You can also access these options by right clicking in any of the configuration views E Send Recw Receiving From the Send Recv menu select Receive Reader Settings Caution Do not select this option if you do not want to upload the imager s settings For example if your ESP file has a number of custom settings that you want to maintain and download into the imager these settings would be lost by choosing Yes This
203. ed will decode ECC 000 symbols Serial Cmd lt K479 ECC 200 status ECC 000 status ECC 050 status ECC 080 status ECC 100 status ECC 140 status ECC 120 status ECC 130 status gt Default Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled ECC 050 Definition When enabled will decode ECC 050 symbols Serial Cmd lt K479 ECC 200 status ECC 000 status ECC 050 status ECC 080 status ECC 100 status ECC 140 status ECC 120 status ECC 130 status gt Default Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled 6 4 Quadrus MINI Velocity User s Manual Symbologies ECC 080 Definition When enabled will decode ECC 080 symbols Serial Cmd lt K479 ECC 200 status ECC 000 status ECC 050 status ECC 080 status ECC 100 status ECC 140 status ECC 120 status ECC 130 status gt Default Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled ECC 100 Definition When enabled will decode ECC 100 symbols Serial Cmd lt K479 ECC 200 status ECC 000 status ECC 050 status ECC 080 status ECC 100 status ECC 140 status ECC 120 status ECC 130 status gt Default Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled ECC 140 Definition When enabled will decode ECC 140 symbols Serial Cmd lt K479 ECC 200 status ECC 000 status ECC 050 status ECC 080 status ECC 100 status ECC 140 status ECC 120 status ECC 130 status gt Default Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled ECC 120 Definition When enabled will decode ECC 120 symbols Serial Cmd lt
204. eecneeeseeeeeceanecscneesseneeeseseeeseneeesenseetsaes 1 7 Step 7 Locate the Symbol in the Field Of View ooocooccconoccccnoccccnonccnononcnononcnnnnonononnncnonnnnnnnnnnnnnnos 1 9 Step 8 Calibrate cocoa a A a daa 1 11 Step 9 Test Read Ratei ii ade 1 12 Step 10 Configure the Imager in ESP cccceeeceeeceeseeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeseeseaeeeaeeseaeseaeeseeseaeeseeeeeeess 1 13 Step 11 Save Configuration in ESP oo eceeseeceeeeeeeeeeecneeseaeeeeeteseeeeeseaeeseaeseaeeeeeseaeeeeeeeatens 1 14 This chapter is designed to get your Quadrus MINI Velocity up and running quickly using the EZ Button or ESP Easy Setup Program Following these steps will allow you to get a sense of the imager s capabilities and to test symbol decode performance Detailed setup information for installing the imager into your actual application can be found in the subsequent chapters Quadrus MINI Velocity User s Manual 1 1 Check Required Hardware Step 1 Check Required Hardware Item Description Part Number 1 Quadrus MINI Velocity FIS 6300 300XG 2 IC 332 Adapter FIS 0001 0035G 3 IB 131 Interface Box 99 000018 01 4 Power Supply 90 264 VAC 24VDC USA Euro plug 97 100004 15 5 Object Detector 99 000017 01 6 Communication Cable 61 300026 03 Scanner G 150H Network dal
205. eed is fixed and is not part of the calibration process Enabled Shutter Speed When this feature is enabled shutter speed will be calibrated to provide the best possible image quality and performance Fast Shutter The calibration process will concentrate on achieving the fastest possible shutter setting that will still provide good performance The image quality or contrast may not be as good as what would be achieved with the Enabled setting The calibration process is not designed to choose the fastest shutter speed that can decode a symbol but rather to optimize for the fastest shutter speed that still provides good image quality 4 4 Quadrus MINI Velocity User s Manual Calibration Focus Position Definition Since focus can be configured by entering the target distance from the imager s parting line the user will normally configure the focus setting without needing to calibrate However if it is necessary to calibrate the focus distance there are two methods for doing so the standard Search Method or a Quick Focus method both of which are defined below Serial Cmd lt K529 gain shutter speed focus position symbol type WO framing WOI margin line scan height processing gt Default Quick Focus Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Search Method 2 Quick Focus Disabled When this feature is disabled the focus position is fixed and is not part of the calibration process Enabled Search Metho
206. els Per Element Data Matrix Only Placeholder PLANET Status PLC Point to Point Main Port Point to Point Standard Point to Point with RTS CTS Point to Point with RTS CTS and XON XOFF Point to Point with XON XOFF Poll Address Polling Mode Polling Mode Main Port Polling Mode Data Flow Examples Polling Mode Options Port Position Imager and Symbol Postal Symbologies Postal Symbologies Add 262144 Postal Symbology Type Postamble Postamble Characters Postamble Status POSTNET Allow B and B Fields POSTNET Status Power On Reset Counts Power On Power On Flash Saves Power On Saves Preamble Preamble Characters Preamble Status Preferences gt Advanced Tab Preferences gt Bar Code Options Tab Preferences gt General Tab Preferences gt Terminal Tab Preferences Tab Pre Processing Price Field Print Growth Print Growth Threshold Quadrus MINI Velocity User s Manual Index 17 Q Processing Processing Definable Processing High Processing Low Processing Medium Processing Mode Configuration Database Processing Time Programmable Logic Controller Progressive Scan Protocol Protocol Command Mnemonics Protocol Configuration Examples Pulse Pulse Width Q Q Mode QR Code QR Code Add 4 Quadrus MINI Velocity Quadrus MINI Velocity Dimensions Quality Output Quality Output Separator Quick Focus Quick Start Quiet Zone Data Matrix Only R RAM Random Access Memory Rang
207. emory Saturation The degree to which a color is free of white One of the three properties of color perception along with hue and value Scattering Redirection of light reflecting off a surface or through an object Skew Rotation of a linear or 2D symbol around an axis parallel to the symbol height on the substrate See the illustration under the definition of Pitch Substrate The surface upon which a linear or 2D symbol is printed stamped or etched Symbol Transitions The transition of bars and spaces on a symbol used to detect the presence of a symbol on an object Symbology A symbol type such as Code 39 or Code 128 with special rules to define the widths and positions of bars and spaces to represent specific numeric or alphanumeric information Tilt Rotation of a linear or 2D symbol around an axis perpendicular to the substrate See the illustration under the definition of Pitch Trigger A signal transition or character string that initiates a read cycle Very Large Scale Integration VLSI The creation of integrated circuits by combining thousands of transistor based circuits on a single chip VLSI See Very Large Scale Integration Watchdog Timer A security device that detects system crashes and attempts to reset the imager A 34 Quadrus MINI Velocity User s Manual Hyperlink Index A A D Converter Aberration About the Quadrus MINI Velocity About This Manual Absorpt
208. ength lt K470 status check character status check character output status large intercharacter gap fixed symbol length status fixed symbol length full ASCII set gt 10 1 to 64 Quadrus MINI Velocity User s Manual Symbologies Full ASCII Set Code 39 Usage Must be enabled when reading characters outside the standard character set 0 9 A Z etc The user must know in advance whether or not to use the Full ASCII Set option Since Full ASCII Set requires two code words to encode one character it is less efficient Definition Standard Code 39 encodes 43 characters zero through nine capital A through capital Z minus symbol plus symbol forward slash space decimal point dollar sign and percent symbol When Full ASCII Set is enabled the imager can read the full ASCII character set from 0 to 255 Serial Cmd lt K470 status check character status check character output status large intercharacter gap fixed symbol length status fixed symbol length full ASCII set gt Default Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Quadrus MINI Velocity User s Manual 6 11 Code 128 EAN 128 Code 128 EAN 128 Usage Code 128 is a smaller symbology useful in applications with limited space and high security requirements Definition A very dense alphanumeric symbology It encodes all 128 ASCII characters it is continuous has variable length and uses multiple element widths measured edge to edge Serial Cmd lt
209. eport type used by the host application the application protocol via USB is identical to RS 232 RS 422 ports HID Reports are used as a channel for standard Microscan imager communication command input and symbol data output Important No matter how the imager is configured it is always able to receive and respond to commands from the host application using Microscan HID Reports Quadrus MINI Velocity User s Manual 3 23 USB HID Interface Report Options The following functionality conditions hold true regardless of how HID Reports are configured 1 The host application must establish a connection with the imager to receive Microscan HID IN Reports symbol data and to send Microscan HID OUT Reports commands serial triggers 2 The imager can always receive Microscan HID OUT Reports commands serial triggers 3 The host application can always send commands through Microscan HID OUT Reports If the command requires a response a part number for example the imager will always send the response through Microscan HID IN Reports 4 The imager always ignores Keyboard OUT Reports sent by the host operating system 5 The content of both the Keyboard Reports and Microscan HID IN Reports is identical except for Keyboard Reports non printable data limitations Microscan HID IN Reports HID Reports are used as a channel for standard Microscan imager communication command input and symbol data output There are two types of Microscan
210. er row depth column width threshold mode fixed threshold value processing mode narrow margins background color symbology gt Default Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 4 1 2 16 1 Important Pixel binning has no effect when the Image Dimension mode is configured as Region of Interest in the Database Mode command This is because the Window of Interest camera settings are determined by the software based on the Region of Interest setup There is no benefit to pixel binning to increase processing speed when ROI is configured because the frame size would need to be increased to make pixel binning possible Row Pointer Definition The image dimension settings can be applied as a Window of Interest or a Region of Interest depending on the image dimension mode selected in the Database Mode command Serial Cmd lt K255 index shutter speed gain focal distance pixel binning row pointer column pointer row depth column width threshold mode fixed threshold value processing mode narrow margins background color symbology gt Default 0 Options 0 to 480 row depth Column Pointer Definition The image dimension settings can be applied as a Window of Interest or a Region of Interest depending on the image dimension mode selected in the Database Mode command Serial Cmd lt K255 index shutter speed gain focal distance pixel binning row pointer column pointer row depth column width threshold mode fixed threshold value pr
211. er to determine if a No Read has occurred External Level allows the read cycle active state to begin when a trigger change of state from an external sensing device is received The read cycle persists until the object moves out of the sensor range and the active trigger state changes again lt K200 2 gt Important Level and Edge apply to the active logic state Negative or Positive that exists while the object is in a read cycle between the rising edge and the falling edge Rising edge is the trigger signal associated with the appearance of an object Falling edge is the trigger signal associated with the subsequent disappearance of the object This applies both to External Level and External Edge External Edge Object Pp a Object 1 moving in front of the detector beam causes a change in a Object A read cycle detector Initiate Second Read Cycle gt a change in the trigger state This sig 5 dete gt S Timeout is enabled and a good read Initiate Read Cycle the trigger state which initiates the Object 2 moving in front of the detector beam causes another nal initiates a new read cycle and ends the previous read cycle unless or timeout has not occured Definition Serial Cmd 5 8 This mode is highly recommended in any application where conveying speed is constant or if spacing object size or read cycle timeouts are consistent External Edge as with Level allows the
212. erial Cmd lt K231 master symbol number master symbol data gt Options Enter data for 1 to 10 symbols any combination of ASCII text up to the maximum allowed For example to enter data for master symbol 9 after making certain that master symbol database size is enabled for 9 or more symbols send lt K231 9 data gt Important The ASCII characters lt gt and can only be entered as hex pairs See ASCII Character Entry Modifier on page 3 32 for a detailed explanation of how to enter ASCII characters as hex values Caution If no data is entered the existing data will be deleted ESP 1 Open the Utilities menu 2 Set the number of master symbols you want to create in Master Symbol Database Size 3 Double click on each symbol number you want to set up and copy or type your data in the popup dialog and click OK Master Symbol Database Size V Matchcode Type Read Symbol into Selected Index 5 Receive Reader s Database Send Database to Reader Master Symbol Data Master 3 Symbol Data Enter master symbol data here 4 When all your data has been entered click the Send Database to the Reader button Quadrus MINI Velocity User s Manual 13 11 Request Master Symbol Data Definition Returns master symbol data for any enabled master symbols from 1 to 10 For example to request master symbol 5 enter lt K231 5 gt The imager transmits master symbol 5 data in brackets in the following
213. eseaeenaeeseeseaeeeaeeseaeeeeeeeeene 10 19 Increment FOCUS POSIUON en 2 es ee ee eee 10 20 Decrement FOCUS POSItOM sce cotidiana drid 10 20 IP Threshold icon ala el ea ead 10 21 Number of Symbols in Field Of VieW ccccecceeeceeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeceeeeeaeecaeeseaeeeaeeseaeeseesneeeeeeeeeneeeaes 10 23 Damaged Symbolinen a a ad cave ater eats ee 10 24 IP MOde anc 4 vals a evra ged ed Ae oda iinet a 10 25 Hollow Mode xix cir ee des uae i en ee Saal d 10 27 Mirrored IMa Je eg nia anid ba a erie ei la ell 10 28 Illumination Brighthess ve e220 csc cts ose aa its 10 29 This section provides adjustment parameters for the physical controls of the camera image acquisition database settings and image diagnostics Quadrus MINI Velocity User s Manual 10 1 Camera and IP Setup by ESP Camera and IP Setup by ESP ae Click this button to bring up the Click this button to bring up the Image Processing Settings Processing Mode FLM Direction Image Processing Timeout Background Color Mirrored Image Damaged Symbol Status Thresholding Threshold Mode Threshold Yalue Cycle Minimum Cycle Maximum Cycle Step Adaptive Contrast Capture Mode App Mode App Mode view Camera Camera Setup tree control Parameters ESP Values _ i Camera Setup Camera Settings Gain 20 Shutter Speed 1000 Illumination Brightness High Focus Distance 400 Camera Features Pixel Binning Disable
214. eshold output on axial non uniformity axial non uniformity threshold output on UEC UEC threshold gt ISO IEC 16022 Symbol Quality Output 2 lt K801 output on symbol contrast symbol contrast threshold output on print growth print growth threshold output on axial non uniformity axial non uniformity threshold output on UEC UEC threshola gt ISO IEC 16022 Symbol Quality Output 3 lt K802 output on symbol contrast symbol contrast threshold output on print growth print growth threshold output on axial non uniformity axial non uniformity threshold output on UEC UEC threshold gt Configurable Output 1 lt K810 output on output state pulse width output mode gt Configurable Output 2 lt K811 output on output state pulse width output mode gt Configurable Output 3 lt K812 output on output state pulse width output mode gt Symbol Quality Symbol Quality Separator Data Matrix Output Mode lt K708 symbol quality separator Data Matrix output mode gt ISO IEC 16022 Symbol Quality Output A 8 lt K709 symbol contrast print growth axial non uniformity UEC gt Quadrus MINI Velocity User s Manual Microscan Symbol Quality Output Appendices lt K710 percent cell damage total read time capture time locate time decode time pixels per element ECC level matrix size quiet zone gt Static Validation Report lt VAL gt Matchcode Matchcode Type lt K223 matchcod
215. ettings of all the models defined in that file Quadrus MINI Velocity User s Manual 2 5 Menu Toolbar Options The Options menu allows you to save memos and set up ESP Onti Preferences Note Preferences will be saved and loaded into ESP whenever ESP Preferences is opened next whether or not you save the ESP file Document Memo Model Memo Preferences gt General Tab Preferences General Terminal Bar Code Options Advanced The Toolbar Style il options allow you to Reload Last File Show Both Icon and Text determine how ESP will display the mode options in the two rows MV Show Connect Prompt C Only Show Text at the top of the screen On Startup Toolbar Style MV Show Model Prompt Only Show Icon Receive After Connect l Skip EZ Mode Enable Send and Save as Customer Defaults Default Settings l Reload Last File At startup reloads the last file saved to the host computer s hard drive Show Model Prompt At startup shows the model menu displaying all supported readers Show Connect Prompt At startup displays the Would you like to connect to the Quadrus MINI Velocity prompt Receive After Connect At startup loads the imager s settings into ESP This is not recommended if you want to preserve your ESP settings for future use Skip EZ Mode At startup skips EZ Mode and opens directly in App Mode Enable Send and Save as Customer Defaults
216. evaluations Important Symbol Quality output is not supported when Q Mode is enabled Quadrus MINI Velocity User s Manual 8 1 Symbol Quality Serial Commands Symbol Quality Serial Commands Symbol Quality Separator Data lt K708 symbol quality separator Data Matrix output mode gt Matrix Output Mode ISO IEC 16022 Symbol Quality lt K709 symbol contrast print growth axial non uniformity Output UEC gt Microscan Symbol Quality Output lt K710 percent cell damage total read time capture time locate time decode time pixels per element ECC level matrix size quiet zone symbol angle gt Static Validation Report 8 2 lt VAL gt Quadrus MINI Velocity User s Manual Symbol Quality Overview of Symbol Quality Information about symbol quality and timing can be appended to symbol data by enabling specific evaluation parameters The order in which these values are appended corresponds directly to the order in which they appear in ESP s Symbol Quality tree control Symbol Quality parameters are separated into ISO IEC 16022 Symbol Quality Output and Microscan Symbol Quality Output Total Read Time Symbol Quality Separator and Output Mode are common to both ISO IEC 16022 and Microscan Grading Parameters Global Total Read Time Enabled lt g Symbol Quality Separator SP Output Mode Grade Data Matrix ISOJIEC 16022 Parameters Symbol Cont
217. finition Specifies the direction in which a symbol can be read Serial Cmd lt K477 status fixed symbol length status fixed symbol length minimum number of bars bar width status direction fixed threshold value gt Default Forward Options 0 Forward 1 Reverse Fixed Threshold Value Pharmacode Definition Used when Bar Width Status is set to Fixed Threshold Defines the minimum difference in pixels that will distinguish a narrow bar from a wide bar Serial Cmd lt K477 status fixed symbol length status fixed symbol length minimum number of bars bar width status direction fixed threshold value gt Default 10 Options 1 to 65535 6 28 Quadrus MINI Velocity User s Manual Symbologies Postal Symbologies Note Postal Symbologies are only supported when Q Mode is enabled Important Postal Symbologies must have a pixels per element value of no more than 7 to be decoded reliably by the Quadrus MINI Velocity The imager must be configured to specific read range field of view and camera parameters before decoding Postal Symbologies For optimal decode results with a Standard Density SD imager e Set Focal Distance to 6 and set gain and shutter settings for a high contrast image Enable Camera Features at 4 1 e Position the imager 3 5 to 6 from the symbol 5 10 if Pixel Binning is disabled e Position the symbol as close to the center of the imager s field of view as possible Note Measurements
218. format lt 5 gt If no master symbol data is available the output will be lt 5 gt Serial Cmd lt K231 master symbol number gt Caution Be sure to add the or you will delete the master symbol Note This command returns the number of master symbols if no number is included ESP 1 Click the Utilities button and the Master Database tab 2 Click the Receive Reader s Database button Master Symbol Database Size V Matchcode Type Read Symbol into Selected Index 5 Receive Reader s Database Send Database to Reader Request All Master Symbol Data Definition This command will return master symbol data for all symbols enabled up to 10 Serial Cmd lt K231 gt 13 12 Quadrus MINI Velocity User s Manual Utilities Read Next Symbol as Master Symbol Definition After you ve set the size in the database you can order the imager to read the next symbol as the master symbol for any given master symbol number Serial Cmd lt Gmaster symbol number gt To store the next symbol decoded as master symbol 1 send lt G gt or lt G1 gt To store the next symbol decoded as the master symbol for any other master symbol database number send lt Gmaster symbol number 1 10 gt For example lt G5 gt will cause the next symbol read to be entered as master symbol 5 ESP In the Master Database tab under the Output Format menu 1 Select the master symbol index number in which you want to store the s
219. g M Use Higher Quality Images Connect to readers via TCP IP MV Open Image after Save M Use Default Storage Location Default Settings OK Cancel The Auto Sync options at the top of the Advanced tab allow you to determine whether Auto Sync will be enabled automatically in sections of ESP where it is used or if it will ask you before it enables Auto Sync functions Always Ask Before Auto Sync Occurs If you check this option box you are then able to determine what specific Auto Sync functions will be enabled Receive Settings from the Reader will automatically send the imager s settings to ESP when Auto Sync is enabled Send ESP Settings to the Reader will automatically send all imager configuration settings chosen in ESP to the imager Do Not Send or Receive Settings creates a condition in which Auto Sync will not automatically send imager settings to ESP or send ESP settings to the imager Show Target Pattern During Locate Allows you to determine whether the blue LED target pattern will be on or off during the Locate routine Show Target Pattern During Calibrate Allows you to determine whether the blue LED target pattern will be on or off during the Calibrate routine Use Higher Quality Images Sets ESP to output images at a higher resolution than standard JPEG format Open Image after Save When Open Image after Save is enabled ESP automatically opens saved image captures Images can be saved from the Evaluation tab in the Camer
220. g with the symbol data When disabled symbol data is sent without the check character Serial Cmd lt K481 status check character output fixed symbol length status fixed symbol length gt Default 10 Options 1 to 64 Quadrus MINI Velocity User s Manual 6 15 Interleaved 2 of 5 Interleaved 2 of 5 Usage Definition Serial Cmd Default Options 1 2 5 has been popular because it is the most dense symbology for printing numeric characters less than 10 characters in length however Microscan does not recommend this symbology for any new applications because of inherent problems such as truncation A dense contimuous self checking numeric symbology Characters are paired together so that each character has five elements two wide and three narrow representing numbers 0 through 9 with the bars representing the first character and the interleaved spaces representing the second character A check character is highly recommended Important You must set Symbol Length in order to decode 2 5 symbols unless Range Mode is enabled lt K472 status check character status check character output status symbol length 1 symbol length 2 guard bar status range mode status gt Disabled 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Check Character Status Interleaved 2 of 5 Usage Definition Serial Cmd Default Options This option is not typically used but it can be enabled for additional security in applications where the
221. g and other Matchcode operations Definition Allows the user to define up to 10 master symbols as the master symbol database which can be entered by keyboard scanned in displayed or deleted by serial or ESP commands Click the Master Database tab Enable Matchcode Type Set the Master Symbol Database Size Select the database index in which you want to enter the master symbol Do one of the following to enter master symbol data a Double click the index row to type data directly into the index b Click the Read Symbol into Selected Index to enter the next decoded symbol arRWND Set Master Symbol Loads the next symbol decoded into Database Size here the selected index Master Symbol Y Database Size Y Matchcode Type Read Symbol intd Selected Index ms Receive Reader s Database Send Database to Reader Master Symbol Data Double click a row to enter data into popup dialog box Loads the imager s saved Saves the displayed master symbols into ESP database to the imager Caution Since the total number of characters available for the master symbol database is limited changes to the Master Symbol Database Size will re allocate the number of characters available for each master symbol and could cause existing master symbols to be deleted See manual for details Quadrus MINI Velocity User s Manual 13 9 Master
222. ger will attempt to decode for white background first and if there is no decode will then attempt to decode for black background Quadrus MINI Velocity User s Manual 6 51 Background Color 6 52 Quadrus MINI Velocity User s Manual MS 7 O Parameters Contents I O Parameters by ESP ia 7 2 I O Parameters Serial Commands oooocconccnonccnncconcnnncnnoncnnnnnrnnnnnnn crac rn 7 3 Symbol Data Outputicess seas ridad 7 4 No Read UCET e EEEE T TE E T 7 7 Bad SyMboliMessage iii iii 7 10 NO Symbol Messade elcociocsini rtf 7 10 1D Stacked Symbology Qualification ooonocinnididnonnnnnnccnnccnnccnnncnrornnnnrnrarcnn non rn cnn rccan cnn 7 11 2D Symbology Qualifications ict iin ira ae ial iss 7 12 Read Duration QutpUt i morssiden ninien Ati ioear don eps atte al ee ey 7 18 Output Indicators 22 ncn ASA eee A ein Gs ae ef ete i eO 7 19 BOGDeh isis Ani Ria al nid et A eA ae si net te ee a 7 23 LED Configurationi seine OA a eee ee ele 7 24 Serial Verification a Nei 7 25 EZ Button a A da 7 27 EZ Button MoOdES ia ii a A tb ad ie 7 29 Configurable QuUiput A iii de ib ee edn ad 7 32 Trend Analysis Output licua ia a n 7 35 ISO IEC 16022 Symbol Quality Output 1 ooonccnccnnnconoccnanccnnnncancconononncnnnn cnn ronca carr ncnn 7 38 DiagnosticiQUIpUt Distintas 7 41 Configurable Output Literaria a Oi ad 7 42 Trend Analysis Qutput 2 coda t n 7 42 ISO IEC 16022 Symbol Quality Output 2 oooncocicconnccnnccconccnonnnanccnnnncancnnnn cn
223. gnores any symbol not having the specified length Serial Cmd lt K484 status fixed symbol length status fixed symbol length gt Default 14 Options 1 to 74 6 34 Quadrus MINI Velocity User s Manual Symbologies DataBar Limited RSS Limited Note DataBar Limited was previously known as RSS Limited Usage DataBar Limited is designed to be read by laser and CCD readers It is not recommended for omnidirectional slot scanners Definition Encodes a smaller 14 digit symbol 74 modules wide that is not omnidirectional Serial Cmd lt K483 status gt Default Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled DataBar 14 RSS 14 Note DataBar 14 was previously known as RSS 14 Usage Used in the grocery retail and prescription drug industries where 14 digit EAN item identification may be needed Definition DataBar 14 is a fixed symbol length symbology that encodes 14 digits including a 1 digit indicator DataBar 14 is 96 modules wide It can be stacked in two rows it can read omnidirectionally if printed in full height or horizontally if height truncated for small marking Serial Cmd lt K482 status gt Default Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled non stacked 2 Enabled stacked decode both stacked and non stacked Note Where appropriate use 1 non stacked for better performance over 2 stacked decode both stacked and non stacked Quadrus MINI Velocity User s Manual 6 35 PDF417 PDF417
224. grading A B C D lt K800 output on symbol contrast symbol contrast threshold output on print growth print growth threshold output on axial non uniformity axial non uniformity threshold output on UEC UEC threshold gt Grade C 0 Grade A 1 Grade B 2 Grade C 3 Grade D Unused Error Correction Threshold Usage Definition Serial Cmd Default Options 7 40 Lets the user set the acceptable level of symbol quality Conforms to ISO IEC 16022 symbol quality grading A B C D lt K800 output on symbol contrast symbol contrast threshold output on print growth print growth threshold output on axial non uniformity axial non uniformity threshold output on UEC UEC threshold gt Grade C 0 Grade A 1 Grade B 2 Grade C 3 Grade D Quadrus MINI Velocity User s Manual I O Parameters Diagnostics Output 1 Note Output On under Output 1 Parameters must be set to Diagnostic Warning for this output to function Output 1 Parameters Output On Diagnostic Warning Under Output 1 Parameters expand the Diagnostics tree Diagnostics Service Unit Disabled Serial Cmd lt K790 unused 1 service unit gt Default 0 Options 0 Disabled Service Unit When Diagnostic Warning is enabled the Output On configuration has no effect The output will remain active as long as one of the diagnostic warning conditions is met The output will become inactive once it detects that there are no diagnostic warning
225. gs for database index 5 11 18 Quadrus MINI Velocity User s Manual Configuration Database Request All Configuration Database Settings Definition Returns configuration settings for all indexes in the configuration database Serial Cmd lt K255 gt Example lt K255 gt This command phrase returns the configuration settings for all 10 database indexes Quadrus MINI Velocity User s Manual 11 19 Request All Configuration Database Settings 11 20 Quadrus MINI Velocity User s Manual E 12 Terminal Contents Terminal WiNdOW imc io atte dde dd ete aa bi 12 2 EIN 2 er do dt e e la E OE ade e o ed o 12 3 A A EATA 12 4 MacOS cata oia Sontag laten ido do ira TEE 12 5 This section describes the Terminal window and macro functions in ESP Quadrus MINI Velocity User s Manual 12 1 Terminal Window Terminal Window amp Terminal Click this button to display the Terminal view The following view will appear Copy paste save Clear screen ES ESP Untitled File Model Options Connect View Terminal Help Type text here to Terminal Type serial find matching text screen commands in the Terminal here window Dor d gt EZ Mode Autoconnect Switch Model Da rae E T EX ox Configuration Camera Terminal DATA Utilities Output Format Bs El Find Macros listed on this bar Next Row Re
226. gt To select a particular symbology add the number value associated with that symbology type Examples If Data Matrix and Code 39 are required the paramater would be 2 16 18 If 2 5 BC412 and DataBar Limited RSS Limited are required the parameter would be 128 2048 16384 18560 Serial Cmd lt K255 index shutter speed gain pixel binning row pointer column pointer row depth column width threshold mode fixed threshold value processing mode narrow margins background color symbology gt Default Disabled Disabled When Symbology Type is disabled the database uses the current Symbology Type setup to determine active symbologies Any Symbology Add 1 All symbologies except Pharmacode are enabled while this database index is being used Data Matrix Add 2 lf enabled Data Matrix will be active for this database index Important The ECC level must be configured using the Data Matrix command lt K479 gt If no ECC level has been configured the imager will not decode Data Matrix symbols QR Code Add 4 If enabled QR Code will be active for this database index Code 128 Add 8 If enabled Code 128 will be active for this database index 11 8 Quadrus MINI Velocity User s Manual Configuration Database Code 39 Add 16 If enabled Code 39 will be active for this database index Codabar Add 32 If enabled Codabar will be active for this database index Code 93 Add 64 If
227. gt c Send a lt G gt Read Next Symbol as Master Symbol command d Enable the New Master Pin command and activate the discrete input to store the next symbol read as the master symbol 9 4 Quadrus MINI Velocity User s Manual Matchcode Matchcode Type Definition ESP Serial Cmd Default Options Disabled Enabled Wild Card Sequential Allows the user to choose the way that master symbols will be compared with subsequently read symbols Note First set Triggering Mode to External or Serial Matchcode Matchcode Tyee is blec x Sequential Matching Disabled Match Start Position Enabled Match Length Wild Card Wild Card Sequential Sequence on Noread Enabled Sequence on Mismatch Disabled New Master Pin Disabled Match Replace Disabled Replacement String MATCH Mismatch Replace Disabled Replacement String MISMATCH lt K223 matchcode type sequential matching match start position match length wild card character sequence on No Read sequence on mismatch gt Disabled 0 Disabled 1 Enabled 2 Wild Card 3 Sequential Has no effect on operations Instructs the imager to compare symbols or portions of symbols with the master symbol Allows the user to enter user defined wild card characters in the master symbol Instructs the imager to sequence after each match numeric only and compare symbols or portions of symbols for sequential numbers Note If Mat
228. gt For lt K474h 2C gt See ASCII Character Entry Modifier on page 3 32 for a detailed explanation of how to enter ASCII characters as hex values Application Record Brackets Code 128 EAN 128 Definition If an EAN conforming symbol is decoded and EAN formatting applies this feature places bracket characters around the application identifiers in the formatted output Serial Cmd lt K474 status fixed symbol length status fixed symbol length EAN 128 status output format application record separator status application record separator character application record brackets application record padding gt Default Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Application Record Padding Code 128 EAN 128 Definition This feature causes the imager to pad variable length application fields with leading zeroes This is not done for the last field of a symbol Serial Cmd lt K474 status fixed symbol length status fixed symbol length EAN 128 status output format application record separator status application record separator character application record brackets application record padding gt Default Enabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled 6 14 Quadrus MINI Velocity User s Manual Symbologies BC412 Usage Widely used in semiconductor manufacturing Particularly useful where speed accuracy and ease of printing are required Definition BC412 Binary Code 412 a proprietary IBM symbology since 1988 is an
229. h Outputs In this configuration the EZ Button will unlatch any logic outputs that have been latched Parameter Switch The parameter switch toggles between custom defaults and power on settings The condition is the same as that achieved by sending the lt Arc gt and lt Arp gt commands consecutively Quadrus MINI Velocity User s Manual 7 27 EZ Button Default on Power On Definition When enabled if the EZ Button is held down on power on the imager will default to customer defaults and save for power on This is the same as sending a lt Zrc gt command Serial Cmd lt K770 global status default on power on load configuration database save for power on gt Default Enabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Load Configuration Database Definition Allows the user to load the Configuration Database with calibration results When the user performs a calibration using the EZ Button all the data base entries are moved down one index and the results of the calibration are saved to index 1 The results will be saved as current settings as well Serial Cmd lt K770 global status default on power on load configuration database save for power on gt Default Enabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Save for Power On Definition If enabled after calibration is complete all parameters will be saved for power on Serial Cmd lt K770 global status default on power on load configuration database save for power on gt
230. h as Preamble and Postamble commands can be sent to the imager as hex pairs see Appendix E ASCII Table for conversions Serial Cmd Format lt Knnnh 00 FF gt To enter ASCII fields as hex values 00 to FF add a lower case h directly after the command s K number and then enter the hex value that corresponds with the desired ASCII character Example Consider the Postamble command Serial Cmd lt K142 status postamble character s gt Imagine that your application requires the ASCII character gt to be the postamble in your symbol decode output The ASCII characters lt gt and can only be entered as hex pairs So to make gt the postamble in your symbol decode output enter the Postamble command as follows lt K142h 3E gt Note that the status field contains only a This is because the only field that is being changed is the postamble character s field See Serial Configuration Command Conventions on page A 11 for a more detailed explanation of this command shortcut 3 32 Quadrus MINI Velocity User s Manual Communications Preamble Preamble Status Usage Useful for identifying and controlling incoming data For example defining the preamble as a carriage return and a line feed causes each decoded message to be displayed on its own line Definition Defines a one to four character data string that can be added to the front of the decoded data Serial Cmd lt K141 status oreamble char
231. he Start trigger character and ignores any Stop trigger character that may be defined In External Level the Start trigger character begins the read cycle and the Stop trigger character ends it Note that even after a symbol has been decoded and the symbol data transmitted the imager remains in External Level trigger read cycle until a Stop character is received In Serial Data or External Edge trigger mode either a Start trigger character or a hardware trigger can start an edge trigger read cycle lt K229 start character gt NUL 00 in hex disabled Two hex digits representing any ASCII character except XON and XOFF Important The ASCII characters lt gt and can only be entered as hex pairs For lt lt K229h 3C gt For gt lt K229h 3E gt For lt K229h 2C gt See ASCII Character Entry Modifier on page 3 32 for a detailed explanation of how to enter ASCII characters as hex values Quadrus MINI Velocity User s Manual 5 13 Stop Trigger Character Non Delimited Stop Trigger Character Non Delimited Usage Definition Serial Cmd Default Options Useful in applications where different characters are required to enda read cycle A single ASCII host serial trigger character that ends the read cycle and is not enclosed by delimiters such as lt and gt Non delimited Stop characters can be defined and will function according to the trigger event When defining Stop trigger characters the fol
232. iating Calibration r aaa aara aaa a e R 4 13 Additional Notes about Calibration ecceeceeeeesceeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeneteaes 4 19 Chapter 5 Read Cycle Read Cycle by ESP site oee a Gh eee 5 2 Read Cycle Serial Commands cceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeereeeeeeeaeeeaeessaeeeeeeneetaas 5 3 Read Cycl Set p civic rea oe eee ae ede ee 5 4 M ltiSy mboh pne e aaa iia 5 5 Trigger Mode and Filter Duration ees eeeseeeeseeeeeeneeeeseeeesaeeeeeneeeseeeees 5 6 External Trigger Polarity ooooocconncncnonocccnnnccnnncnnononononnrn no nnnn cnn nrnnnnnn rca nos 5 11 Serial TIO ici laa libal 5 12 Start Trigger Character Non Delimited oooncocniccnnicinccnnccnnccnnocccancconnno 5 13 Stop Trigger Character Non Delimited oonoocnccnnininninnccnconnccncccnncns 5 14 End of Read Cycle sting vias sche rata 5 15 Capture Mode sicc cd cena aie ee eatin ua dena ee 5 17 Capture Timing ie et EEE 5 22 Image Processing TiMCOUL cc eeeseeeeeneeeeeneeeseneeeteeeeeeaeerenaeeeeneeeeees 5 24 Image Sora taa ati ee ae ee 5 25 Minimum Good Reads cccceececeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeseaeeeeesseeeeeeeseeeeeaees 5 27 Compare Mode cia ti eA eee 5 28 Setting Up the Imager for EZ Trax eeecceeceeeseeeeeeeteeeeeeeeeeeneeseeeeneeeaees 5 29 Chapter 6 Symbologies Symbologies by ESP E E A E 6 2 Symbologies Serial COMMANAS ecceeceeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteaeess 6 3 Data Matus a a eA ra Sai iae MARERA REE 6 4 Aztec Coden ana ea a a
233. ice must not be co located or operate in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user s authority to operate the equipment CE The Quadrus MINI Velocity has been tested for compliance with CE Conformit Europ enne standards and guidelines and has been found to conform to applicable CE standards specifically the EMC requirements EN 55024 1998 A1 2001 A2 2003 ESD EN 61000 4 2 Radiated RF Immunity EN 61000 4 3 ENV 50204 EFT EN 61000 4 4 Conducted RF Immunity EN 61000 4 6 EN 55022 1998 A1 2000 A2 2003 for Class A products Class B Radiated Emissions and Class B Conducted Emissions The Quadrus MINI Velocity has been tested by an independent electromagnetic compatibility laboratory in accordance with the applicable specifications and instructions Quadrus MINI Velocity User s Manual xi Statement of Agency Compliance xii Quadrus MINI Velocity User s Manual E 7 Quick Start Contents Step 1 Check Required Hardware ccccccccsscecesceeseneeeeeeeeeceneeeseaeeecnanececcaeesseneeseseeeeseueeessnasetsaes 1 2 Step 2 Comnectihe Systemi inician t 1 3 Step 3 Position Imager and SyMDOl oonconiccninccnnncnccnnoconocnnonccnncnnanccn cnn ancora 1 4 Step 4 Install ESP oia la ideal 1 5 Step 5 Select Model 5 05 cccnbe cise ei eb elo dt 1 6 Step 6 Select Protocol and CONMECE ccccccccesceeeeneeeeenee
234. idrop with switched transmitter lt K143 40 gt 40 ms Response Timeout ACK NAK Main Port lt K100 9 0 1 1 gt Baud Rate 230K Parity None Stop Bits 2 Data Bits 8 lt K140 4 gt ACK NAK lt K147 01 1B 2E 1F gt Default RES and REQ 00 disabled STX 0x01 ETX 0x1B ACK 0x2E NAK 0x1F lt K102 1 gt RS 422 enabled lt K102 0 gt RS 232 enabled lt K143 50 gt 50 ms Response Timeout Auxiliary Port Listed below are several examples of Auxiliary Port commands lt K101 2 4 0 1 1 gt Half Duplex Baud Rate 9600 Parity None Stop Bits 2 Data Bits 8 lt K101 1 5 0 1 1 gt Transparent Baud Rate 19 2K Parity None Stop Bits 2 Data Bits 8 lt K101 3 7 0 1 1 gt Full Duplex Baud Rate 57 6K Parity None Stop Bits 2 Data Bits 8 lt K101 5 6 0 1 1 gt Command Processing Baud Rate 230K Parity None Stop Bits 2 Data Bits 8 3 22 Quadrus MINI Velocity User s Manual Communications USB HID Interface The USB version of the Quadrus MINI Velocity operates as an HID Human Interface Device on the USB bus HID class devices communicate via report packets An HID may support multiple report types each of which is identified with a unique report ID The Quadrus MINI Velocity supports two different report types Microscan HID Report ID 1 Keyboard Report ID 2 The imager always outputs the same data for both report types The user may enable or disable either report type Regardless of the r
235. ields then commas alone can be entered in these fields For example if only the last field in the following command is changing lt K100 4 7 0 0 gt can be entered as lt K100 0 gt All fields following a modified field can be omitted For example to change Baud Rate only send lt K100 3 gt Quadrus MINI Velocity User s Manual A 11 Serial Configuration Commands Concatenating Configuration Commands Commands can be concatenated added together in a single string or data block For example lt K145 1 gt lt K220 1 gt lt K450 1 gt lt A gt enables LRC sets End of Read Cycle mode to New Trigger enables Narrow Margins and resets the data buffers without saving the changes for power on Serial Command Status Request To ensure that any command was received and accepted you can send the Show Reader Status command lt gt The status of a specific serial command can be requested by entering the command followed by a question mark For example send lt K142 gt to request the status of Postamble Entering Control Characters in Serial Commands To enter control characters within a serial command hold down the Ctrl key while typing the desired character Example To enter a carriage return and line feed 4M4J enter lt K141 1 CNTL m CNTL j gt A 12 Quadrus MINI Velocity User s Manual Appendices Appendix D Communications Protocol Communications Protocol Command Table
236. ientation left to right or OHOHOHOH left orientation right to left since both H and A are rotationally symmetrical HOHOHOHO Important If the orientation cannot be determined from the OCR text as is the case with the string shown above and the orientation parameter is not set properly then incorrect OCR results may be produced If misreads are not acceptable and there is no guarantee of the orientation of OCR text then setting the option to none will suppress answers where orientation cannot be determined Serial Cmd lt K461 sitatus active template orientation single row background uncertain characters strip checksum special character passport checksum gt Default Right left to right Options 0 Up bottom to top 1 Down top to bottom 2 Left right to left 3 Right left to right 4 None Up Bottom to Top Up Text normally flows from the bottom to the top of the image Down Top to Bottom Down Text normally flows from the top to the bottom of the image Left Right to Left Left Text normally flows right to left in the image Right Left to Right Right Text normally flows left to right in the image None None No results issued for rotationally ambiguous text 6 42 Quadrus MINI Velocity User s Manual Symbologies Single Row Definition Single Row specifies that the area above and below the OCR string will not examined Other text can be above or
237. ientation Mode Bad No Symbol Output Symbol Size Mode Bar Code Configuration Bar Code Configuration Mode Bar Code Dialog Bar Code Options Bar Width Status Pharmacode Baud Rate Baud Rate Auxiliary Port Baud Rate Host Port BC412 BC412 Add 2048 Beeper Beeper Green Flash Before During Calibration Begin Transmission Black Background Blooming Both Standard Mode and Q Mode Both Supplemental Types 2 Quadrus MINI Velocity User s Manual c C Calibrate Calibrate by ESP Calibrate by EZ Button Calibrate by Serial Command Calibration Calibration by ESP Calibration Options Calibration Overview Calibration Progress Indicators Calibration Progress Output Examples Terminal Calibration Progress Output to Terminal Calibration Serial Commands Camera and IP Setup Camera and IP Setup by ESP Camera and IP Setup Serial Commands Camera Features Camera Settings Capture Capture and Decode Capture Mode Capture Text Capture Time Capture Timing CCD CE Mark Change Background Color Change Echo Font Change Font Change Keyboard Macros Charge Coupled Device Check Character Check Character Output BC412 Check Character Output Codabar Check Character Output Status Code 39 Check Character Output Status Interleaved 2 of 5 Check Character Status Code 39 Check Character Status Interleaved 2 of 5 Check Character Type Codabar Check Required Hardware Cleaning the Imager Clear CM
238. ile format the resolution of the image will be determined by the setting in the JPEG Quality field Serial Cmd lt K739 image output mode communication port file format JPEG quality gt Default JPEG Options 0 Bitmap 1 JPEG 2 Binary JPEG Quality Definition This setting determines the quality of JPEG image compression The user may select a value from 1 lowest to 100 highest Serial Cmd lt K739 image output mode communication port file format JPEG quality gt Default 90 Options 1 to 100 percent Quadrus MINI Velocity User s Manual 7 49 Image Output Image Output Example The following example assumes that the imager is set to output on No Read and that it is in a rapid capture mode of 3 captures Number of Symbols Frame 1 Frame 2 Frame 3 Read Cycle Result Output Frame Number of Symbols Frame 1 Frame 2 Frame 3 Read Cycle Result Output Frame Number of Symbols Frame 1 Frame 2 Frame 3 Read Cycle Result Output Frame 7 50 y No Read No Read No Read No Read Frame 1 y No Read No Read Good Read Good Read None 2 No Read No Read Good Read Symbol 1 No Read Frame 1 Quadrus MINI Velocity User s Manual I O Parameters Database Identifier Output Usage Useful in keeping track of which database entries read which symbols Serial Cmd lt K759 status separator gt Default 0 Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Output
239. iled to decode For example in the following output No Read d_1 E_2 d and E are symbology i d s for Data Matrix and UPC respectively The message means that Data Matrix and UPC are enabled and other symbologies are not and that both failed to decode The reason for the failing Data Matrix is 1 and the reason for the failing UPC is 2 The first part of these numbers preceding the dot is the relevant number and is interpreted here ed Symbols Failed to locate symbol no finder pattern 5 Failed to locate four corners or failed to qualify user defined dimensions in pixels 3 een 3 locate clock patterns or failed to qualify user defined orientation 0 359 egree 4 Failed to validate clock patterns or failed to qualify user defined symbol size clock element count 5 Failed to decode symbol Quadrus MINI Velocity User s Manual 7 7 No Read Message Linear 1D Symbols 7 8 1 2 3 o A Failed user defined minimum number of bars Failed to decode start stop character does not apply to UPC GS1 DataBar RSS MicroPDF417 or Pharmacode Failed user defined minimum number of scan lines that qualify for the minimum number of bars Failed to decode Failed to decode UPC supplemental Quadrus MINI Velocity User s Manual I O Parameters No Read Message Definition Any combination of ASCII characters can be defined as the No Read message Serial Cmd lt K714 No Read message status N
240. in area This is done to accelerate the calibration process When a successful calibration process is completed the camera WOI will be adjusted according to the mode enabled Otherwise the original WOI configuration will be retained Serial Cmd lt K529 gain shutter speed focus position symbol type WOI framing WO margin line scan height processing gt Default Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Row and Column 2 Row 3 Column 4 Straight Line 5 Straight Line Framed E Configured WOI Starting WOI After Decode Calibration Passed Calibration Failed If WOI framing is not enabled the current WOI configuration will be used until a symbol has been decoded After a symbol is decoded the WOI is framed exactly as it would be if a WOI framing mode was enabled When the calibration process is complete the original WOI configuration is restored Refer to the diagram below Configured WOI After Decode Calibration Passed Calibration Failed Quadrus MINI Velocity User s Manual 4 7 Calibration Options Disabled When this feature is disabled the Window of Interest is not modified after the calibration process is complete Row and Column If the calibration process is successful the Window of Interest will be modified to frame the symbol as well as an additional margin area around the symbol determined by the WOI Margin parameter Refer to the diagram below Column If the calibration process is successful the
241. inal Depending upon how the calibration options are configured the calibration process can have up to 5 steps Quick Focus Search Pass Focus Pass Medium Pass Fine Tune Pass Calibration data is shown in a simple table format under 8 category headings each of which are defined below Heading Definition Prog Progress indicator with a range of 0 100 Indicates percent complete Rating Rating indicator higher ratings are more favorable Decode Number of successful decodes for the pass Quality Quality indicator higher ratings are more favorable Focus Focus position under operation Shutter Shutter setting under operation Gain Gain setting under operation Locate Time required to locate symbol expressed in milliseconds Calibration Progress Output Examples Terminal Quick Focus This mode is only run if Quick Focus calibration mode is enabled see Focus Position on page 4 5 Quick Focus calibration mode is designed to quickly locate the focus setting for an object at the center of the imager s field of view There is no terminal output for this operation Search Pass The purpose of Search Pass is to decode a symbol in as few configurations as possible during calibration This process is designed to quickly identify symbology type and any image processing parameters that are already calibrated as well as determining focus position Running Search Pass Prog Rating Decode Quality
242. ined so that only 1 pixel is output for every 16 pixels sampled An image with the dimensions 640 x 480 will be scaled to 160 x 120 Since the resolution of the output image is reduced the frame rate will increase but not by the factor of the image reduction This is due to the overhead time of digital pixel data processing and minimum row time requirements of the image sensor Quadrus MINI Velocity User s Manual 10 15 Camera Features AEC AGC Mode Definition AEC AGC Mode Automatic Exposure Conirol Automatic Gain Control Mode maintains optimal self adjusting exposure and gain settings This ensures that acquired images fall in a desirable region of the camera s sensitivity range for optimal image luminance Usage lt K542 pixel binning AEC AGC mode AEC AGC brightness gt Default Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 AEC 2 AGC 3 AEC AGC AEC AEC enables Automatic Exposure Control In this mode the optimal setting for exposure shutter is computed and updated for every frame It may take several frames to adjust the shutter value to the correct setting The current camera shutter parameter is updated at the end of the read cycle see Camera Settings Note The minimum slowest shutter setting will not exceed the frame read out time of the current image dimension For example a full size image 752 x 480 has a minimum frame read out time of 15 ms Therefore the slowest shutter that can be achieved is 15 ms or 1 67 AG
243. ings wor ROIs Processing Settings select how many database indexes will be used during the read cycle 0 to 10 Curent 7000 o joo Disa fO 0 feo faz Co i CA E CN E EC EA E E E E E O E E 2 3 4 5 6 moo feo foo fosa 0 fo feo rea 7 8 3 a fAdapti 128 Stand Disabl White Disabled Test Adapti 128 Stand Disabl White Disabled Test Adapti 128 Stand Disabl White Disabled Test Adapti 128 Stand Disabl White Disabled Test Adapti 128 Stand Disabl White Disabled Test IZ Capture for Every Index I Show Database Index in Output I Sort Index Positions on Good Reads lt j Calibrate Receive Settings SendSettings Load CunentTolndex Load Index To Curent nooo fo poo Disa fO 0 a0 752 1000 fo 400 Disa fO 0 laso 752 noo po poo Dra fo fo peo fs2 C 10 fiooo 20 a00 Disa fO 0 a80 752 Sort Index Positions on Good Reads moves the database entry that produces the first successful decode to the top of the list Quadrus MINI Velocity User s Manual 11 3 Configuration Database Status Configuration Database Status Index Usage Useful for applications that require several different complex imager configurations to be applied sequentially Multiple database indexes allow you to concatenate configuration profiles and to perform more complex operations than wou
244. ion ACK NAK Main Port ACK NAK Data Flow Examples ACK NAK Options ACK NAK Active Illumination Active Template ADC Add Remove Exception Add Macro Additional Notes about Calibration Advanced Options AEC AEC AGC Brightness AEC AGC Mode After Calibration AGC All Descriptor Status Request All Range Status Request All Status Request Always Ask Before Auto Sync Occurs Always OFF Target Pattern Always ON Target Pattern Ambient Light Analog Analog to Digital Converter Any Symbology Add 1 Appendices Application Mode Application Record Brackets Code 128 EAN 128 Application Record Padding Code 128 EAN 128 Application Record Separator Character Code 128 EAN 128 Application Record Separator Status Code 128 EAN 128 Application Specific Integrated Circuit Architecture ASCII Character Entry Modifier Quadrus MINI Velocity User s Manual B ASCII Table ASIC Ask to Save ESP File when Quitting Aspect Ratio Australia Post Australia Post Allow 0 FCC Auto FLM Auto Sync Autoconnect Automatic Gain Control Auxiliary Port Auxiliary Port Connections Auxiliary Port Mode Auxiliary Port System Data Status Axial Non Uniformity Data Matrix Only Axial Non Uniformity Threshold Aztec Code Aztec Code Add 131072 B Background Color Background Color Configuration Database Bad Symbol Bad Symbol Message Bad No Symbol Output Dimension Mode Bad No Symbol Output Or
245. ion to process first based on Window of Interest dimensions For example if the WOI height is greater than its width the imager attempts to read vertically first and if there is no decode then it attempts to read horizontally Horizontal This setting forces the imager to read horizontally Vertical This setting forces the imager to read vertically 10 26 Quadrus MINI Velocity User s Manual Camera and IP Setup Hollow Mode Usage Used to determine which kind of Data Matrix elements will be processed Definition When set to Regular Elements the imager will decode Data Matrix symbols with solid elements but will not decode Data Matrix symbols with hollow elements When set to Hollow Elements the imager will decode Data Matrix symbols with outlined hollow elements but will not decode Data Matrix symbols with solid elements Serial Cmd lt K517 hollow mode status gt Default Regular Elements Options 0 Regular Elements 1 Hollow Elements Note Hollow Mode is not supported when Q Mode is enabled The image below is an example of a Data Matrix symbol with hollow elements Quadrus MINI Velocity User s Manual 10 27 Mirrored Image Mirrored Image Usage Enable this setting when the imager is viewing a mirrored image as when it is being used with a right angle mirror attachment Definition When enabled outputs a mirrored image of the symbol Serial Cmd lt K514 mirrored image gt Default Both auto de
246. ite Disabled Test F Sort Index Positions Good Reads Load Index To Current IV Capture for Every Index F Show Database Index in Output Calibrate Receive Settings Send Settings Load Current To Index Threshold Mode Fixed Threshold Value Processing Mode Narrow Margins Background and Symbol Type are all Processing Settings values Quadrus MINI Velocity User s Manual 11 15 Save Current Settings to Configuration Database Save Current Settings to Configuration Database Definition Allows current active configuration settings to be saved to a selected database index Serial Cmd lt K255 index gt Example lt K255 5 gt This command phrase saves the imager s current active configuration settings to database index 5 Save Current Settings to Configuration Database by ESP Video Evaluation Calibration WO Configuration Database Dynamic Setup Attell 5 y M Auto Sync Database settings with Reader Advanced Options lt lt WOl ROI gt gt Capture Settings Processing Settings Curent foo o 400 east Da C C 10 40 a El ca fiooo fo faoo Disa fO fo aso Adapti 128 Stand Disabl white Disabled Test coa fiooo f20 400 Disa fO jo faso fz52 Adapti i28 Stand Disabl fwhite Disabled Test 10 food BO foo pra pa a fra fr Bind Peas fwrite Disabled Test IV Capture for Every Index I Show Database Index in Output I Sor
247. ite symbologies q m Cancel Save ECC 200 Code 39 V Composite Enabled lt a Window of Interest WOI Framing D isabled y Cancels tho WOlMagin 75 Pan Linescan Height 64 Focus Shutter Gain and Image Quality values are all tracked in real time during the calibration process gt Gai 32 a oa Medium v m Shutter Speed 250 v Determines the amount of time and effort the imager will spend attempting to decode a symbol for each parameter configuration Low Medium High Definable Initiates the calibration routine The Window of Interest section of the Calibration interface allows the user to make precise adjustments to WOI Framing WOI Margin in pixels and the scan height of the straight line image in pixels Quadrus MINI Velocity User s Manual 4 11 Calibration by ESP After Calibration Notice the improved image resolution after the calibration process is complete Before After 240 250 Focus Shutter Gain The Focus Shutter Gain and Quality indicator bars remain stationary at the end of calibration to provide a visual reference for the final values of these 38 8792 four parameters Quality Capture Settings Gain 38 Shutter Speed 250 Focal Distance Quick Focus
248. ithin a single connector Processing Time The time used by a vision system to receive analyze and interpret image information Often expressed in parts per minute Programmable Logic Controller PLC An electronic device used in industrial automation environments such as factory assembly lines and automotive manufacturing facilities Progressive Scan A non interlaced scan that doubles the number of visible picture lines per field by displaying all picture lines at once Protocol The rules for communication between devices providing a means to control the orderly flow of information between linked devices RAM See Random Access Memory Random Access Memory RAM A data storage system used in computers composed of integrated circuits that allow access to stored data in any sequence without movement of physical parts Read Cycle A programmed period of time or condition during which a reader will accept symbol input Read Only Memory ROM A data storage medium used in computers and other electronics primarily used to distribute Firmware Real Time Processing In machine vision the ability of a system to perform a complete analysis and take action on one part before the next one arrives for inspection Reader Quadrus MINI Velocity User s Manual A 33 Glossary of Terms Region Area of an image Also called a region of interest for image processing operations ROM See Read Only M
249. l 1 3 Position Imager and Symbol Step 3 Position Imager and Symbol e Position the imager at a focal distance between 2 and 6 inches from the symbol Tip the imager relative to the symbol to avoid the glare of direct specular reflection The case parting line should be perpendicular to the plane of the symbol by either pitching the symbol or the imager as shown e Position the imager in a place with as little ambient light as possible e Symbols can be rotated tilted at any angle however for best results symbols should be aligned with the FOV field of view Parting Line Stand LY Focal distance Imager and Symbol Orientation e Inthe case of linear symbols aligning the bars in the direction of their movement ladder orientation will minimize the chances of blurring and will produce better reads Important Avoid excessive skew or pitch Maximum skew is 30 maximum pitch is 30 The illustration below shows skew axis pitch axis and tilt axis Skew lt lt lt Symbol mu a i A Pitch Reader Note For accuracy of testing and performance Microscan recommends using a mounting arm adapter kit Contact your Microscan sales manager for details about mounting arm adapter kits and other accessories 1 4 Quadrus MINI Velocity User s Manual Quick Start Step 4 Install ESP Easy Setup Program ESP is Microscan s proprietary setup and testing application
250. l Cmd Options Length Definition Serial Cmd Output Index refers to the database entry you wish to modify with this command A formatted output is built by extracting data from a symbol s original data output and or inserting user defined characters It may be helpful to think of individual indexes as positions in the final formatted output you wish to build Starting with index 1 enter either an extract or insert command to begin building your desired output string Then with the next index number enter either an extract or insert command to continue building the output string Continue this process until you are finished building the string lt K741 output index length hex string gt 1 to 100 Specifies the length of the user defined character string that will be inserted This function is limited to 4 characters per output index so multiple indexes must be entered in order to insert longer character sequences For example if you wish to insert a 10 character sequence in user defined output you would need three commands with consecutive index numbers where the first two character sequence lengths were 4 and the third was 2 lt K741 output index length hex string gt Default 0 disabled end of format cell array Options 1 to 4 Hex String Definition Specifies a character string that represents ASCII characters to be inserted in the database entry Two hex characters are required for every ASCII character to b
251. l in applications that require several different imager configurations to be applied sequentially and it allows the user to perform far more complex operations than would be possible with only one set of configuration parameters See Chapter 11 Configuration Database for full documentation of this feature Video Evaluation Calibration WO Configuration Database Dynamic Setup Active Indexes 5 v Auto Sync Database settings with Reader Advanced Options Capture Settings lt lt WOl ROL gt gt Processing Settings IV Capture for Every Index I Show Database Index in Output I Sort Index Positions on Good Reads Calibrate Receive Settings Send Settings Load Current To Index Load Index To Current Configuration Database view set for 5 Active Indexes with Capture Settings highlighted Quadrus MINI Velocity User s Manual 10 13 Dynamic Setup Dynamic Setup Dynamic Setup is used to calculate image capture timing during a read cycle Without proper timing the imager will not be able to decode all symbols in a read cycle An external trigger is used to activate image captures so the user can make timing adjustments as capture events occur Video Evaluation Calibration WOI Configuration Database Dynamic Setup 100 Read Rate is represented graphically in lt j real time as the user makes adjustments to the time delay between image captures The
252. lash duration gt Default 100 1 second Options 0 to 65535 in 10 ms increments 7 22 Quadrus MINI Velocity User s Manual I O Parameters Beeper Usage An audible verification that either a good read or a No Read has occurred Definition A beep is emitted after each good read or No Read Serial Cmd lt K702 beeper status gt Default Good Read Options 0 Disabled 1 Good Read 2 No Read Note The beeper will also sound at any of the following times When the imager is defaulted e When a send save command is sent from ESP At the conclusion of a calibration procedure e When a lt Z gt lt Zp gt lt Zrd gt or lt K701 1 gt command is sent Quadrus MINI Velocity User s Manual 7 23 LED Configuration LED Configuration Usage Useful as a visible indicator of read rates and symbol quality Definition Determines the mode in which the status LEDs operate Serial Cmd lt K737 LED mode ISO IEC 16022 grade gt Default Standard Options 0 Standard 1 ISO IEC 16022 grade In ISO IEC 16022 grade mode the LEDs represent the grade of the first Data Matrix symbol decoded in the read cycle The parameter to be graded is set in the ISO IEC 16022 Grade options For example to program the LEDs to indicate the ISO IEC 16022 print growth grade set LED Mode to ISO IEC 16022 Grade and set ISO IEC 16022 Grade to Print Growth If all the LEDs from 20 to 100 are illuminated the read result is a grade A if only the 20
253. ld be possible with only one set of configuration parameters Definition Determines the specific database index that will be used Serial Cmd lt K255 index shutter speed gain focal distance pixel binning row pointer column pointer row depth column width threshold mode fixed threshold value processing mode narrow margins background color symbology gt Options 1to 10 Shutter Speed Serial Cmd lt K255 index shutter speed gain focal distance pixel binning row pointer column pointer row depth column wiath threshold mode fixed threshold value processing mode narrow margins background color symbology gt Default 250 Options 15 to 20 000 Gain Serial Cmd lt K255 index shutter speed gain focal distance pixel binning row pointer column pointer row depth column wiath threshold mode fixed threshold value processing mode narrow margins background color symbology gt Default 20 Options 0 to 33 Focal Distance Serial Cmd lt K255 index shutter speed gain focal distance pixel binning row pointer column pointer row depth column wiath threshold mode fixed threshold value processing mode narrow margins background color symbology gt Default 400 4 Options 200 to 600 Standard Density 200 to 600 Ultra High Density 11 4 Quadrus MINI Velocity User s Manual Configuration Database Pixel Binning Serial Cmd lt K255 index shutter speed gain focal distance pixel binning row pointer column point
254. learn the imager s current configuration Sending this request will return the current settings of all commands starting with the lowest K command value and ending with the highest K command value lt K gt All Descriptor Status Request This request will return all current descriptors for every K command starting with the lowest K command value and ending with the highest K command value lt K gt All Range Status Request This request will return the current settings of all commands within the user defined range starting with the lowest user defined K command value and ending with the highest user defined K command value 13 20 Quadrus MINI Velocity User s Manual Utilities lt Knnn gt Single Status Request This request will return the value of the variables associated with the requested K command The request of a single entry of a database command cannot exceed the number of database slots for the specific command lt Knnn gt Single Descriptor Status Request This request returns the basic functional description of all fields in the requested K command lt Knnn gt Single Range Status Request This request will return the value range and storage type description of all fields in the requested K command lt Knnn gt Display Command Wildcard This request will return the individual K command status description and range for each parameter Quadrus MINI Velocity User s Manual 13 21 Other Ope
255. led highly reflective surfaces Digital to Analog Converter DAC A VLSI circuit used to convert digitally processed images to analog for display on a monitor Digital Imaging Conversion of an image into pixels by means of an Analog to Digital Converter where the level of each pixel can be stored digitally Digital Signal Processor DSP A VLSI chip designed for ultra high speed arithmetic processing Often imbedded in a vision engine Discrete I O Inputs and outputs characterized by discrete signal transitions from one voltage level to another so that digital switching can occur Direct Memory Access DMA A capability provided by some computer bus architectures that allows data to be sent directly to memory from an attached device DMA See Direct Memory Access DSP See Digital Signal Processor Dynamic Range The difference between the minimum and maximum thresholds of discernible images the amount of usable signal A 30 Quadrus MINI Velocity User s Manual Appendices Edge Enhancement Image processing method to strengthen high spatial frequencies in the image EPROM See Erasable Programmable Read Only Memory Embedded Memory Onboard memory device such as EPROM or flash End of Read Cycle The time or condition at which the imager stops expecting symbol information to decode Erasable Programmable Read Only Memory EPROM A memory chip that retains data when its power supp
256. llows reading by both linear and 2D readers Definition Combines 2D and linear width modulated symbology on the same symbol where different messages can be read by each reader type Serial Cmd lt K453 mode separator status separator gt Default Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled 2 Required Enabled If Composite is set to Enabled the imager will decode both the 2D composite and linear components However if the 2D composite component is not decoded the linear data will be sent by itself at the end of the read cycle Required If set to Required the imager must decode both components or a No Read will occur Separator Status Composite Usage Allows the user to distinguish between the main and Supplemental symbols Definition Separates the linear and the composite component Serial Cmd lt K453 mode separator status separator gt Default Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Separator Character Composite The Separator Character will be the same as the character defined in the Multisymbol Separator field of the lt K222 gt command Usage As required by the application Definition Allows the user to change the separator character from a comma to a new character Serial Cmd lt K453 mode separator status separator gt Default comma Options Any ASCII character Important The ASCII characters lt gt and can only be entered as hex pairs For lt lt K453h 3C gt For gt l
257. locity The calibration process can be initiated by serial command EZ Button or ESP user interface When the imager enters calibration it runs through an optimization cycle that sets the ideal parameters for reading symbols at the highest possible level of performance Calibration can be configured to optimize specific parameters such as focus gain shutter speed and symbol type The calibration process consists of five separate phases quick focus search pass focus pass medium pass and fine tune pass During this process the imager quickly locates configuration setup defines a calibration range for the configuration parameters and then tunes those parameters for optimal performance 4 2 Quadrus MINI Velocity User s Manual Calibration Calibration Options This command specifies the operation of the imager s calibration feature The default configuration is set up to perform calibration on gain focus and symbol type The default shutter speed setting is disabled because not all applications require shutter speed and when it is required the application specific settings tend to vary widely Note Background Color page 6 51 is part of the calibration process regardless of the calibration setup After successful completion of the calibration routine the background color will be set to the appropriate value depending on the symbol in the field of view The Mirrored Image parameter page 10 28 is not part of the calibration p
258. lowing rules apply In External Edge the imager looks only for the Start trigger character and ignores any Stop trigger character that may be defined In External Level the Start trigger character begins the read cycle and the Stop trigger character ends it Note that even after a symbol has been decoded and the symbol data transmitted the imager remains in External Level trigger read cycle until a Stop character is received In Serial Data or External Edge trigger mode either a Start trigger character or a hardware trigger can start an edge trigger read cycle lt K230 stop character gt NUL 00 in hex disabled Two hex digits representing an ASCII character Important The ASCII characters lt gt and can only be entered as hex pairs For lt lt K230h 3C gt For gt lt K230h 3E gt For lt K230h 2C gt See ASCII Character Entry Modifier on page 3 32 for a detailed explanation of how to enter ASCII characters as hex values 5 14 Quadrus MINI Velocity User s Manual Read Cycle End of Read Cycle Definition The read cycle is the time during which the imager will attempt to capture and decode a symbol A read cycle can be ended by a timeout a new trigger or by the last frame in a capture sequence or a combination of the above End of Read Cycle Mode Note When operating in Continuous Read or Continuous Read 1 Output the imager is always in the read cycle Serial Cmd Default Options
259. lt K407 hours minutes gt Default 16 bit counter 0 to 65535 Hours uses a 16 bit counter that increments every 60 minutes Minutes Serial Cmd lt K407 hours minutes gt Default 16 bit counter 0 to 60 Minutes uses a 16 bit counter that increments every 60 seconds Note Time counts are reset at power on but not with an lt A gt or lt Z gt command Quadrus MINI Velocity User s Manual 7 45 Service Message Service Message When Service Message is enabled a message of up to 10 ASCII characters is sent whenever the system detects that the service timer s limit has been reached The service timer is reset at power on meaning that the service timer s limit is the amount of time since last reset Service timer increments can be set in seconds or minutes Serial Cmd lt K409 status service message threshold resolution gt Default 0 Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Service Message Serial Cmd lt K409 status service message threshold resolution gt Default SERVICE Options An ASCII string between 1 and 10 characters Important The ASCII characters lt gt and can only be entered as hex pairs For lt lt K409h 3C gt For gt lt K409h 3E gt For lt K409h 2C gt See ASCII Character Entry Modifier on page 3 32 for a detailed explanation of how to enter ASCII characters as hex values Threshold Serial Cmd lt K409 status service message threshold resolution gt Default 300 5 minutes
260. ly is turned off non volatile memory External Edge Allows a read cycle to be initiated by a trigger signal from an object detector when it detects the appearance of an object rising edge The read cycle ends with a good read a timeout or a new trigger External Level Allows a read cycle to be initiated by a trigger signal from an object detector The read cycle ends when the object moves out of the detector s range Falling Edge A change of state to inactive associated with a level trigger Field Programmable Gate Array FPGA A semiconductor device containing programmable interconnects and logic components Fill Factor Percentage of pixel area used for light collection Firmware Software hard coded in non volatile memory ROM and closely tied to specific pieces of hardware Fixed Symbol Length Increases data integrity by ensuring that only one symbol length will be accepted Focal Distance In camera based vision the distance from the front of the camera to the object being viewed In optics the distance from the lens to the focal plane Focal Plane Usually found at the image sensor it is a plane perpendicular to the lens axis at the point of focus Focus Any given point in an image at which light converges the focal point FPGA See Field Programmable Gate Array Frame The total area captured in an image sensor while the video signal is not blanked Frame G
261. mbologies For Code 128 a 1 indicates EAN 128 otherwise the modifier is 0 For QR Code and Micro QR Code a 0 indicates QR Code a 1 indicates Micro QR Code e For Postal Symbologies a 0 indicates POSTNET a 1 indicates Japan Post a 2 indicates Australia Post a 3 indicates PLANET a 4 indicates Royal Mail a 5 indicates KIX a 6 indicates UPU 56 bar a 7 indicates UPU 75 bar and an 8 indicates USPS4CB Example JY0 indicates a POSTNET symbol e For non bar codes OCR for example a range of 3 F may be assigned by the manufacturer For all other symbologies the modifier is 0 6 50 Quadrus MINI Velocity User s Manual Symbologies Background Color Usage Symbol backgrounds are often White or other very light colors If the background is darker than the symbol Black background should be enabled Note When Q Mode is enabled Black background is only supported for Aztec Code Data Matrix QR Code and Micro QR Code Definition Allows the user to specify the symbol background used in the application SerialCmd lt K451 background color gt Default Both Options 0 White 1 Black 2 Both White When White background is enabled the bars of linear symbols and the elements of 2D symbols are recognized as dark on a light background Black When Black background is enabled the bars of linear symbols and the elements of 2D symbols are recognized as light on a dark background Both When Both is enabled the ima
262. mbols read For example a primary and two secondary readers have Number of Symbols set to 3 and Multisymbol Separator defined as If the primary and the first secondary reader do not find symbols but the next secondary reader registers a Good Read the transmitted results would be symbol data No Read No Read a The above example assumes a best case scenario Other factors such as baud rate number of characters in a given symbol and the number of secondary readers in the daisy chain can affect timing and may need to be included in your calculations for complete accuracy Quadrus MINI Velocity User s Manual 3 15 Auxiliary Port Connections Command Processing Mode Usage Definition Serial Cmd Options 3 16 Allows a user to send configuration settings from the host port to the auxiliary port When enabled Command Processing Mode allows commands to be entered via the auxiliary port and direct externally triggered read cycle data in one of two ways e Symbol data including the serial trigger if used will be transmitted to the last port from which a command was sent e If the last command came from the host port then externally triggered read cycle data will only be output to the host port lt K101 aux port mode baud rate parity stop bits data bits daisy chain i d status daisy chain i d gt 5 Command Processing Quadrus MINI Velocity User s Manual Communications Daisy Chain ID Status Usage
263. mm port image mode image format JPEG quality object info output grade output gt Default Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Grade Output Definition Symbol quality information will be output in the form of an abbreviated identifier for each read cycle Serial Cmd lt K757 comm pon image mode image format JPEG quality object info output grade output gt Default Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled 7 58 Quadrus MINI Velocity User s Manual E 8 Symbol Quality Contents Symbol Quality Serial COMMANAS ooonocinccnicccnonicocononcconnncanncono cnn cnn cnn ran ccnn narran nn nn 8 2 Overview of Symbol Quality oooonoocconnconncicnccnncccnncnnncnconcnnnnnnnn corno cnn ieie e iiis 8 3 symbol Quality by ESP Cia a A eee 8 4 Symbol Quality Separator Data Matrix Output MOde eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeaeeeeeeseaeeeeeeeeaees 8 8 ISO IEC 16022 Symbol Quality OUtpPUt oooonncccooccnonnconcnoncnononnoonnoonnnonononnncon cnn nncnnn nar nnanenannninos 8 10 ISO IEC 16022 Symbol Quality Output by ESP ooooocncccnnccnocinonccnnccnannnnnnccnnanoncnnnnccnnn conc ncnnccrn nn 8 12 Microscan Symbol Quality Output oooooncccnocococccoccnonnononononnconnnonononnnnnnnncnnnnnnnnnann nan n nro nn nano nnnnncnnnos 8 13 Microscan Symbol Quality Output by ESP ooo cece ceeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeaeesaeeeaeesseeenaeeeeeeeeaees 8 16 This section describes parameters that when enabled will output detailed symbol quality
264. mum good reads gt Multisymbol lt K222 number of symbols multisymbol separator gt Start Trigger Character lt K229 start character gt Stop Trigger Character lt K230 stop character gt Compare Mode lt K233 status gt Capture Mode lt K241 capture mode number of captures rapid capture mode pre processing gt Capture Timing lt K242 time before first capture time between first and second captures time between seventh and eighth captures gt Image Storage lt K244 image storage type image store mode gt IP Timeout Symbologies lt K245 image processing timeout gt Narrow Margins Symbology ID lt K450 narrow margin status symbology identifier status gt Background Color lt K451 background color gt Composite A 6 lt K453 symbology status separator status separator gt Quadrus MINI Velocity User s Manual Aztec Code Appendices lt K458 status gt Micro QR Code lt K459 status gt Postal Symbologies SN postal symbology type POSTNET status PLANET status Yar SA a ae POSTNET allow B and B fields Australia Post allow gt OCR lt K461 status active template orientation single row background uncertain characters checksum special character passport checksum gt OCR User Template lt K462 ength template string gt Code 39 lt K470 status check character status check character output status large intercharac
265. n Commands on page A 6 Type Command Name lt C gt Enter Decode Rate Test Read Rate lt Cp gt Enter Percent Rate Test lt J gt Exit Decode Rate and Percent Rate Test lt N gt No Read Counter lt O gt No Read Counter Reset lt T gt Trigger Counter Counter Request lt U gt Trigger Counter Reset and Clear lt V gt Good Read Match Counter lt W gt Good Read Match Counter Reset lt X gt Mismatch Counter lt Y gt Mismatch Counter Reset lt G gt Store Next Symbol Read to Database Index 1 Master Database lt Gn gt Store Next Symbol Read to Database Index n lt NEWM gt New Master Load Status lt gt Display All Firmware Part Numbers lt a gt Display Application Code Part Number lt b gt Display Boot Code Part Number Part Number lt p gt Display Profile Module Part Numbers Checksum lt gt Display All Available Firmware Checksums lt a gt Display Application Code Code Checksum lt b gt Display Boot Code Checksum lt p gt Display Profile Module Checksum lt L1 gt Programmable Output 1 lt L2 gt Programmable Output 2 lt L3 gt Programmable Output 3 Device Control lt 11 gt Targeting System On lt 10 gt Targeting System Off lt l gt Disable Imager lt H gt Enable Imager lt al gt Include PDF Information in Preamble PDF417 lt A gt Reset does not save for power on lt Ard gt Reset and Recall Microscan Defaults
266. n Interleaved 2 of 5 Range Mode Status Interleaved 2 of 5 lt K472 gt will be enabled This allows variable length Interleaved 2 of 5 symbols to be decoded If an Interleaved 2 of 5 symbol is decoded during calibration then symbol length 1 will be set to the decoded symbol length at the end of calibration Otherwise the symbol lengths will be restored to their original configurations 7 Pharmacode is not calibrated 10 11 12 13 The symbol size dimension and orientation parameters of the No Symbol Message and Bad Symbol Message and 2D Symbology Qualification command lt K718 gt will be updated if calibration is completed successfully All symbol types that were enabled before calibration will still be enabled after calibration For example if Data Matrix ECC 200 was enabled before calibration and the calibration routine was performed on a Code 128 symbol then after calibration is completed both Data Matrix ECC 200 and Code 128 will be enabled The calibration process does not modify the global Composite status lt K453 gt The global Composite status must be configured properly before calibration If the user requires calibration of a stacked symbology lt K482 gt lt K483 gt or lt K484 gt that symbology must be enabled and configured appropriately before calibration UPC Supplementals will be disabled during calibration The Search process will use the configurable Window of Interest for image capture
267. n a discrete indication of a diagnostic condition is needed Definition Activates discrete output when a diagnostic warning condition is met depending on the diagnostic option enabled In Read Cycle Definition Activates a discrete output when the imager is in a read cycle Quadrus MINI Velocity User s Manual 7 33 Configurable Output 1 Output State Definition Sets the active electrical state of the discrete output Serial Cmd lt K810 output on output state pulse width output mode gt Default Negative Options 0 Negative 1 Positive Pulse Width Definition Sets the time in 10 ms increments that the discrete output remains active Serial Cmd lt K810 output on output state pulse width output mode gt Default 5 Corresponds to 50 ms Options 0 to 255 0 to 2 55 seconds Divide the number entered on the command line by 100 for time in seconds Output Mode Definition Sets the condition in which the discrete output is de activated Serial Cmd lt K810 output on ou put state pulse width output mode gt Default Pulse Options 0 Pulse 2 Latch Mode 2 3 Latch Mode 3 Pulse This is the default mode of operation in which the programmable output is activated when the Output On condition has been met and held active for the duration of the selected pulse width Latch Mode 2 Unlatch Opposite Condition The programmable output is activated when the Output On condition has been met and held active un
268. n conc nnn nc rn nc rn 7 42 Diagnostic OUDE Lian ir a ae 7 42 Gonfigurable QU PUtE oa ii 7 43 Trend Analysis Q PUT Boiro ae aed a 7 43 ISO IEC 16022 Symbol Quality Output 3 oe ee cece ceee eee eteneeeeeeseeeeteeeeeeeeeaeesaaeeeaeeseeeseeeeeeeeaees 7 43 Diagnostic OU Vi coa nae a ate Sie alee 7 43 Power On Reset Counts uan iaa aa ad 7 44 Time SNe ROSE Heth ees Rete ann Mo ee ah roda tei 7 45 Service Messages erie is ie te 7 46 Frame Information c0 aides tists Sack ai dees ii 7 47 Image Outpute 2 5 uri a a e pas 7 48 Database Identifier QUtPUt nannini a ae eee eee SE ta eh 7 51 Quality Output oee ee ial ee hh a tie eee de 7 52 Configuring EZ Trax Outpttesce2 atera adds 7 53 This section includes instructions on setting up conditions for changing input output electrical transitions for control of the imager s internal and external devices A discrete I O in out signal is an electrical transition from one voltage level to another so that digital switching can occur Quadrus MINI Velocity User s Manual 7 1 I O Parameters by ESP I O Parameters by ESP gt App Mode Click this button to bring up the App Mode view E Sar LIGt Jo Click this button to bring up the I O Parameters tree control Parameters ESP Values 1 0 Parameters Symbol Data Output Good Read Noread Message Enabled Bad No Symbol Qualification Read Duration Output Disabled Output Object Inf
269. n output when 4 No Reads occur within a period of 25 triggers read cycles Quadrus MINI Velocity User s Manual 7 35 Configurable Output 1 Trend Analysis Mode Definition Sets the trend condition Mismatch No Read or Decodes Trigger that will activate the output Trend Analysis MER een oes Noread z Number of Triggers Number to Output On LE Decodes per Trigger Decodes per Trigger Bad Symbol No Symbol Serial Cmd lt K 780 trend analysis mode trigger evaluation period number to output on decodes trigger threshola gt Default No Read Options 0 Mismatch 1 No Read 2 Decodes Trigger 3 Bad Symbol 4 No Symbol Mismatch Output will be activated when the number of mismatches equals the value entered for Number to Output On within the trigger window selected in Number of Triggers No Read Output will be activated when the number of No Reads equals the value entered for Number to Output On within the trigger window selected in Number of Triggers Decodes Trigger Output will be activated when the number of decodes equals the value entered for Number to Output On within the trigger window selected in Number of Triggers Bad Symbol Output will be activated when the number of Bad Symbol occurrences equals the value entered for Number to Output On within the trigger window selected in Number of Triggers Note Bad Symbol output is not supported when Q Mode is enabled This also applies to Trend A
270. nable Ull Parsing lt a symbol data into the correct fields and output order defined Default Settings Revert Settings Returns all settings to most recent Returns all settings to default Quadrus MINI Velocity User s Manual Symbol Quality Separator Data Matrix Output Mode Symbol Quality Separator Data Matrix Output Mode Symbol Quality Separator applies to both Symbol Quality groups ISO IEC 16022 Symbol Quality Output and Microscan Symbol Quality Output Symbol Quality Separator Note Symbol Quality Separator is not supported when Q Mode is enabled Definition Inserts a separator between each enabled field of symbol quality output Serial Cmd lt K708 symbol quality separator output mode gt Default SP space character Options Any ASCII character Important The ASCII characters lt gt and can only be entered as hex pairs For lt lt K708h 3C gt For gt lt K708h 3E gt For lt K708h 2C gt See ASCII Character Entry Modifier on page 3 32 for a detailed explanation of how to enter ASCII characters as hex values Symbol Quality Separator by ESP Parameters ESP Values Symbol Quality Global Total Read Time Disabled default separator SP the Symbol When you double click on the Quality Separator Calculator appears Use the calculator keypad for one click separator configuration Symbol Quality Separator e Output Mode Grade
271. nalysis Output 2 and Trend Analysis Output 3 No Symbol Output will be activated when the number of No Symbol occurrences equals the value entered for Number to Output On within the trigger window selected in Number of Triggers Note No Symbol output is not supported when Q Mode is enabled This also applies to Trend Analysis Output 2 and Trend Analysis Output 3 7 36 Quadrus MINI Velocity User s Manual I O Parameters Trigger Evaluation Period Definition The number of triggers to examine for the trend analysis condition Serial Cmd lt K780 trend analysis mode trigger evaluation period number to output on decodes trigger threshola gt Default 0 Options 0 to 255 Number to Output On Usage Example lf Number to Output On is set to 3 and Trend Analysis Mode is set to No Read then the output will not be activated until 3 No Reads have occurred Definition Sets the number of Trend Analysis Mode events mismatches No Reads or reads trigger as configured by Trend Analysis Mode to occur within the trigger evaluation period before activating the associated output Serial Cmd lt K780 trend analysis mode trigger evaluation period number to output on decodes trigger threshola gt Default 0 Options 0 to 255 Decodes Trigger Threshold Definition When set to this mode and when the appropriate output is set to output on trend analysis the imager will function in a Decodes per Trigger mode during the read cycle an
272. nate Transfer 1 data is flushed A 20 Quadrus MINI Velocity User s Manual Appendices Error Condition 2 HOST_TX RES 0x1C REQ Poll Unit 1 for data IMAGER_TX 0x1C STX lt T 00000 gt ETX LRC HOST_TX Nothing Host should ACK here timeout reached IMAGER_TX REQ Unit requests an ACK again HOST_TX NAK Host rejects data frame Retry Event IMAGER_TX 0x1C STX lt T 00000 gt ETX LRC Unit sends again HOST_TX ACK Host receives data IMAGER_TX RES Terminate Transfer 1 Error Condition 3 HOST_TX RES 0x1C REQ Poll Unit 1 for data IMAGER_TX 0x1C STX lt T 00000 gt ETX BAD LRC HOST_TX NAK Host rejects bad LRC data Retry Event IMAGER_TX 0x1C STX lt T 00000 gt ETX GOOD LRC Unit sends again HOST_TX ACK Host receives data IMAGER_TX RES Terminate Transfer 1 The protocol makes 3 retry attempts before data is flushed and transfer is aborted Quadrus MINI Velocity User s Manual A 21 ASCII Table Appendix E ASCII Table Dec Hex Mne Ctrl Dec Hex Ch Dec Hex Ch Dec Hex Ch 00 00 NUL NO 32 20 SP 64 40 96 60 01 01 SOH A 33 21 65 41 A 97 61 a 02 02 STX AB 34 22 5 66 42 B 98 62 b 03 03 ETX AC 35 23 67 43 C 99 63 c
273. ncan USE to Serial Driver sales Ucense Agreement To continue accept the folowing icense agreement To read the entro agreement use the serol bar or press the Page Down key Software Product Liceras Carefully read the terms and condtons of the agreement before Mavican Systems Inc Muscari 1207 SW Ah Steet Renton pocest the agreemert Son I dont accept this agreement Important After accepting the license agreement and clicking Next you may see a Windows Security warning that states Windows can t verify the publisher of this driver software If you receive this warning choose the Install this driver software anyway option 5 The driver files will begin installing This may take several seconds Do not interfere with the installer during this process 7 Micrascan USE to Serial Driver Installer Installing the USB Virtual COM Port Driver for your Microscan Imager amp 02 p Pinne wal while Se devra ratal Thea may labo sere Iria to corgiete 6 Once the driver is installed successfully you will receive the message shown below Click Finish USB Virtual COM Port Ds Use Mires insane can now be connected through the Driver Driver Name Ratus Y Meroscen Systema nc Device Undated hna Cancel Quadrus MINI Velocity User s Manual A 27 USB to Serial Virtual COM Port Driver Uninstalling the USB to Serial Virtual COM Port Driver Important You must uninstall the USB t
274. nce values to select the darkest 10 and the lightest 10 of the pixels The arithmetic mean of the darkest and the lightest pixels is calculated and the difference of the two means is the Symbol Contrast ANSI Symbol Contrast grading is defined this way A 4 0 if SC gt 70 B 3 0 if SC gt 55 C 2 0 if SC gt 40 D 1 0 if SC gt 20 F 0 0 if SC lt 20 If enabled the symbol contrast is appended to the symbol data according to the ISO IEC 16022 Symbol Quality Output Mode setting Serial Cmd lt K709 symbol contrast print growth axial non uniformity UEC gt Default Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Print Growth Note Print Growth is not supported when Q Mode is enabled Definition The extent to which dark or light markings appropriately fill or exceed their module boundaries These values are determined by counting pixels in the clock pattern of the binary digitized image then comparing it to a nominal value and minimum and maximum values The print growth grade is defined in this way A 4 0 if 050 lt PG lt 0 50 B 3 0 if 070 lt PG lt 0 70 C 2 0 if 085 lt PG lt 0 85 D 1 0 if 10 lt PG lt 1 00 F 0 0 if PG lt 1 00 or PG gt 1 00 If enabled the print growth is appended to the symbol data according to the ISO IEC 16022 Symbol Quality Output Mode setting Serial Cmd lt K709 symbol contrast print growth axial non uniformity UEC gt Default Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 En
275. ncnnnno 11 4 Database Mode riirii on eee eae ltavcd 11 11 Save Current Settings to Configuration Database cseeeeeeeee 11 16 Load Current Settings from Configuration Database ccceeeee 11 17 Request Selected Index Settings cecceeceeceeseeceeeeeeeeeneesseeeeeenaes 11 18 Request All Configuration Database Settings 0 0 ceceeeeeeeeeeeeee 11 19 Quadrus MINI Velocity User s Manual vii Table of Contents Chapter 12 Terminal Terminal WindOW menisi eel oie aera nied dd 12 2 A said biepet dade ale eae 12 3 SOMO ssh tat ses tie toi A eles doe ON ede radicada 12 4 MaCroS wedi ciel an ii nd 12 5 Terminal Window MeNnuS cceecceeeeseeeesneeeeeneeeeeeneeteneeeeeeeeeeeaeeeenaeees 12 6 Chapter 13 Utilities Serial Utility COMMANAS 2 0 00 eeceeececeeeeeeeeeneeteaeeeeeseaeeeaeeeeeeeeaeeteeeeneeees 13 2 Read Rate 4 45 ete eth e eae 13 4 GOMA Pe eR dia 13 5 Device Control 4 2 08 26 hatte eerie Haein eh ae ie eee 13 7 Differences from Defaullt ccsecceceseceesseeeteseeeeseeeeseeneneeseeenseneeeenees 13 8 Master Data Na Seia a a ae aae pa aa Eee AET AEAEE aE Ea 13 9 AN EE E E R A A T ETE 13 15 Default Reset Save E a e E a a ae a a rts 13 18 Imager Status Requests oocooccccccccoccconcccnoncnoncnancnoncnnnncnnnc cnn ccnncnnna cnn 13 20 Other Operational Serial COMMANAS 0oooccincccnnccnoccnnnccnonccinnnnnncnanccinn 13 22 Chapter 14 Output Format Output Format Serial COMMANdS oooooconiccnnccn
276. ng up the Locate Time Disabled Symbol Quality Decode Time Disabled tree control Pixels Per Element Disabled ECC Level Disabled Matrix Size Disabled Quiet Zone Disabled Disabled PE To change a setting double click the setting and use your cursor to scroll through the options 8 4 Quadrus MINI Velocity User s Manual Report Tab Symbol Quality The Report tab allows the user to initiate Data Matrix Grading and to generate and save grading reports To save the report as a PDF file an HTML file a CSV file or an RTF file click the Save Report button Reports appear in the viewing area underneath the Data Matrix Grading and Save Report buttons ESP ESP Untitled File Model Options Connect Yiew Help 9 gt Z EZ Mode Autoconnect Send Recy Switch Model Configuration ds E LA Communication Read Cycle Symbologies yo ESP Values Symbol Quality Global Total Read Time Disabled Symbol Quality Separator SP Output Mode Grade Data Matrix ISO IEC 16022 Parameters Grading Symbol Quality The Symbol Quality interface is divided into three sections Report Locate and Preferences se q Camera Terminal Utilities pa Diagnostics Matchcode Report Locate Preferences Data Matrix Grading Save Report See the reader s manual for information regarding these parameters The imager s field of view is shown here When grading is completed the ini
277. nment and in the case of host communications by software switching between RS 232 and RS 422 RS 485 RS 232 RS 232 defines an interface between two devices such as for example the reader and host It differs from the other interfaces by dedicating individual pins to specific functions and by requiring both devices to share a common ground line Since both device chassis are connected to a common ground a ground loop potential and the possibility of noise interference exists Therefore cable lengths are limited to a maximum of 50 feet 19 7m Despite being the most limited this interface is used frequently because of the large installed base of RS 232 equipment RS 422 RS 485 RS 422 unlike RS 232 measures signals deferentially that is the receiver looks at the potentials between the two receive or transmit wires rather than the potential between signal and ground As a result cables if shielded can be up to 4000 feet 1219m in length Like RS 232 RS 422 communication is designed for only two devices on a single line and must have a common ground lt can be used wherever RS 232 is used USB The Universal Serial Bus can connect up to 127 devices to a host at a maximum of 6 megabytes per second Mbps of bandwidth Quadrus MINI Velocity User s Manual A 23 Object Detector Appendix G Object Detector In a typical operation an imager will wait for symbol data only during a triggered read cycle A read cycle is initia
278. nnccnncnnonnconcnnnnncnnnnnnancancann 14 2 Output Format Status ceuta bbdd 14 3 Format AsSiON citar 14 4 Format Extlaclin cani 14 5 Format Insett ic ean dice ein dein oe 14 7 Output Filter Configuration eececeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeteeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 14 9 Ordered Output Filter ec eccceeeeseeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeaeessaeeeaeeeeeseaeeeeetsaes 14 13 Appendices Appendix A General Specifications ccceeceeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeeeneeee A 2 Appendix B Electrical Specifications ceeeesceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeenneee A 5 Appendix C Serial Configuration Commands ceceeeceeeeeeteeeeeeneees A 6 Appendix D Communications Protocol cceeceeceeeeeeeeeseteeeneeeneeeeaes A 13 Appendix E ASCII Table ccc ceecceceeeceseeeeeneeeeeeseeesieeseeeeeaeeseaeeeneetaes A 22 Appendix F Interface Standards ooooonccnncccincccnccconccnonacanccancnonancnnnnnncnnns A 23 Appendix G Object Detector eeeeecesesceeeeeceeeeneeeeeeteaeeseaeeeaeeeneetaaes A 24 Appendix H Operational Tips ecceeeceseseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeesseeesneeseneeenees A 25 Appendix USB to Serial Virtual COM Port Driver 00 0 cee A 26 Appendix J Glossary Of Terms c ccesceeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseneteeeseeeeneeeeaees A 29 Index viii Quadrus MINI Velocity User s Manual Introduction About the Quadrus MINI Velocity The key features of the Quadrus MINI Velocity are Q Mode ultra high speed image processing WVGA optics Global
279. nnn nora ncnnnnnnno 10 2 Camera and IP Setup Serial Commands ococcoicccicccincanoncnonncinnncanccannnn 10 3 VISO td as bdo ete 10 4 Eyal lO ada o e are e a aeea i aad 10 5 Calibration act a 10 9 Window of Interest oooooocconnnnccnonnccnnncncnnnnncnnnnnnnnnnncnnnnrnnnrannnnnncn nana 10 10 Configuration Database ooooncccnccnonicinccnncononnnonnnonononnnannnc cnn ca nana nanccnnnanns 10 13 Dinamico SO tu ESTAA E A T 10 14 Camera Features ics acacia 10 15 Camera Settings atinada 10 17 FOCAalDISTAN CO cs iio iaa 10 18 Focal Distance Table Read Only eecceeseeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeseeeeeeeaes 10 19 Increment FOCUS Position ccesececesereeeteeceeeeneeeeeeeeseneeenenneneneeetenes 10 20 Decrement FOCUS Position ooococconcccnoncnconcccnnonnnnnnononnnn cnn nono nrnnrnnnrn nn 10 20 IP TPESN OIG cz cities 10 21 Number of Symbols in Field of View cc ceesceeeceeeeeeseeeeeeeesneeeeeeeeaees 10 23 Damaged Symbol siine Me eee 10 24 IP MOJE etc AEA ee 10 25 Hollow Modeion ais 10 27 Mirrored Mages ke At een a ie Ret 10 28 Illumination Brightness 0 00 eee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeseeeeeeneeeseneeeeeneeeene 10 29 Chapter 11 Configuration Database Configuration Database Serial Commands ccccsceeseseeeeeeteeteteeees 11 2 Number of Active Indexes ooocoonocccnnncccnnonnccnonnnononcnnnanononnrn cnn ano nn nn nnnnnnos 11 3 Configuration Database StatUS oonocinnininininnonncnnocncnncnnncncnrncnnrnrnnnn
280. nter 3 Click the Send button to the left of the text field to send 12 4 Quadrus MINI Velocity User s Manual Terminal Macros Macros can be stored in a macro selection bar edited in a separate window and executed by clicking on the macro name Default Macros Add Macro A Row grt Number Checksum Disable Scanning Enable Scanning y Exit Read Cycle Fo i Help press F1 4 Click on the first arrow here to see Add Click on Next Macro or Default Macros Click on subsequent Row to see the When you default macros the entire arrows to edit macros next row of macros set is restored to their original macros macro commands When you click on the macro name the macro is executed in the Terminal window If this is a command it is sent to the reader at the same time that it is displayed Editing a Macro When you click the arrow next to any macro and select Edit the following appears Macro Entry Macro Name Read Rate percent Macro Value lt C p gt Cancel You can edit an existing macro or type in the Macro Name text field and define it in the Macro Value text field Click OK Quadrus MINI Velocity User s Manual 12 5 Terminal Window Menus Terminal Window Menus Right click on the Terminal window to display the following menu Copy Paste Clear Select All Save Change Font Change Echo Font Enable Echo Change Background Color gt Non
281. o button make your selection 3 Select the code type to see ts part number displayed in the text field to the right of the Request Part No button Firmware Verification App Code y Request PartNo 35 534001 24 App Code Request Checksum 9070 Request Part Number by Serial Command e When you send lt gt a request for all product part numbers the imager returns lt b BOOT_P N gt lt a APP_P N gt lt p PROFILE_P N gt When you send lt a gt a request for the application code part number the imager returns lt a APP_P N gt When you send lt b gt a request for the boot code part number the imager returns lt b BOOT_P N gt When you send lt p gt a request for profile module part numbers the imager returns lt p PROFILE_P N gt 13 16 Quadrus MINI Velocity User s Manual Utilities Request Checksum by ESP You can send a request to the imager for part numbers checksums boot code and application code 1 Click the Firmware tab 2 From the pulldown selection box to the left of the Request Checksum button make your selection 3 Select the code type to see its checksum displayed in the text field to the right of the Request Checksum button Firmware Verification App Code Request Part No 35 634001 24 App Code v Request Checksum 9070 Request Checksum by Serial Command e When you send lt gt a request for all available firmware checksums the
282. o Disabled Output Indicators Serial Verification Image Output Disabled EZ Trax Output Disabled ETT enable y Calibration Options Database Identifier Output To change a setting E ompa tromme I oupa A Output 2 Parameters Parameter switch p to scroll Output 3 Parameters through the options i Quality Output To open nested options single click the 7 2 Quadrus MINI Velocity User s Manual I O Parameters I O Parameters Serial Commands Power On Reset Counts lt K406 power on resets power on saves power on flash saves gt Time Since Reset lt K407 hours minutes gt Service Message lt K409 status service message threshold resolution gt Serial Verification lt K701 serial command echo status serial command beep status control hex output gt Beeper lt K702 status gt Quality Output lt K704 quality output separator decodes trigger status gt Symbol Data Output lt K705 symbol data output status when to output gt Read Duration Output lt K706 status separator gt No Read Message lt K714 status message gt Bad Symbol Message lt K715 unused message gt No Symbol Message lt K716 unused message gt 1D Stacked Symbology Qualification 2D Symbology Qualification lt K717 minimum number of bars minimum number of qualified scan lines start stop status gt lt K718 finder pattern status symbol size status sym
283. o Read 006 No Read 007 Sequence on No Read 007 007 008 As an example of Sequence on No Read Disabled consider the following series of decodes Master Symbol Decoded Symbol Master Symbol after Decode 001 001 002 002 002 003 003 No Read 003 not sequenced 003 003 004 004 No Read 004 not sequenced 004 No Read 004 not sequenced 004 004 005 9 8 Quadrus MINI Velocity User s Manual Matchcode Sequence on Mismatch Note Matchcode must be set to Sequential for this command to function Usage Definition Serial Cmd Default Options Enable this parameter if every trigger event should have a decode and more than one consecutive mismatch may occur Disable this parameter if every trigger event should have a decode but no more than one consecutive mismatch may occur When set to Enabled the master symbol sequences on every decode match or mismatch When set to Disabled the master symbol will not sequence whenever consecutive mismatches occur lt K223 matchcode type sequential matching match start position match length wild card character sequence on No Read sequence on mismatch gt Disabled 0 Disabled 1 Enabled The imager will sequence the master to one more or one less than the decoded symbol As an example of Sequence on Mismatch Enabled consider the following decodes Master Symbol Decoded Symbol Master Symbol after Decode 001 001 002 00
284. o Read message gt Default No Read Options A string of up to 64 characters Note No Read Message will only be transmitted if Symbol Data Output is set to Match Mismatch or Good Read No Read Message can be set to any ASCII character Important The ASCII characters lt gt and can only be entered as hex pairs For lt lt K714h 3C gt For gt lt K714h 3E gt For lt K714h 2C gt See ASCII Character Entry Modifier on page 3 32 for a detailed explanation of how to enter ASCII characters as hex values Quadrus MINI Velocity User s Manual 7 9 Bad Symbol Message Bad Symbol Message Note Bad Symbol Message is not supported when Q Mode is enabled Usage Useful in determining if a symbol is present and if user defined requirements for that symbol are met Can tell the user if a qualified symbol is present but not decodable Definition Sets the requirements that will qualify an object or a symbol before outputting a decode or message When enabled sends a message to the host whenever an object meets the qualifications setup but is not decoded Note When Symbology Identifier is enabled the Bad Symbol message is preceded by the identifier for the symbology being used Serial Cmd lt K715 f unused message gt Default BAD_SYMBOL Options Up to 64 ASCII characters Important The ASCII characters lt gt and can only be entered as hex pairs For lt lt K715h 3C gt For gt lt K715h 3E gt
285. o Serial Virtual COM Port Driver any time you require high speed USB connectivity to upload images using EZ Trax for example ices Ge gt curma o hepa Pogon m Faster tote Find the driver on the list wo Oof programs select it then annan click Uninstall Change To use the Virtual COM Port again follow the steps above to re install the driver Changing the COM Port Follow these steps to change the reader s COM Port 1 Right click on My Computer in the Windows Start menu and select Properties 2 Select the Hardware tab in the System Properties dialog and click the Device Manager button Device Manager 3 Expand the Ports COM amp LPT item on the Device Manager menu Right click on Microscan Reader and select Properties 4 Select the Port Settings tab in the Properties dialog and click the Advanced button 5 Expand the COM Port Number menu on the Advanced Settings dialog and select your new COM Port number Tuy mo tee A Par S idioci Settings for COND a UE gt gt Es Gu Ge You are now ready to begin using the new COM Port A 28 Quadrus MINI Velocity User s Manual Appendices Appendix J Glossary of Terms Aberration The failure of an optical lens to produce an exact point to point correspondence between the object and its resulting image Various types are chromatic spherical coma astigmatism and distortion Absorption
286. ocessing mode narrow margins background color symbology gt Default 0 Options 0 to 752 column width Quadrus MINI Velocity User s Manual 11 5 Configuration Database Status Row Depth Definition Serial Cmd Default Options The image dimension settings can be applied as a Window of Interest or a Region of Interest depending on the image dimension mode selected in the Database Mode command lt K255 index shutter speed gain focal distance pixel binning row pointer column pointer row depth column width threshold mode fixed threshold value processing mode narrow margins background color symbology gt 480 3 to 480 row pointer Column Width Definition The image dimension settings can be applied as a Window of Interest or a Region of Interest depending on the image dimension mode selected in the Database Mode command Serial Cmd lt K255 index shutter speed gain focal distance pixel binning row pointer column pointer row depth column width threshold mode fixed threshold value processing mode narrow margins background color symbology gt Default 752 Options 8 to 752 column pointer Threshold Mode Note Threshold Mode is not supported when Q Mode is enabled Serial Cmd lt K255 index shutter speed gain focal distance pixel binning row pointer column pointer row depth column width threshold mode fixed threshold value processing mode narrow margins background color symb
287. ocity User s Manual Index 19 Ss S Safety Certifications Saturation Save Save As Save Configuration in ESP Save Current Settings to Configuration Database Save Current Settings to Configuration Database by ESP Save Current Text Save for Power On Save Report Saved for Power on Saving Saving Options Scattering Search Method Enabled Search Pass Select All Select Model Select Protocol and Connect Send Send and Save Send and Save as Customer Defaults Send Current Command Send Current View Send Database to the Reader Send ESP Settings to the Reader Send File Send XON with Autoconnect Send No Save Send Receive Options Send Recv Separator Separator Character Composite Separator Character UPC EAN Separator Status Composite Separator Status UPC EAN Sequence on Mismatch Sequence on No Read Sequential Matching Serial Command Beep Status Serial Command Echo Status Serial Command Format Serial Command Status Request 20 Quadrus MINI Velocity User s Manual S Serial Configuration Command Conventions Serial Configuration Commands Serial Data Serial Data and Edge Serial Trigger Serial Trigger Character Delimited Serial Utility Commands Serial Verification Service Message Service Unit Setting Up the Imager for EZ Trax Show Connect Prompt Show Model Prompt Show Non Printable Characters Show Target Pattern During Calibrate Show Target Pattern During Locate Shutter S
288. odabar symbols whether or not the start and stop characters are the same When enabled the imager will not decode Codabar symbols unless the start and stop characters are the same Serial Cmd lt K471 status start stop match start stop output large intercharacter gap fixed symbol length status symbol length check character type check character output gt Default Enabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Start Stop Output Codabar Definition When disabled the start and stop characters will not be present in the data output of the decoded symbol When enabled the start and stop characters willbe present in the data output of the decoded symbol Note Because the start and stop characters are included as part of the data the characters must be included as part of the length in a fixed length mode of operation Serial Cmd lt K471 status start stop match start stop output large intercharacter gap fixed symbol length status symbol length check character type check character output gt Default Enabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled 6 20 Quadrus MINI Velocity User s Manual Symbologies Large Intercharacter Gap Codabar Note Large Intercharacter Gap is not supported when Q Mode is enabled Definition When disabled the spaces between characters or the intercharacter gap are ignored during the decode process Note If the intercharacter space is large enough to be considered a margin the symbol will not
289. ode view Symbologies Click this button to bring up the Symbologies tree control 6 2 To open nested options single click the Parameters ESP Values Symbologies 2D Symbologies 1D Symbologies Stacked Symbologies Composite Disabled Narrow Margin Status Disabled Symbology Identifier Disabled Background Color White ne t an e To change a setting double click the setting and use your cursor to scroll through the options Quadrus MINI Velocity User s Manual Symbologies Symbologies Serial Commands Narrow Margins Symbology ID lt K450 narrow margin status symbology identifier status gt Background Color lt K451 background color gt Composite lt K453 symbology status separator status separator gt Aztec Code lt K458 status gt Micro QR Code lt K459 status gt Postal Symbologies lt K460 postal symbology type POSTNET status PLANET status USPS4CB status POSTNET allow B and B fields Australia Post allow 0 FCC gt OCR lt K461 status active template orientation single row background uncertain characters checksum special character passport checksum gt OCR User Template lt K462 lengih template string gt Code 39 lt K470 status check character status check character output status large intercharacter gap fixed symbol length status fixed symbol length full ASCII set gt
290. of symbols multisymbol separator gt Default 1 Options 1 to 100 Multisymbol Separator Usage Used to delimit or separate data fields with a user defined character Definition Any valid ASCII character inserted between each symbol read when Multisymbol is set to any number greater than 1 Serial Cmd lt K222 number of symbols multisymbol separator gt Default comma Options Any available ASCII character Important The ASCII characters lt gt and can only be entered as hex pairs For lt lt K222h 3C gt For gt lt K222h 3E gt For lt K222h 2C gt See ASCII Character Entry Modifier on page 3 32 for a more detailed explanation of how to enter ASCII characters as hex values Note If No Read messages are disabled and there are No Reads occurring separators will only be inserted between symbol data outputs Quadrus MINI Velocity User s Manual 5 5 Trigger Mode and Filter Duration Trigger Mode and Filter Duration Trigger Mode Definition The Trigger is the event that initiates a read cycle Note When calibrating the imager or testing read rate the current trigger setting will be disregarded Serial Cmd lt K200 trigger mode leading edge trigger filter trailing edge trigger filter gt Default Continuous Read Options 0 Continuous Read 1 Continuous Read 1 Output 2 External Level 3 External Edge 4 Serial Data 5 Serial Data and Edge Continuous Read Usage Continuous Read is
291. of the window to define the Window of Interest Window of Interest Top 0 Left 0 Height 480 Width 752 Caution Window of Interest will shrink the field of view and therefore could cause symbols to be missed in dynamic applications 10 10 Quadrus MINI Velocity User s Manual Camera and IP Setup Window of Interest by ESP 1 From the Camera menu click the WOI tab to bring up Window of Interest If you haven t already captured an image click the Capture and Decode button to decode the present image If successful the Good Read indicator on the WOI tab will be green and the symbol will appear in the pane below Note You can resize the image by clicking and dragging the ESP window from the lower right corner This is useful where very small symbols are being read 2 Click and drag your cursor over the symbol that you want to isolate for reading Notice that the surrounding area goes black You can use the handles on the image area that you have just drawn to resize the region of interest You can also click on the center of the window of interest and move it 3 Test the new settings in Read Rate Mode Video Evaluation Calibration WO Configuration Database Dynamic Setup Window of Interest Reset Capture and Decode Top 0 Height 1024 5 tet fo H wanha 3 No Decode Video Evaluation Calibration WOT J Configuration Database Dynamic Setup Window of Inte
292. ol Size 1 Symbol Size 2 Symbol Size Mode Symbol Size Tolerance Symbol Transitions Symbol Type Symbologies Symbologies by ESP Symbologies Serial Commands Symbology Symbology Configuration Database Symbology Identifier Symbology Type 22 Quadrus MINI Velocity User s Manual T T Table of Contents Target Pattern Target System Technical Support Terminal Terminal Dropdown Menu Terminal Window Terminal Window Menus Test Test Read Rate Test Read Rate by ESP Test Read Rate by EZ Button Test Read Rate by Serial Command Three Beeps Position 3 Threshold Threshold Histogram Threshold Mode Threshold Mode Configuration Database Tilt Time Time Before First Capture Time Between Captures Time Since Reset Timed Capture Timeout Timeout or New Trigger Top Row Pointer Total Read Time Trailing Edge Trigger Filter Transparent Mode Tree Control Trend Analysis Trend Analysis Mode Trend Analysis Output 1 Trend Analysis Output 2 Trend Analysis Output 3 Trigger Trigger Character Trigger Counter Trigger Counter Reset Trigger Evaluation Period Trigger Mode Trigger Mode and Filter Duration Quadrus MINI Velocity User s Manual Index 23 U Triggered Capture Two Beeps Position 2 Two Characters Only Two Dimensional Symbology Qualification Two Dimensional Symbols U U S Post POSTNET PLANET USPS4CB Ultra High Density Optics Uncertain OCR Characters Unlatch Outputs
293. ology gt Default Adaptive Options 0 Adaptive 1 Fixed Fixed Threshold Value Note Fixed Threshold Value is not supported when Q Mode is enabled Serial Cmd Default Options 11 6 lt K255 index shutter speed gain focal distance pixel binning row pointer column pointer row depth column width threshold mode fixed threshold value processing mode narrow margins background color symbology gt 128 0 to 255 Quadrus MINI Velocity User s Manual Configuration Database Processing Mode Important Options 2 and 3 are not available in non Q Mode imagers Serial Cmd lt K255 index shutter speed gain focal distance pixel binning row pointer column pointer row depth column width threshold mode fixed threshold value processing mode narrow margins background color symbology gt Default Both Options 0 Standard 1 Fast Linear Mode 2 Q Mode 3 Both Note The following items are not supported when Q Mode is enabled Hollow Mode Number of Symbols in Field of View Damaged Symbol IP Threshold BC412 Symbology 2D Enhanced Narrow Margins Large Intercharacter Gap Code 39 Large Intercharacter Gap Codabar Guard Bar Status Interleaved 2 of 5 Codeword Collection PDF417 Print Growth ISO IEC 16022 Symbol Quality Output Axial Non Uniformity Data Matrix Only ISO IEC 16022 Symbol Quality Output Unused Error Correction Data Matrix Only ISO IEC 16022 Symbol Quality Output Percent Cell Damage
294. on uniformity threshold output on UEC UEC threshold gt Diagnostics Output 3 Note Output On under Output 3 Parameters must be set to Diagnostic Warning for this output to function Output 3 Parameters Output On Diagnostic Warning Serial Cmd lt K792 unused 1 service unit gt Quadrus MINI Velocity User s Manual 7 43 Power On Reset Counts Power On Reset Counts Note Power On Reset Counts is a read only command Power On Serial Cmd lt K406 power on resets power on saves power on flash saves gt Power On uses a 16 bit counter that increments each time the imager is powered on Resets Serial Cmd lt K406 power on resets power on saves power on flash saves gt Resets uses a 16 bit counter that increments each time the imager is reset This value is reset at power on Power On Saves Serial Cmd lt K406 power on resets power on saves power on flash saves gt Power On Saves uses a 16 bit counter that increments each time an imager setting is saved for power on with a lt Z gt command Power On Flash Saves Serial Cmd lt K406 power on resets power on saves power on flash saves gt Power On Flash Saves uses a 16 bit counter that increments each time an imager setting is saved to the customer parameter section of flash memory with a lt Zc gt command 7 44 Quadrus MINI Velocity User s Manual I O Parameters Time Since Reset Note Time Since Reset is a read only command Hours Serial Cmd
295. on is grayed out The JPEG option allows faster captures and transfers but since the JPEG standard compresses image data it is not suitable for the more rigorous demands of line scan evaluation JPEG also allows you to adjust the image quality resolution by adjusting the sliding tab between 1 and 100 1 being the lowest quality and 100 being the highest When possible use the highest quality when image transfer speed must be increased use a lower image quality setting Adjustments for this setting will depend on your specific hardware and software limitations Low Quadrus MINI Velocity User s Manual 10 5 Evaluation Histogram Usage Useful in determining quality and contrast of symbols Definition A histogram is a graphic representation of the numeric count of the occurrence of each intensity gray level in an image The horizontal axis represents the values of gray levels and the vertical axis represents the number of pixels for each gray level Note Since histograms are performed in the imager the results will be saved regardless of whether the image was uploaded as a JPEG jpg or a bitmap bmp 1 From the Evaluation window click the Histogram button The current image is transferred into the histogram operation This may take a moment since all the relevant pixels are being evaluated intensively 2 When the Histogram window opens you may need to expand the window and or adju
296. ons 4 Left click again on the open screen to complete your selection Saving Options Disabled Disabled 5 Right click on the open screen and select Save to Reader to implement the command in the imager Send No Save Changes will be lost when power is re applied to the imager Send and Save This activates all changes in current memory and saves to the imager for power on 1 14 Quadrus MINI Velocity User s Manual eee 2 Using ESP Contents EZ Mode vicio 2 2 Application MOS o 2 3 MentToolDarossciciantariandan io 2 4 AUTOCON NO Clara aca 2 12 MION eea e a tes iagacee iu estagesed E E E E 2 14 Navigating i ESP coin Dat 2 15 Send Receive Options oococnncnccconccinncnoncncncncnancnnnccnro nr nn cnn 2 16 SING EZ TO ae E EE a E eo EEA 2 18 This section is designed to help you understand the basic structure and elements of ESP Easy Setup Program When you open ESP unless otherwise specified in the ESP Preferences dialog accessible from the Options heading on the menu toolbar you will enter EZ Mode for initial setup From there you can enter Application Mode App Mode and access several configuration menus Communications Read Cycle Symbologies I O Parameters Symbol Quality Matchcode and Diagnostics a Camera setup interface a Terminal interface a Utilities interface and an Output Format interface ESP can be used to configure the Quadrus MINI Velocity in three different ways Tree Controls E
297. ons Contents Communications by ESP aer eaaa e aea e ii ao 3 2 Communications Serial COMMANOS ococcncccnccnnnocnnccnonnoncnnnn ronca n nc canon rn 3 3 Host POr Connections ici nisin Aili inti a e EAE Aa aaa ai Raes 3 4 H st Por Protocolo A Ae ek 3 5 ACK NAK Options yeti eine et ee is eee ee A ee aes 3 7 Polling Mode Optio Sininen nienn ene ae eee is ish cad eee eld ieee didi heel 3 8 RS 422 Statusiei ccd ety hh wien ba ee Ge 3 9 Auxiliary Port Connections inienn ni nies id 3 10 Auxiliary Port System Data Status 0 c cc eecececeeeeeeeeeeneeeeaeeeeeeseeeeeaeeseeeeeaeeseeeseaeeseeeeeeeeieeeeaeeeeeee 3 18 Daisy Chain AUtoContigure oooconcccncccnoccconcnnnnnonnnnnno nono nono cnn cnn cnn 3 19 Response TIMO diia Ae Eee ee ee 3 20 LRG Statuss issn asth ean inalienable nell i ee ds 3 21 Protocol Configuration EXamples c ccccccecceeseeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeceaeeeeeeeeaeesaeeseaeesaeeseaeseaeeseeeenieeeeneeeaes 3 22 USB HID Interface tout dra ds 3 23 ASCII Character Entry Modifier ooooooconincdinncnncnnnccnonccnnancncnconcn noc concn ronca cnn nr anna rca nnn 3 32 Preamble iii a aa eet A 3 33 Postamble iii aches Masts ee ech til T 3 34 This section explains how to set up communications parameters with the host and an auxiliary terminal With Microscan s ESP Easy Setup Program configuration changes can be made in the ESP menus and then sent and saved to the imager The user can also send serial commands to the imager via ESP
298. or reading symbols that are printed out of specification Important Do not use Large Intercharacter Gap with Narrow Margins enabled because a large intercharacter gap over 3x could cause a narrow margin 5x to be interpreted as an intercharacter gap When enabled the imager can read symbols with gaps between symbol characters that exceed three times 8x the narrow element width lt K470 status check character status check character output status large intercharacter gap fixed symbol length status fixed symbol length full ASCII set gt Disabled 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Fixed Symbol Length Status Code 39 Definition Serial Cmd Default Options When enabled the imager will check the symbol length against the symbol length field If disabled any length will be considered valid lt K470 status check character status check character output status large intercharacter gap fixed symbol length status fixed symbol length full ASCII set gt Disabled 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Fixed Symbol Length Code 39 Usage Definition Serial Cmd Default Options 6 10 Fixed Symbol Length helps prevent truncations and increases data integrity by ensuring that only one symbol length will be accepted Specifies the exact number of characters that the imager will recognize this does not include start and stop and check character characters The imager ignores any symbology that does not match the specified l
299. ored and only the 3rd and subsequent characters to the right will be compared up to the number of characters specified by Match Length lt K223 matchcode type sequential matching match start position match length wild card character sequence on No Read sequence on mismatch gt 0 0 to 3000 Note Match Start Position must be set to 1 or greater to enable this feature A 0 setting will disable this feature Match Length Usage Definition Serial Cmd Default Options 9 6 Example lf Match Length is set to 6 in a 10 character symbol and Match Start Position is set to 2 only the 2nd through 7th characters from left to right will be compared Defines the length of the character string that will be compared with that of the master symbol when Match Start Position is set to 1 or greater When Match Start Position is set to 0 no comparison will occur lt K223 matchcode type sequential matching match start position match length wild card character sequence on No Read sequence on mismatch gt 1 1 to 3000 Quadrus MINI Velocity User s Manual Matchcode Wild Card Character Usage Example With Wild Card Character defined as the default asterisk defining CR 34 as the master symbol will result in matches for CR134 and CR234 but not CR2345 Entering the wild card at the end of the master symbol as in CR will result in matches for variable symbol lengths such as CR1 CR23 CR358 etc Definition Wild C
300. orks best when decode time must be as short as possible and the reflectance and illumination of the symbol area is uniform and unchanging Cycle Fixed Mode is useful in applications where decode time can be slightly longer and reflectance and illumination of the symbol area is uniform and unchanging Otherwise Adaptive Mode is the preferred mode Definition This value switches the image processing threshold mode between the Adaptive Fixed and Cycle Fixed modes An adaptive routine sets the light dark threshold using data acquired from the current read A fixed routine applies the same gray scale threshold value to each and every symbol A cycle fixed routine loops through a pre defined range of values Cycle Min to Cycle Max by pre defined increments Cycle Step Serial Cmd lt K512 threshold mode fixed threshold value cycle min cycle max cycle step adaptive contrast percent gt Default Adaptive Options 0 Adaptive 1 Fixed 2 Cycle Fixed Fixed Threshold Value Usage A higher value will increase the threshold for distinguishing between light and dark elements Definition Determines how the imager will distinguish light pixels from dark pixels This value is used for Fixed Mode only When Adaptive Mode is set this value is ignored Serial Cmd lt K512 threshold mode fixed threshold value cycle min cycle max cycle step adaptive contrast percent gt Default 128 Options 0 to 255 Cycle Min Definition Starting value
301. oscan Asia Pacific R O Tel 65 6846 1214 Fax 65 6846 4641 ii Quadrus MINI Velocity User s Manual Introduction Microscan Limited Warranty Statement and Exclusions What Is Covered Microscan Systems Inc warrants to the original purchaser that products manufactured by it will be free from defects in material and workmanship under normal use and service for a period of one year from the date of shipment This warranty is specifically limited to at Microscan s sole option repair or replacement with a functionally equivalent unit and return without charge for service or return freight What Is Excluded This limited warranty specifically excludes the following 1 Any products or parts that have been subject to misuse neglect accident unauthorized repair improper installation or abnormal conditions or operations 2 Any products or parts that have been transferred by the original purchaser 3 Customer mis adjustment of settings contrary to the procedure described in the Microscan Systems Inc owners manual 4 Upgrading software versions at customer request unless required to meet specifications in effect at the time of purchase 5 Units returned and found to have no failure will be excluded 6 Claims for damage in transit are to be directed to the freight carrier upon receipt Any use of the product is at purchaser s own risk This limited warranty is the only warranty provided by Microscan Systems Inc regarding the product
302. ostic Warning Diagnostics Output 1 Diagnostics Output 2 Diagnostics Output 3 Differences from Default Diffused Lighting Digital Imaging Digital Signal Processor Digital to Analog Converter Dimension 1 Dimension 2 Dimension Mode Dimension Tolerance Direct Memory Access Direction Pharmacode Disable Reader Disclaimer Discrete I O Display Command Wildcard Display Incoming Data Even When Not in Focus 6 Quadrus MINI Velocity User s Manual E DMA Do Not Send or Receive Settings Document Memo Down Top to Bottom Downloading ESP from the Web DSP Dynamic Range Dynamic Setup E EAN 128 Status Code 128 EAN 128 EAN Status ECC 000 ECC 050 ECC 080 ECC 100 ECC 120 ECC 130 ECC 140 ECC 200 Edge Enhancement Editing a Macro Effects of Protocol Commands Electrical Specifications Embedded Memory Enable Both Dimension Mode Enable Both Orientation Mode Enable Both Symbol Size Mode Enable Echo Enable PDF Information Enable Reader Enable Send and Save as Customer Defaults End of Read Cycle End of Read Cycle Mode End Read Rate Test Enhanced Format Enter Decodes Second Test Enter Master Symbol Data Enter Percent Test Entering and Using Master Symbols Entering Control Characters in Serial Commands Environmental EPROM Erasable Programmable Read Only Memory Quadrus MINI Velocity User s Manual Index F Error Correction Level Data Matrix Only ESP System Requirements E
303. otal of counts after the rollover has occurred add 65536 per each rollover the imager does not keep track of the number of rollovers to the current count Note All counter values will be lost if power is recycled to the imager or if the imager receives a Reset or Save command Counters by ESP You can access Counters from ESP s Utilities menu Click the Request button to display the appropriate count or Clear to set the counter to zero Request All Clear All Request Clear Tigga PO Request Clear Good Read Pa Request Clear Hond SY Request Clear PA 7 Quadrus MINI Velocity User s Manual 13 5 Counters by Serial Command No Read Counter Sending lt N gt displays the total number of No Reads that have occurred since the last reset No Read Counter Reset Sending lt O gt sets the No Read Counter to 00000 Trigger Counter Sending lt T gt displays the total number of triggers since the last reset Trigger Counter Reset Sending lt U gt sets the trigger counter to 00000 Good Read Match Counter or Good Read Counter Sending lt V gt displays the total number of good reads matching the master symbol or if Master Symbol is not enabled the number of good reads since the last reset This counter is always enabled but will only work as a match count when Master Symbol is enabled If Master Symbol is not enabled this counter records the number of good reads This count can be requested
304. other than the main or supplemental will be read in the same read cycle Number of Symbols should be set accordingly Separator Status UPC EAN Usage Allows users to distinguish between the main and Supplemental symbols Definition A character can be inserted between the standard UPC or EAN symbology and the supplemental symbology when Supplementals is set to Enabled or Required Serial Cmd lt K473 UPC status EAN status supplementals status separator status separator character supplemental type format UPC E as UPC A gt Default Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled 6 24 Quadrus MINI Velocity User s Manual Symbologies Separator Character UPC EAN Note If Separator Character has been changed to any other character and you wish to redefine the separator as a comma you will need to use ESP Usage As required by the application Definition Allows the user to change the separator character from a comma to a new character Serial Cmd lt K473 UPC status EAN status supplementals status separator status separator character supplemental type format UPC E as UPC A gt Default comma Options Any ASCII character Note Whenever Separator Character is defined as a comma sending a lt K473 s gt command will return the current settings including the separator character comma which appears after the separator status comma Important The ASCII characters lt gt and can only be entered as hex pai
305. ound Color Find Next searches for a user defined section of text Non Printable Characters gt in the Terminal Default Settings e Find Previous operates in the same way as Find Next but searches backward through Terminal text Find Next F3 Find Previous Shift F3 Keyboard Macros 12 6 Quadrus MINI Velocity User s Manual es 73 Utilities Contents Serial Utility COMMANAS occ cece eceeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeseeteaeeeaeecaaeeeacessaeeeseeseeseaeeseeeseaeesseeseaeeeeeteneaes 13 2 Read Rated a id a des 13 4 COmMent li iio iio 13 5 Device Contro kontar dla ta aS 13 7 Difterences from Default nisione ne en ai lei 13 8 Master DatabaSO isidro rca 13 9 FPINMWA E neoon a a E 13 15 Default Reset SAV 6 vucoonaiani a di 13 18 Imager Status REQUESTS cv dt 13 20 Other Operational Serial Commands 0ooonccincccnccinccnnnnconccnnnnnnncnrcc non r arcano nr cnn narran 13 22 Utility commands are generally commands that are performed during imager operations to check or determine read rates or to perform miscellaneous operations on imager hardware Serial utility commands are not prefaced with a K and a numeric code nor do they require an initialization command lt A gt and lt Z gt They can be entered from within any terminal program or from ESP s Terminal or Utilities windows Quadrus MINI Velocity User s Manual 13 1 Serial Utility Commands Serial Utility Commands Note For a list of all K commands see Serial Configuratio
306. output functions and the master symbol database setup Quadrus MINI Velocity User s Manual 9 1 Matchcode by ESP Matchcode by ESP oe App Mode Click this button to bring up the App Mode view Matchcode Click this button to bring up the Matchcode tree control 9 2 Parameters ESP Values Matchcode Matchcode Type Disabled Sequential Matching Increment Match Start Position 0 Match Length 1 Wild Card Enabled y Sequence on Mismatch Disabled New Master Pin Match Replace Disabled Replacement String MATCH Mismatch Replace Disabled To change a setting double click the setting and use your cursor to scroll through the options To open nested options single click the Quadrus MINI Velocity User s Manual Matchcode Matchcode Serial Commands Matchcode Type lt K223 matchcode type sequential matching match start position match length wild card character sequence on No Read sequence on mismatch gt Number of Master Symbols lt K224 number of master symbols gt New Master Pin lt K225 status gt Enter Master Symbol Data lt K231 master symbol number master symbol data gt Request Master Symbol Data lt K231 gt for all or lt K231 master symbol number gt Delete Master Symbol Data lt K231 master symbol number gt Match Replace lt K735 status match replacement string gt Mismatch Replace lt K736 status
307. ow1 the user to select a preset OCR template Passport ISBN Price Field MICR E 13B e Both OCR A and OCR B Font The Row Count dropdown menu allows kd Epa k Z ron the user to set the number of rows in the OCR string 1 3 PS papa ps ps ps ps fs Receive Send Send and Save Note These buttons only affect this view If User Defined is selected on the Templates dropdown menu the fields shown above can be used to refine OCR parameters even further The Font menu allows the user to select the OCR font used in the application OCR A OCR B Both OCR A and OCR B MICR E 13B The Character Count menu sets the number of characters 1 20 in the OCR string Individual positions in the OCR string can then be defined using the text boxes shown above The buttons shown above allow the software to Receive settings from the reader to Send settings to the reader without saving or to Send and Save settings Quadrus MINI Velocity User s Manual 6 47 OCR Configuration by ESP OCR Test Interface OCR settings can be tested by clicking on the Test tab locating the candidate OCR string in the field of view and then clicking the Capture and Test button The image can be flipped by checking or un checking the Mirror Image box and contrast can be enhanced by clicking the Contrast box Data from the OCR string is displayed in the field under Attribute and Value Template Test Vi
308. ows any database index for this filter entry lt K744 filter number symbology type length wildcard placeholder data unused database index gt 0 any index 0 to 10 Quadrus MINI Velocity User s Manual Output Format Ordered Output Filter Definition Number of Filters refers to the number of active output filters O disables all output filters Any non zero numeral will enable filtering to be performed using the filter indexes covered by this value For example if the number of filters is 1 then only filter index 1 will be applied If the number of filters is 2 then only filter index 1 and filter index 2 will be applied etc Serial Cmd lt K745 number of filters gt Default 0 Options 0 to 10 Quadrus MINI Velocity User s Manual 14 13 Ordered Output Filter 14 14 Quadrus MINI Velocity User s Manual MEE o pendices Contents Appendix A General Specifications 0 0 cecceecceeeceeeneeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeaeeeaeeeeaeeeaeesaeeeeeeneeeseeseeeeeaeees A 2 Appendix B Electrical Specifications ececceeececeeeeeneeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeseeeeeaeeeeeseaeseeeseaeesieeseaeeeeees A 5 Appendix C Serial Configuration COmMands c ccecceeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeseaeeeeeeeeeeteeeeaeeeneeesieeeeeeeeaeees A 6 Appendix D Communications Protocol ccccecceseeeceeeeeeeeeneeseaeeeeeeseeeeaeeeseeseaeeseeseeeesaeeseaeenaes A 13 Appendix E ASGIl Table ssz fe isc 2vcc2 astedachay aii in tin A 22 Appendix F Interface
309. pecifies the maximum amount of time to process a captured image When the timeout expires the image processing is aborted This timeout works in both Rapid Capture and Continuous Capture modes as well as with the Configuration Database Serial Cmd lt K245 image processing timeout gt Default 5000 ms 5 sec Options 1 to 65535 in 1 ms increments Notes The timeout period does not include capture time e If a timeout occurs during processing and no symbols in the field of view have been decoded the image will be recorded as a No Read For this reason a longer timeout should be tried to ensure that the symbol is decoded successfully 5 24 Quadrus MINI Velocity User s Manual Read Cycle Image Storage Image Storage Type Definition Allows the user to store images from separate read cycles and to retrieve them later The number of available slots for storage depends on the mode of operation If the imager is in Rapid Capture Mode the number of images that can be stored is equivalent to the maximum number of the rapid count the current rapid count setting If the imager is in Continuous Capture Mode a number of images equivalent to the maximum number of the rapid count minus 3 Serial Cmd lt K244 image storage type image storage mode gt Default Disabled Clear Options 0 Disabled Clear 1 Store on No Read Disabled Clear Upon selection of this option all saved images will be cleared and the imager will not s
310. peed Shutter Speed Configuration Database Shutter Speed Optical Density Shutter Speed Disabled Shutter Speed Enabled Single Beep Position 1 Single Descriptor Status Request Single Range Status Request Single Row Single Status Request Sizing Information Skew Skip EZ Mode Software Defaults Special OCR Character Standard Standard Density Optics Standard Format Standard Mode Start Stop Match Codabar Start Stop Output Codabar Start Location Start Trigger Character Non Delimited Start Stop Status Statement of Agency Compliance Static Presentation Mode Status Byte Stop Stop Bits Auxiliary Port Quadrus MINI Velocity User s Manual Index 21 S Stop Bits Host Port Stop Trigger Character Non Delimited Store on No Read Store Report without file path prompt Straight Line Straight Line Framed Strip OCR Checksum Strobe Substrate Supplemental Type UPC EAN Supplementals Status UPC EAN Switch Mode Switch Model Symbol Angle Data Matrix Only Symbol Contrast Symbol Contrast Threshold Symbol Data Output Symbol Data Output Status Symbol Length 1 Interleaved 2 of 5 Symbol Length 2 Interleaved 2 of 5 Symbol Length Codabar Symbol Length Code 93 Symbol Number Symbol Parse Symbol Quality Symbol Quality by ESP Symbol Quality Separator Symbol Quality Separator Data Matrix Output Mode Symbol Quality Separator by ESP Symbol Quality Serial Commands Symb
311. ple Density Density Measurement U S Post 80 310 dots per inch USPS4cB dd 3150 12205 dots per meter e 86 332 dots per inch A lia P e 3386 13071 dots per meter 84 324 dots per inch P sapan Os 3307 12756 dots per meter a 82 317 dots per inch Royal Mail KIX arse 3228 12489 dots per meter UPU 80 310 dots per inch 3150 12205 dots per meter Serial Cmd lt K460 postal symbology type POSTNET status PLANET status USPS4CB status POSTNET allow B and B fields Australia Post allow 0 FCC gt Default Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 U S Post POSTNET PLANET USPS4CB 2 Australia Post 3 Japan Post 4 Royal Mail 5 KIX 6 UPU 6 30 Quadrus MINI Velocity User s Manual Symbologies U S Post POSTNET PLANET USPS4CB When U S Post is enabled lt K460 1 gt the imager will only decode POSTNET PLANET and USPS4CB symbols Important POSTNET Status PLANET Status and USPS4CB Status are enabled by default However if any of the three U S Post symbologies is set to disabled individually symbols of that type will not be decoded by the imager even when U S Post is enabled For example if U S Post is enabled but POSTNET Status is disabled lt K460 1 0 gt POSTNET symbols will not be decoded by the imager See POSTNET Status PLANET Status and USPS4CB Status for more detail about U S Post symbologies Australia Post When Australia Post is enabled lt K460 2 gt the imager will only decode Au
312. press and release the EZ Button Calibrate Calibration will be initiated when the associated button position is selected To abort calibration quickly press and release the EZ Button Save for Power On All imager settings will be saved to non volatile memory to be recalled on power on whenever the associated button position is selected This is the same as sending a lt Z gt from the Terminal Load New Master Functions in the same way as new master pin input whenever the associated button position is selected The new master pin s Consecutive Decode requirement holds true for this function Quadrus MINI Velocity User s Manual 7 29 EZ Button Modes Target System Turns on the target pattern whenever the associated button position is selected To disable quickly press and release the EZ Button Note This mode is the only one that does not require that the button be released before taking effect Thus as soon as the imager beeps the appropriate number of times for the position it will take effect If it is necessary to have the target system on before another operation such as calibration or read rate is performed ensure that the target system mode is assigned a lower position so that it will be activated first Bar Code Configuration Enables bar code configuration mode whenever the associated button position is selected When enabled the imager can accept configuration commands from symbols To disable quickly press and
313. put Checks first for decodes If no symbol is decoded checks for symbol orientation If Orientation Value is satisfied a Bad Symbol message is output If not satisfied a No Symbol message is output Object Qualification Checks first for matches to symbol Orientation Value If qualified attempts to decode If no decodes are found within the specified read cycle parameters outputs a No Read message Enable Both Same as Object Qualification except that if Orientation Value is satisfied but the symbol is not decoded then a Bad Symbol message is output if not satisfied a Bad Symbol message is still output 7 16 Quadrus MINI Velocity User s Manual Orientation Value Usage Definition Serial Cmd Default Options Instructs the imager to ignore symbols not in the specified orientation Sets the orientation of the symbol in degrees clockwise from the default 0 orientation For Data Matrix symbols sets the finder L pattern with the example to the right showing the default 0 orientation For QR Code sets the locator pattern three squares with the example to the right showing the default 0 orientation The other position settings will rotate clockwise from the defaults shown above I O Parameters ai L finder pattern p gt Data Matrix A Three Three square Fal n 4 m QR Code Es Ami lt K718 finder pattern status symbol size mode symbol size 1 symbol si
314. quick press and release of the EZ Button The command to exit Bar Code Configuration Mode can be included as part of the Data Matrix symbol For example try encoding lt K200 4 gt lt K220 1 gt lt J gt into a Data Matrix symbol This configures the imager to enable Serial Trigger Mode to program a new trigger to end the read cycle and to exit Bar Code Configuration Mode with lt J gt To end all EZ Button functions press the EZ Button once and quickly release 1 In normal reading modes it is required to read a special Data Matrix symbol with a special codeword used by ISO IEC 16022 to signify imager programming Quadrus MINI Velocity User s Manual 13 23 Other Operational Serial Commands 13 24 Quadrus MINI Velocity User s Manual MS 14 Output Format Contents Output Format Serial Commands isidi rniii nsina datiden eia ed aa iida ia 14 2 Output Format Status is iiss EAE ATEA ET E EET 14 3 FOrMat ASSIM di E E E T 14 4 ROEA Aie E A eee 14 5 OE INSOLE EE AAEE TET T A 14 7 Output Filter Configura a aei ara eaaa sal ae a aae oA AAEE TARNE en h e en iain 14 9 Ordered Output i ml EEE EEE EEA TA A 14 13 This section explains how to control the formatting and filtering of decoded symbol data for output Quadrus MINI Velocity User s Manual 14 1 Output Format Serial Commands Output Format Serial Commands Format Extract lt K740 output index start location length gt Format Insert lt K741 outpu
315. r see the corresponding chapters in this manual Quadrus MINI Velocity User s Manual 2 3 Menu Toolbar Menu Toolbar File gt New Whenever New is selected the default configuration of ESP is loaded Open Save When Save or Save As is selected the ESP configuration is saved to the host computer s hard drive and available whenever the same file is selected under Open Important When you save menu changes to your hard drive these changes are not saved to your imager The illustration below shows how settings can be saved and received between ESP and the imager and ESP and the host hard drive DS Save to Imager A Receive Imager Settings Import Export File New Open Save Save S Print Import Export Recent File Exit Ctrl N Ctrl 0 Ctrl S Ctrl P Import converts the ASCII settings from a text file to ESP configuration settings Export converts the active ESP configuration settings to an ASCII text file 2 4 Quadrus MINI Velocity User s Manual Using ESP Model In the Model menu you can select any of the models supported by ESP When you choose a different model the connection to your present model will be terminated EIA Quadrus MINI Yelocity 1 New Model Remove Model To connect to another model select New Model choose a new model from the pop up menu that appears and click OK Note When you save an ESP file you are saving the s
316. r to be used in the data output field when performing a data filter comparison The wildcard character represents the end of matching and allows for variable lengths of symbol output Serial Cmd lt K744 filter number symbology type length wildcard placeholder data unused database index gt Default lt 2A in hex Options Any ASCII input in the form of a pair of hex characters Example 2A 00 disabled See ASCII Character Entry Modifier on page 3 32 for a detailed explanation of how to enter ASCII characters as hex values Placeholder Definition The placeholder character requires a character to be present but does not compare the data value Serial Cmd lt K744 filter number symbology type length wildcard placeholder data unused database index gt Default 2 3F in hex Options Any ASCII input in the form of a pair of hex characters Example 3F 00 disabled See ASCII Character Entry Modifier on page 3 32 for a detailed explanation of how to enter ASCII characters as hex values Quadrus MINI Velocity User s Manual 14 11 Output Filter Configuration Data Definition Serial Cmd Default Options This is the data string to be used when comparing symbol data for output filtering and ordering This data string may also contain wildcard and placeholder characters to facilitate matching Remember that in order to filter or order symbol data it must meet all the requi
317. rabber A device that interfaces with a camera and on command samples the video converts the sample to a digital value and stores that in a computer s memory Front End System The object illumination optics and imager blocks of a vision system Includes all components useful to acquire a good image for subsequent processing Full Duplex A communications system in which signals can travel simultaneously between devices Gain The amount of energy applied to pixel gray scale values prior to output expressed in dB optimal signal strength Good Read A decode The successful scanning and decoding of the information encoded in a bar code symbol Gradient The rate of change of pixel intensity first derivative Gray Scale Variations of values from white through shades of gray to black in a digitized image with black assigned the value of zero and white the value of one Quaarus MINI Velocity User s Manual A 31 Glossary of Terms Half Duplex A communications system in which signals can travel between devices in both directions but not simultaneously Histogram A graphical representation of the frequency of occurrence of each intensity or range of intensities gray levels of pixels in an image The height represents the number of observations occurring in each interval Host A computer PLC or other device that is used to execute commands and process data and discrete signals Image
318. rable It is automatically set up by the database according to the ROI settings row pointer column pointer column size Camera WOI Full Image Size 752 x 480 Note Since the ROI parameters are not a camera setting a change in ROI parameters from one index to another does not indicate an image capture event This feature is intended to be used in conjunction with Image Process Looping to allow different regions of a captured image to be processed using different IP and decode settings Also ifthis feature is used in conjunction with Output Filtering multiple decoded symbols in a captured image frame can be output according to their location in the field of view 11 14 Quadrus MINI Velocity User s Manual Configuration Database Region of Interest ROI by ESP When Image Dimensions is set to Region of Interest the database image dimension parameters are IP and decode settings and they determine the region or area of the captured image to be processed Video Evaluation Calibration WO Configuration Database Dynamic Setup Active Indexes 5 v IV Auto Sync Database settings with Reader Advanced Options ooo fao E E foco Jo Co Jo foo Jo GY 000 Jo Jaco Joso Capture Settings lt lt WOl ROI gt gt a a 0 eo rao en ie cl ie Processing Settings Disabled Tes Test Test 10 fiooo feo foo Disabl o p po fps fAdapti 128 Stand Disabl fwh
319. rameter only affects the internal passport template It is ignored by all other OCR templates Serial Cmd lt K461 status active template orientation single row background uncertain characters strip checksum special character passport checksum gt Default Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Quadrus MINI Velocity User s Manual 6 43 OCR Configuration Strip Checksum Definition Serial Cmd Default Options When Strip Checksum is enabled checksums are not included in the decoded OCR string Note In symbols where any checksum calculations fail no output is generated lt K461 status active template orientation single row background uncertain characters strip checksum special character passport checksum gt Disabled 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Special Character Definition Serial Cmd Default Options When Special Character is enabled period characters in OCR text strings are not output lt K461 status active template orientation single row background uncertain characters strip checksum special character passport checksum gt Disabled 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Passport Checksum Definition Serial Cmd Default Options 6 44 When Passport Checksum is enabled the checksum is not calculated for machine readable travel documents such as Passports and Visas lt K461 status active template orientation single row backgrounad uncertain characters strip checks
320. rast Enabled lt gq _____ Print Growth Disabled The enabled Symbol Axial Non uniformity Disabled Quality parameters are Unused ECC Disabled appended to symbol data Grading output in the order that they Percent Cell Damage Disabled appear in the tree control Capture Time Enabled lt q Locate Time Enabled lt q Decode Time Enabled lt q Pixels Per Element Enabled lt g _ ECC Level Disabled Matrix Size Disabled Quiet Zone Disabled Symbol Angle Disabled If you enable the outputs shown above they will be returned Locate Time in this order Microscan Grading Symbol Symbol Contrast Decode Time Data ISO IEC 16022 Microscan Grading 0123456789abcdefghijkImnopqrstuv 256 A 30 210 3 17 LI Total Pixels Per Element Read Time Microscan Grading Capture Time Microscan Grading Quadrus MINI Velocity User s Manual 8 3 Symbol Quality by ESP Symbol Quality by ESP Tree Control Parameters ESP Values we Symbol Quality App Mode Global lt a _ To open nested options single click the Click this button Data Matrix to bring up the ISOJIEC 16022 Parameters App Mode view Symbol Contrast Disabled Print Growth Disabled Axial Non uniformity Disabled 4 Unused ECC Disabled Grading Symbol Quality Percent Cell Damage Disabled Capture Time Disabled Click this button to bri
321. rational Serial Commands Other Operational Serial Commands The following serial utility commands can be entered from ESP s Terminal or a PLC Y Modem Upload Transfer Options lt uy path filename gt Y Wodem Download Transfer Options lt dy path filename gt Image Library Request lt op 9 gt Manages files in a selected directory File Source Explanation Nothing All files in root directory All files in root directory saved All files in saved directory be All files in all directories del Deletes all files in the root director saved del Deletes all files in the saved directory del Deletes files in all directories White Balance Calibration lt WB gt The Quadrus MINI Velocity s factory default values are appropriate for nearly all applications However the White Balance calibration command will override the pre configured values if necessary White Balance is a processing operation performed to ensure proper color fidelity in a captured digital image The image sensor does not detect light in exactly the same way as the human eye which means that some processing or correction of the detected image is necessary to ensure that the final image realistically represents the colors of the original image White Balance calibration works best if a white object a piece of paper for example is placed in front of the imager White and black objects can be pre
322. re trigger filter duration In a level mode the trailing edge is filtered such that on the falling edge the state must be held for the trigger filter duration before the trigger will be deemed inactive Serial Cmd lt K200 trigger mode leading edge trigger filter trailing edge trigger filter gt Default 31 1 ms Options 1 to 65535 Trigger filter range 32 0 us to 2 10 seconds 5 10 Quadrus MINI Velocity User s Manual Read Cycle External Trigger Polarity Usage Allows users to select the trigger polarity that will be used in their application Definition Determines the active state of the trigger signal applied to the cable input of the imager Serial Cmd lt K202 active state gt Default Positive Options 0 Negative 1 Positive Quadrus MINI Velocity User s Manual 5 11 Serial Trigger Serial Trigger Usage Definition Allows the user to define the trigger character and delimiters that start and stop the read cycle A serial trigger is considered an online host command and requires the same command format as all host commands It must be entered within angle bracket delimiters lt gt or in the case of non delimited triggers it must define individual start and stop characters Serial Trigger Character Delimited Usage Definition Serial Cmd Default Options Allows the user to define the trigger character that initiates the read cycle A single ASCII host serial trigger character that
323. release the EZ Button 7 30 Quadrus MINI Velocity User s Manual I O Parameters EZ Button Operation To execute EZ Button commands Single Beep Position 1 Hold down button until a single beep is heard and the 20 LED illuminates Two Beeps Position 2 Hold down button until two quick beeps are heard and the 20 and 40 LEDs illuminate Three Beeps Position 3 Hold down button until three quick beeps are heard and the 20 40 and 60 LEDs illuminate Four Beeps Position 4 Hold down button until four quick beeps are heard and the 20 40 60 and 80 LEDs illuminate Quadrus MINI Velocity User s Manual 7 31 Configurable Output 1 Configurable Output 1 Output 1 Parameters Output On Trend Analysis Output State Negative Pulse Width 5 Output Mode Pulse Trend Analysis Symbol Quality ISO IEC 16022 Diagnostics Usage This option provides discrete signalling to host software to control external devices such as PLCs and relays It is useful for routing sorting and to prevent mis packaging and mis routing Definition Sets the discrete output functions for specific user selected conditions Allows the user to set the conditions under which an output or outputs will be activated Serial Cmd lt K810 output on output state pulse width output mode gt Default Mismatch or No Read Options 0 Mismatch or No Read 1 Match or Good Read 2 Mismatch 3 No Read 4 Trend
324. rements of the selected filter index Examples e Filter data 123 This will match data strings of 123 123456 and 123ABC but not 12 Filter data 123 AB C This will be interpreted as 123 Filter data 123 This will match 1234 and 123A but not 123 12345 or 12340 Filter data 1232A This will match 1234A and 123BA but not 123 1234C or 1234ABCD Filter data 123 A This will match 1234AB and 123BAT but not 1234A or 123BATS Filter data 12 This will match 1234 123456 and 123ABC but not 12 or 123 Filter data 123 A This will match 1234A 123BA and 123BATS but not 1234 or 1234C lt K744 filter number symbology type length wildcard placeholder data unused database index gt NUL 00 in hex Any ASCII input in the form of a pair of hex characters Maximum length 63 bytes defined Examples 41422A AB Data 0 NUL represents string matching disabled See ASCII Character Entry Modifier on page 3 32 for a detailed explanation of how to enter ASCII characters as hex values Database Index Definition Serial Cmd Default Options 14 12 The index of the database entry that decodes a given symbol must equal this setting for filtering to occur A setting of 0 all
325. rent Quadrus MINI Velocity User s Manual Communications Half Duplex Mode Usage Useful when the user wants symbol data displayed on an auxiliary menu close to the imager Definition In Half Duplex Mode all auxiliary port data and symbol data is sent directly to the host Symbol data is displayed on the auxiliary port menu at the same time the data is sent to the host Data Originating from the Auxiliary Port Auxiliary port data to the host is ignored if the imager is in a polled mode Aux Al Host Port Auxiliary port data or read data is sent to the host whenever it is received Y Auxiliary port data is not echoed E Auxiliary port data to the host is always sent mage without a preamble or postamble Data Originating from the Imager e Data is transmitted to the auxiliary port at the same time it is transmitted to the host Host Aux ere Port e Data transmission conforms with all parameters specified in the configuration menu e g Preamble y Y Postamble End of Read Cycle sua 3 Imager Data Originating from the Host All host data is echoed to the auxiliary port in unpolled mode A Host Port A Imager Serial Cmd lt K101 aux port mode baud rate parity stop bits data bits daisy chain i d status daisy chain i d gt Options 2 Half Duplex Quadrus MINI Velocity User s Manual 3 13 Auxiliary Port Connections
326. res images at a rate of 60 per second based on a full size 752 x 480 image The frame rate increases as the frame size decreases Note If you need to set up your Quadrus MINI Velocity for use with EZ Trax software see Setting Up the Imager for EZ Trax Quadrus MINI Velocity User s Manual Read Cycle Multisymbol Usage Multisymbol is commonly used in shipping applications where a shipping symbol contains individual symbols for part number quantity etc This feature allows on trigger to pick up all the symbols Definition Multisymbol allows the user to define up to 100 symbols that can be read in a single read cycle Conditions The following conditions apply e Each symbol must be different to be read unless in Rapid Capture Mode configured for triggered capture The maximum number of characters in a read cycle is 3 000 for all symbols All No Read messages are posted at the end of the data string unless output filtering is enabled If more than one symbol is within the field of view at the same time symbol data may not be displayed in the order of appearance If Matchcode Type is set to Sequential or if Trigger is set to Continuous Read 1 Output the imager will behave as if Number of Symbols were set to 1 regardless of the user defined configuration Number of Symbols Definition Number of Symbols is the number of different symbols that can be read in a single read cycle Serial Cmd lt K222 number
327. rest Reset Capture and Decode Top 0 Height 1024 No Decode o wan izo Note To remove the window of interest click the Reset button or click anywhere in the WOI pane Note that all pixels not in the WOI are defined as black Because the imager has far less processing to do in a smaller window read rates typically increase dramatically One possible downside is that the chance of missing a symbol increases with the smaller window Always verify that your WOI will be large enough to allow for any random movement of symbols in your field of view Quadrus MINI Velocity User s Manual 10 11 Window of Interest Window of Interest by Serial Command The figure below shows where to locate the start position of the row and column pointers A and how to measure the column depth and WOI Row Pointer row width dimensions As the WOI is reduced the frame rate will __ A increase However the imager has a minimum wo column row time that must be maintained and column Pointer width values below 617 will not cause any further increase in frame rate This restriction does not apply to Row Depth Top Row Pointer Definition Defines the row position of the WOI Column Width upper left starting point of the window Serial lt K516 row pointer column Cmd pointer row depth column width gt Default 0 Options 0 to 480
328. rocess and it must be configured appropriately prior to calibration Gain Definition When enabled gain will be calibrated to provide the best available image quality and performance When disabled gain is fixed and is not part of the calibration process Serial Cmd lt K529 gain shutter speed focus position symbol type WO framing WOI margin line scan height processing gt Default Enabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Shutter Speed Definition Unless an application is a static setup the shutter speed setting should be configured by the user based on the application For dynamic applications the user should configure the shutter speed setting so the calibration process can optimize the gain for that setting Serial Cmd lt K529 gain shutter speed focus position symbol type WOI framing WOI margin line scan height processing gt Default Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled 2 Fast Shutter Note The following table shows general guidelines for shutter soeed configurations based on various line speeds The configurations shown depend on the imager s optical configuration and on symbol element size Shutter Speed Line Speed 0 250 static 250 750 5 sec 750 1500 10 sec 1500 2000 15 sec 2000 2500 20 sec Quadrus MINI Velocity User s Manual 4 3 Calibration Options Disabled Shutter Speed When this feature is disabled the shutter sp
329. rs For lt lt K473h 3C gt For gt lt K473h 3E gt For lt K473h 2C gt See ASCII Character Entry Modifier on page 3 32 for a detailed explanation of how to enter ASCII characters as hex values Quadrus MINI Velocity User s Manual 6 25 UPC EAN Supplemental Type UPC EAN Usage As required by symbology used in application Definition Allows the user to select 2 character or 5 character supplements or both Serial Cmd lt K473 UPC status EAN status supplementals status separator status separator character supplemental type format UPC E as UPC A gt Default Both Options 0 Both 1 2 characters only 2 5 characters only Both Either 2 character or 5 character supplementals will be considered valid 2 Characters Only Only two character supplementals will be considered valid 5 Characters Only Only five character supplementals will be considered valid Format UPC E as UPC A UPC EAN Definition When disabled the imager will output the version E symbols in their encoded 6 character format When enabled the imager will format the symbol as either a 12 character UPC A symbol or an EAN 13 symbol depending on the state of the EAN status parameter This formatting reverses the zero suppression that is used to generate the symbol in the UPC specification Serial Cmd lt K473 UPC status EAN status supplementals status separator status separator character supplemental type format UPC
330. rus MINI Velocity User s Manual es 6 Sy mbologies Contents SN nterne 6 2 Symbologies Serial CoMMANAS ocooconccicnononocnnonnnnnonanrn cnn tee eeee eae eeae eee seeteeseaeseeseaeseeeeaeseeseaeeeeeeaeeas 6 3 Dala Mat X ata 6 4 PZTOC COU Goi aera psec O A ANE TE T A 6 6 O A e 6 7 lla 1 A E 6 8 A O e 6 9 Code 128 EAN 128 ici da iii 6 12 BOM did di 6 15 ICE A A EET 6 16 e TE 6 19 A A E EA E 6 20 WT E E A E A T E A EE E 6 23 AEE eS e ei E E a E T 6 27 Postal Symbologi ESk ari neeaae Rate ida 6 29 GS1 DataBar RSS iii a 6 34 PDFS Tit A oe A en eae elt ae 6 36 Micro PDF 1 7 reirei renren e ei teeren E E a E ate Gelade as 6 38 COMPOSE ronin eee iara e aa A AE e a ae e eee a eea aaiae TiS 6 39 OCR Configuration assessino erage sae e 6 40 OCR User Template iveco ne lanai del fates AAG e te 6 45 OCR Configuration Dy ESP hiersie ath adda hie eles 6 47 Narrow Margins Symbology Identifier ecceeceseceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeceaeesaeessaeesaeeseeeeeeeseaeeeeeeeaees 6 49 Background Colorines 6 51 This section describes the various symbol types that can be read and decoded by the Quadrus MINI Velocity See the following sites for additional information about linear and 2D symbologies http www aimglobal org standards aimpubs asp hitp barcodes gs1us org dnn_bcec Default aspx tabid 82 Quadrus MINI Velocity User s Manual 6 1 Symbologies by ESP Symbologies by ESP gt App Mode Click this button to bring up the App M
331. s Default on Power On You can also use the EZ Button to default the reader by holding it down while applying power to the reader provided that this feature is enabled Quadrus MINI Velocity User s Manual 13 19 Imager Status Requests Imager Status Requests lt gt Status Byte The imager responds to a status request lt gt with a two character hex value such as lt 22 gt To determine status 1 Look up the binary conversion in the table below For example the first hex 2 would be 0 0 1 0 in binary as read from binary digits 3 through 0 the second hex 2 is also 0 0 1 0 as read from binary digits 7 through 4 2 Next enter your binary values from the table below in the Binary column next to the appropriate bit Binge Bit Binary Imager Status Hex Bit Digits 0 O Command error detected Value HEEE 1 1 Command received 2 O Communication error detected H E A 4 0 3 0 Flash sector unprotect failure 2 ololi1io 4 0 Host Aux port buffer overflow 3 0 0 1 1 ag 4 0 1 0 0 5 1 Imager is in a read cycle 5 ol1 ol4 6 0 1 1 0 3 Under Binary interpret 1s as true and Os as not true For 7 01111 example bit 1 has a 1 in the Binary column indicating q i e A Command Received Bit 5 is also a 1 indicating that the A 1 0 14 0 Imager is in a read cycle e MIS D 1 1 0 1 E 1111110 lt K gt All Status Request ee This is the fastest way to
332. s During the calibration process the imager has a number of ways to communicate its progress to the user The following three types of feedback are the primary ways that the imager communicates calibration progress Read Rate LEDs When calibration is initiated through a serial command or the EZ Button the imager s Read Rate LEDs indicate calibration progress as follows LEDs Calibration Progress 20 Search Pass in progress 20 40 Focus Pass in progress 20 40 60 Medium Pass in progress 20 40 60 80 Fine Tune Pass in progress 20 40 60 80 100 Calibrated Successfully holds for green flash duration Calibrated Successfully po 100 5000 D Fine Tune Pass p gt B Focus Pass p gt Search Pass pf Medium Pass Beeper Green Flash The beeper and green LED flash are used to indicate calibration status as shown in the table below Indicator Status 2 quick beeps Calibration has started 5 quick beeps Calibration has failed 1 long beep Calibration has been completed successfully 1 sec Green Flash Calibration has been completed successfully 4 14 Quadrus MINI Velocity User s Manual Calibration Calibration Progress Output to Terminal When initiated by serial command or EZ Button the calibration operation will output progress and process information to a terminal if the system is configured to do so Term
333. s However when the search process is completed the WOI will be reduced to include only the symbol of interest and some additional boundary area Quadrus MINI Velocity User s Manual 4 19 Additional Notes about Calibration 4 20 Quadrus MINI Velocity User s Manual ee 5 Read Cycle Contents Read Cycle by ESP iii s ds 5 2 Read Cycle Serial COMMANAS cceeceeeceeeseeeeeeeeaeeeeaeeeaeeeseeseaeeeseeeaeeeaeeeaeesseeseaessaeeseaeetseeteaeeees 5 3 Read Cycle Setup tii da a a dt ead ae 5 4 Multisymbol ociosa traia 5 5 Trigger Mode and Filter DuratiON oooocconccononcccnnonccnnnanonnnrnnononcnnnnrn corn n cnn nn cnn nr rre n rra nnn rre 5 6 External Trigger Polarity common ci ie 5 11 A hia id ei SI RL le tte aed tadlie badd og had 5 12 Start Trigger Character Non Delimited ccecceeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseaeeeaeesaeeeaeeseeeseeeseeeeaes 5 13 Stop Trigger Character Non Delimited 00 2 0 ceeeeeeceeeeeeeneeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeesaeeseeeeeaeeseaeeeaeensaee 5 14 End of Redd Cycles cnc ssa ee Ae IA a de el ee ee ee dd 5 15 GapturetMode 0 oil A RI a BL ai land iy 5 17 Capture Timing acc Site Bee Ril i lid ei 5 22 Image Processing Him Out 2 is c ccie seek epiea bea cee aaea anaana Eanan an aE leg Hesccerenecebe coed des haste 5 24 Mage Storage relat wha Hebe SL a ad a ae 5 25 Minimum Good Reads cio thst ts Ne SAR a a ee he ds 5 27 Compare Mode iia niches Saree aa Masai 5 28 Setting Up the Imager
334. s data bits daisy chain i d status daisy chain i d gt Default 115 2K Options 0 600 1 1200 2 2400 3 4800 4 9600 5 19 2K 6 38 4K 7 57 6K 8 115 2K 9 230K 3 10 Quadrus MINI Velocity User s Manual Communications Parity Auxiliary Port Usage Only changed if necessary to match host setting Definition An error detection routine in which one data bit in each character is set to 1 or 0 so that the total number of 1 bits in the data field is even or odd Serial Cmd lt K101 aux port mode baud rate parity stop bits data bits daisy chain i d status daisy chain i d gt Default None Options 0 None 1 Even 2 Odd Stop Bits Auxiliary Port Usage Only changed if necessary to match host setting Definition Allows the user to select the last one or two bits in each character to indicate the end of the character Serial Cmd lt K101 aux port mode baud rate parity stop bits data bits daisy chain i d status daisy chain i d gt Default One Options 0 One 1 Two Data Bits Auxiliary Port Usage Only changed if necessary to match host setting Definition Number of bits in each character Serial Cmd lt K101 aux port mode baud rate parity stop bits data bits daisy chain i d status daisy chain i d gt Default Eight Options 0 Seven 1 Eight Quadrus MINI Velocity User s Manual 3 11 Auxiliary Port Connections Transparent Mode Usage Definition Serial Cm
335. s Terminal window Quadrus MINI Velocity User s Manual 3 1 Communications by ESP Communications by ESP J App Mode Click this button to bring up the App Mode view a Communication Click this button to bring up the Communication tree control 3 2 Parameters Communications RS232 422 Host Port R5232 Auxiliary Port USB HID Report Status Preamble Postamble Response Timeout LRC Status E Aux Port System Data Status ESP Values Disabled Enabled 12 Disabled Disabled v To open nested options single click the Enabled To change a setting double click the setting and use your cursor to scroll through the options Quadrus MINI Velocity User s Manual Communications Communications Serial Commands Host Port Connections lt K100 baud rate parity stop bits data bits gt Auxiliary Port Connections lt K101 aux port mode baud rate parity stop bits data bits daisy chain ID status daisy chain ID gt RS 422 Status lt K102 status gt Host Port Protocol lt K140 protocol address gt Preamble lt K141 status oreamble characters gt Postamble lt K142 status postamble characters gt Response Timeout lt K143 response timeout gt LRC lt K145 status gt Auxiliary Port System Data Status lt K146 aux port system data status gt ACK NAK Options lt K147 RES REQ STX ETX ACK NAK gt
336. s by ESP Counters by Serial Command Customer Default Parameters Cycle Max Cycle Min Cycle Step D DAC Daisy Chain Daisy Chain Autoconfigure Daisy Chain ID Daisy Chain ID Status Daisy Chain Mode Damaged Symbol Darkfield Illumination Data Data Bits Auxiliary Port Data Bits Host Port Data Matrix Data Matrix Add 2 Data Matrix Grading Data Matrix Output Mode Data Originating from the Auxiliary Port Full Duplex Mode Data Originating from the Auxiliary Port Half Duplex Mode Data Originating from the Host Full Duplex Mode Data Originating from the Host Half Duplex Mode Data Originating from the Host Transparent Mode Data Originating from the Imager Full Duplex Mode Data Originating from the Imager Half Duplex Mode Data Originating from the Imager Transparent Mode DataBar Expanded Add 32768 DataBar Expanded RSS Expanded DataBar Limited DataBar Limited Add 16384 Quadrus MINI Velocity User s Manual Index D DataBar 14 DataBar 14 Add 8192 Database Identifier Output Database Index Database Mode Database Sort Decode Decode Rate Decode Time Decodes per Trigger Status Decodes Trigger Threshold Decrement Focus Position Default Default Reset Save Default Macros Default on Power On Default Settings Defaulting Delete Master Symbol Data Delimited Depth of Field Detailed No Read Message Device Control Device Control by ESP Device Control by Serial Command Diagn
337. s i ie da alan 2 15 Send Receive Options ccccescecsceceseeeseeeeaeeeeeeeeaeeeeeseaeeeaeessaeeeaeesaees 2 16 USING EZ ini 5 ks bor ec eA i hs ess ot 2 18 Chapter 3 Communications Communications by ESP a aeo eeart eaa aaee aos Aae reS Ara E ESA EAS 3 2 Communications Serial Commands eeceeceeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeseeeeaees 3 3 Host Port CONNECIIONS tica aia trata 3 4 Host Port Protocol ccicontoia call eaS anie 3 5 ACK NAK Opticas iaa dd ia ation 3 7 Polling Mode Options wiii ad 3 8 RS 422 Status ica 3 9 Auxiliary Port Connections 0oooocccinccnnnccoccconccnncnnnncnnornn nc conc crac 3 10 Auxiliary Port System Data Status ooooncccinccnnninnnccnncnncccnnccnnrnnancnnncnnnnns 3 18 Daisy Chain Autoconfigure cecceeeceeseseeeeneeeeeeeeeeeneeseeeeeneeeeaeeeneensaee 3 19 Response Timeout cirein a a n 3 20 LAOS einioes usiri A N 3 21 Protocol Configuration Examples ceccceseeseeseeeeeeeeseeeeneeseeeenneraee 3 22 USB HID Interface coin 3 23 ASCII Character Entry Modifier ccceeceesecseeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeneeeeees 3 32 Preamble iii he ee eve Pe 3 33 PostaMDle comisaria ei eee lane 3 34 Chapter 4 Calibration Calibration Serial COMMANAS ceecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeseeeeeaeeeeeeteeeeeaeeesaeeeaees 4 2 iv Quadrus MINI Velocity User s Manual Introduction Calibration Overview sucio rro 4 2 Galibrati n Options ss ica it rior 4 3 Galibration by ESP risiini noa aa e a e aa Ea 4 11 Init
338. s long as it does not exceed the Number of Master Symbols parameter lt K225 status gt Disabled 0 Disabled 1 Enabled New Master Load Status Definition Serial Cmd 9 12 The new master status responds with the number of the next master position to be loaded where 0 represents idle or no master to be loaded Example lf the user has the Number of Master Symbols set to 1 and then either sends a lt G gt or toggles an active New Master Pin the state will be 1 and prior to reading and effectively loading position 1 the response to lt NEWM gt would be lt NEWM 1 gt Once a symbol has been read and loaded the status will be cleared lt NEWM 0 gt lt NEWM gt Quadrus MINI Velocity User s Manual E70 Camera and IP Setup Contents Gamera and IP Setup by ESP e erara oaaao ea otto Test sieecatsevdpcte festaaceasickigthateatasivass 10 2 Camera and IP Setup Serial COMMANAS cesceeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeaeeeaeeseaeeeaeeseeeeeeeseeeenaes 10 3 MIO stisse tii te ee A nt fee ee A eee 10 4 EVI OMA AA At en eae 10 5 CalibratiON si A Stree SE eee 10 9 Window of Interest cimil Aa 10 10 Configuration Database scien eee lye eel eh 10 13 Dynamic Setu pteridine a A LAS 10 14 Camera Feature iii nena ii Aa ellie aria Aiea deal 10 15 Camera Settings iii ta 10 17 Focal Distante Lies ca Sei eat Ae ae is ete eee 10 18 Focal Distance Table Read Only 000 eeececceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeaeeeeeeeeae
339. s very similar to the Format Extract process except that Insert allows you to enter characters using the Insertion Calculator shown above l Parse Symbols Send and Save Y Hide Parse Table Build Sequence Insert Extract Test Insert Data Extract Range Insert SP SP Extract 3 5 Notice that Extract and Insert share the same Parse Table Sample Symbol Parse Symbol Parse Stp Insert Data Extract Range Add Step Remove Step Clear All Parsing Sample Symbol Parse Original micro Original ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPGRSTUVWxv201 23456789 Output cro lt Output CDE caresi 14 8 Quadrus MINI Velocity User s Manual Output Format Output Filter Configuration Definition Output filtering is a method of providing a set of good read qualifiers and also providing ordered output There is a filter for up to the first 10 positions in a multisymbol output The first filter corresponds to the first symbol output at the end of the read cycle Each filter has has settings for the following four parameters Symbology Type Symbol Length Data and Configuration Database Number Serial Cmd lt K744 filter number symbology type length wildcard placeholder data unused database index gt Rules for Output Filter Configuration Output Filter Configuration Rule 1 Each symbol that is decoded must match one of the filters before it can be sa
340. s you to modify the font used for decode data received from the imager on the Terminal screen Change Echo Font Allows you to modify the font used for command characters typed into the Terminal view Enable Echo Allows you to enter command characters in Terminal Display Incoming Data Even When Not in Focus When Display Incoming Data Even When Not in Focus is enabled data from the imager will continue to appear in the Terminal even when ESP is not the top window Quadrus MINI Velocity User s Manual 2 7 Menu Toolbar Preferences gt Bar Code Options Tab Preferences General Terminal Bar Code Options Advanced Sizing Information Bar Width 114 Mils E Example Default Settings The Bar Code Options dialog allows you to set the size of user created symbols Sizing Information Sets the bar width or module width in mils or thousandths of an inch of user created symbols Example A bar width of 14 is 0 014 inches 2 8 Quadrus MINI Velocity User s Manual Using ESP Preferences gt Advanced Tab Preferences General Terminal Bar Code Options Advanced Auto Syne When entering a view that supports Auto Sync do the following I Always Ask Before Auto Sync Occurs Receive Settings from the Reader C Send ESP Settings to the Reader C Do Not Send or Receive Settings V Show Target Pattern During Locate Send ON with Autoconnect M Show Target Pattern During Calibrate Y Ask to Save ESP File when Quittin
341. sary to match host setting Definition One or two bits added to the end of each character to indicate the end of the character Serial Cmd lt K100 baud rate parity stop bits data bits gt Default Eight Options 0 Seven 1 Eight Note See USB HID Interface on page 3 23 for protocol information relating to USB 3 4 Quadrus MINI Velocity User s Manual Communications Host Port Protocol Usage In general the point to point protocols will work well in most applications They require no address and must use RS 232 or RS 422 communications standards Definition Protocols define the sequence and format in which information is transferred between the reader and the host or in the case of Multidrop between the readers and a concentrator Serial Cmd lt K140 protocol address gt Default Point to Point Options 0 Point to Point 1 Point to Point with RTS CTS 2 Point to Point with XON XOFF 3 Point to Point with RTS CTS and XON XOFF 4 ACK NAK 5 Polling Mode Note In all protocol modes the preamble lt K141 gt and postamble lt K142 gt character strings can be used to frame the decode data and both are included in calculating the LRC Longitudinal Redundancy Check Point to Point Standard Usage Used only with RS 232 or RS 422 Definition Standard Point to Point requires no address and sends the data to the host whenever it is available without a request or handshake from the host Serial Cmd lt K1
342. sent in the field of view during White Balance calibration but no color objects can be present 13 22 Quadrus MINI Velocity User s Manual Utilities Bar Code Configuration Mode Definition Bar Code Configuration Mode is a way of programming the imager by using ECC 200 Data Matrix symbols SerialCmd lt BCCFG gt Bar Code Configuration Mode can be entered three different ways 1 By forcing the imager into Bar Code Configuration Mode by serial command lt BCCFG gt 2 By configuring one of the 4 EZ Button positions to Bar Code Configuration Mode 3 By reading a Data Matrix symbol with a special code word used by ISO IEC 16022 to signify imager programming This can be either in a regular read cycle or during a read rate test Reading this symbol in the calibration routine will have no effect Once Bar Code Configuration Mode has been entered the Data Matrix symbols can be thought of as serial data You can configure the imager by printing labels in Microscan s serial command format Commands are processed as if the data were streamed in through the serial port The imager will acknowledge the symbol with a beep green flash and echo the serial data to the host If the command causes the imager to produce more serial output such as serial verification or counter requests the data will be routed to the host port Bar Code Configuration Mode can be exited by any reset lt A gt or lt Z gt command as well as a lt J gt or a
343. settings add or remove master symbol data in Master Database and verify or update the imager s Firmware Click the Output Format button to determine the order and content of data output Click the Configuration button to display the second row of ESP icons x ex Configuration x From here you can make changes in the tree controls that can be accessed by clicking the buttons on the second row of icons in the ESP window 2 4 6 2 Communication Read Cycle Symbologies Jo Symbol Quality Matchcode Diagnostics For further details see Microscan ESP Help in the dropdown Help menu Microscan ESP Help Quick Start Help Me About ESP Contacting Microscan Quadrus MINI Velocity User s Manual 1 13 Save Configuration in ESP Step 11 Save Configuration To make changes to a configuration setting in ESP Parameters Communications R5232 422 Host Port Host Protocol Host 422 Status R5232 Auxiliary Port USB HID Report Status 1 Left click on the to expand the desired tree Postamble 2 Double click on the Response Timeout desired parameter LRC Status and click once in the selection box to view ESP Values Host Port Connections 3 Place your cursor in the selection box scroll down to the setting you want to change and click once on the setting a Disabled z Aux Port System Data Status Disabled Enabled opti
344. shutter image sensor 256 Mbit SDRAM capacity Ultra High Density and Standard Density resolution options Software adjustable focus USB RS 232 and RS 422 485 connectivity Support for both linear and 2D symbologies High output LED illumination A multi function EZ Button for location calibration and symbol reading A blue target pattern that identifies the center point of the field of view A green flash visible from all angles to signal a successful read Easy customization for a variety of specific applications About This Manual This manual provides complete information on setting up installing and configuring the imager The chapters are presented in the order in which an imager might be set up and made ready for operation Highlighting Serial commands highlighted command fields and default command settings are highlighted in rust bold Cross references and web links are highlighted in blue bold References to ESP its toolbar headings Communications Read Cycle Symbologies etc menu topics and other points of emphasis are highlighted in Bold Initial Caps Host Communications There are three ways to configure and test the Quadrus MINI Velocity e Microscan s Windows based ESP Easy Setup Program which offers point and click ease of use and visual responses to user adjustments e Serial commands such as lt K100 1 gt that can be sent from ESP s Terminal window or another terminal program EZ Button Q
345. sion 2 dimension tolerance orientation status orientation value gt Frame Information lt K734 output frame number output coordinates gt LED Configuration lt K737 LED mode ISO IEC 16022 grade gt Image Output lt K739 image output mode communication port file format JPEG quality gt Target Flood LEDs lt K750 green flash LED status target pattern LED status green flash duration gt EZ Trax Output lt K757 comm port image mode image format JPEG quality object info output grade output gt Database Identifier Output lt K759 status separator gt EZ Button lt K 770 global status default on power on load configuration database save for power on gt EZ Button Modes Trend Analysis Output 1 lt K771 single beep two beeps three beeps four beeps gt lt K780 trend analysis mode trigger evaluation period number to output on gt Trend Analysis Output 2 Trend Analysis Output 3 lt K781 trend analysis mode trigger evaluation period number to output on gt lt K782 trend analysis mode trigger evaluation period number to output on gt Diagnostic Output 1 lt K790 unused 1 service unit gt Diagnostic Output 2 lt K791 unused 1 service unit gt Diagnostic Output 3 lt K792 unused 1 service unit gt ISO IEC 16022 Symbol Quality Output 1 lt K800 output on symbol contrast symbol contrast threshold output on print growth print growth thr
346. sor hovers over the Document Memo item on the Options menu Insert up to 250 characters to describe this document Type document specific information here Options Preferences Type document specific information here Model Memo Model Memo Similar to Document Memo the information you type in the Model Memo field will appear in a context sensitive text box whenever your cursor hovers over the Model Memo item on the Options menu Memos created in Model Memo are specific to the model enabled when the message was created Insert up to 250 characters to describe this model Type model specific information here Options Preferences Document Memo Model Memo Type model specific information here Note Memos must be saved in a esp file if you want them to available in your next session If you do not save your current session any memos that you have entered during the session will be discarded and will be unavailable in your next session Quadrus MINI Velocity User s Manual 2 11 Autoconnect Autoconnect e If your RS 232 connection attempt fails you can use Autoconnect to establish a connection between the imager and the host Autoconnect Connecting Select the COM Port COM1 Press Start to autoconnect so If your communications port is not the default COM1 use the dropdown menu to change your port Connecting Select the COM
347. st the scroll bars in order to bring the image into view 3 To generate a histogram click and drag your cursor diagonally across the symbol or a portion of the symbol The image will be surrounded by an area of interest box a dashed blue line with red anchor points that can be selected and moved by placing a cursor inside the box and can be resized by clicking and dragging the anchor points good_254_0 60 ms Evaluate Histogram Enable Autothreshold Line Sean Send Threshold Histogram Results Max Light 192 Min Dark 16 Median 68 Mean 67 High Peak 0 Low Peak 34 Variance 646 Number of Pixels 10 6 Quadrus MINI Velocity User s Manual Camera and IP Setup Threshold Histogram Enable Autothreshold is checked by default To adjust the threshold manually 1 Uncheck the Enable Autothreshold box 2 Move the threshold marker vertical green dashed line in the Histogram chart Hint This should be midway between the maximum and minimum curves 3 Click on the Send Threshold button to adopt the new threshold position Quadrus MINI Velocity User s Manual 10 7 Evaluation Line Scan 1 From the Evaluation tab click the Line Scan button A window like that shown below will appear 2 Drag your cursor horizontally across the image This will create a dashed horizontal line Pixel information and a visual representation of the dark and light pixels will be displayed below the image
348. stralia Post symbols Japan Post When Japan Post is enabled lt K460 3 gt the imager will only decode Japan Post symbols Royal Mail When Royal Mail is enabled lt K460 4 gt the imager will only decode Royal Mail symbols KIX When KIX is enabled lt K460 5 gt the imager will only decode KIX symbols UPU When UPU is enabled the imager will decode UPU symbols and any U S Post symbologies that might be enabled For example if Postal Symbology Type is set to UPU and POSTNET Status is enabled and lt K460 6 1 gt the imager will attempt to decode both UPU and POSTNET symbols Quadrus MINI Velocity User s Manual 6 31 Postal Symbologies POSTNET Status Usage Definition Serial Cmd Default Options POSTNET is used by the United States Postal Service to direct mail The ZIP Code or ZIP 4 Code is encoded in the symbol Data is encoded in half height and full height bars making POSTNET a 2 state symbology The delivery point usually the last two digits of the address or post office box number is also typically encoded in POSTNET symbols If U S Post and POSTNET Status are both enabled the imager will decode POSTNET symbols lt K460 postal symbology type POSTNET status PLANET status USPS4CB status POSTNET allow B and B fields Australia Post allow 0 FCC gt Enabled 0 Disabled 1 Enabled PLANET Status Usage Definition Serial Cmd Default Options 6 32 PLANET
349. t For gt lt K704h 3E gt For lt K704h 2C gt See ASCII Character Entry Modifier on page 3 32 for a detailed explanation of how to enter ASCII characters as hex values Decodes per Trigger Status Definition When this feature is enabled the imager enters a state where it processes frames as configured until the end of a read cycle with or without a successful symbol decode When the read cycle ends the imager outputs any decoded symbol data along with the decodes per trigger count Serial Cmd lt K704 separator decodes trigger status gt Default 0 Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled 7 52 Quadrus MINI Velocity User s Manual Configuring EZ Trax Output After you have set up your imager for EZ Trax you can configure the software in three different ways using the EZ Trax interface using the tree controls in ESP and using serial commands I O Parameters For detailed information about how to use the EZ Trax user interface for configuration refer to the Help menu in EZ Trax software or the EZ Trax Quick Start Guide available on the Microscan Tools CD Configuring EZ Trax Output by ESP To configure EZ Trax using ESP first click the I O button in App Mode to display the I O Parameters tree control iLL TL I O p Quadrus MINI Velocity User s Manual Parameters 1 0 Parameters Symbol Data Output Noread Message E e ee E E e e Bad No Symbol Qualifi
350. t Index Positions on Good Reads Calibrate Receive Settings Send Settings Load Curent To Index Load Index To Current Click the Load Current to Index button to save the imager s current configuration parameters to the selected database index 11 16 Quadrus MINI Velocity User s Manual Configuration Database Load Current Settings from Configuration Database Definition Serial Cmd Example lt K255 5 gt Allows the configuration settings contained in a selected database index to be loaded to current active configuration settings lt K255 index gt This command phrase loads the configuration settings contained in database index 5 to current active configuration settings Load Current Settings from Configuration Database by ESP Video Evaluation Calibration WO Active Indexes 5 v Configuration Database Dynamic Setup l IV Auto Sync Database settings with Reader Capture Settings lt lt WOl ROI gt gt Processing Settings Advanced Options Current fio00 20 ca oo E cs MIER 400 Disa 0 0 480 faz A E l lAdapti 128 Adapti Stand Disabl White Code 39 6 fioo 20 400 Disabl fAdapti 128 Stand Disabl white Disabled Test 7 hoo 20 400 Disabl Adapt 128 Stand Disabl White Disabled Test Ce 1000 20 400 Disabl fAdapti 128
351. t K453h 3E gt For lt K453h 2C gt See ASCII Character Entry Modifier on page 3 32 for a detailed explanation of how to enter ASCII characters as hex values Quadrus MINI Velocity User s Manual 6 39 OCR Configuration OCR Configuration Status Definition When OCR Status is Enabled the imager will attempt to locate and decode OCR data in the field of view Serial Cmd lt K461 status active template orientation single row background uncertain characters strip checksum special character passport checksum gt Default Enabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Active Template Definition Active Template allows the user to determine the type of template being used in the OCR application Serial Cmd lt K461 status active template orientation single row background uncertain characters strip checksum special character passport checksum gt Default User Defined Options 0 User Defined 1 Passport 2 ISBN 3 Price Field 4 MICR E 13B 5 User Defined ISBN 6 User Defined Price Field 7 User Defined MICR E 13B User Defined The User Defined template allows the user to define the characteristics of the OCR string in the field of view See the OCR User Template command for more details about how to create a user template Passport The Passport template may be used to read Passports Visas and other official travel documents based on the ICAO standard Passports and Format A Visas
352. t K740 output index start location length gt 0 disabled end of format cell array 1 to n maximum number of characters in the symbol data Quadrus MINI Velocity User s Manual 14 5 Format Assign Format Extract by ESP Parse Symbols Send and Save Y Hide Parse Table Receive Quality Parameters Output BCD Build Sequence Step Insert Data Extract Range Extract 2 4 Sample Symbol Origina ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ Symbol Parse Step Insert Data Extract Range Extract Add Insert Step 2 4 Add Extract Step Remove Step Clear All Parsing Sample Symbol Original ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPGRSTUVWXYZ Output BCD Cancel The Extract Range function corresponds to the Start Location and Length parameters in the Format Extract serial command You can extract and insert several character sequences using ESP s Symbol Parse feature In this example the selected extraction range is characters 2 4 The Sample Symbol example on the Symbol Parse dialog shows the selected character positions extracted and output as desired Simultaneously the data string from the actual selected symbol is displayed at the bottom left of the Parse Table followed by the user defined extracted output 14 6 Quadrus MINI Velocity User s Manual Format Output Format Insert Output Index Definition Seria
353. t for the imager to recognize and decode the Pharmacode symbol Serial Cmd lt K477 status fixed symbol length status fixed symbol length minimum number of bars bar width status direction fixed threshold value gt Default 5 Options 1to16 Minimum Number of Bars Pharmacode Definition Sets the minimum number of bars that a Pharmacode symbol must have to be considered valid Note The minimum allowed bar count is 4 Serial Cmd lt K477 status fixed symbol length status fixed symbol length minimum number of bars bar width status direction fixed threshold value gt Default 2 Options 1to16 4 to 16 Q Mode Quadrus MINI Velocity User s Manual 6 27 Pharmacode Bar Width Status Pharmacode Definition If set to Mixed the imager will autodiscriminate between narrow bars and wide bars If set to All Narrow all bars will be considered as narrow bars If set to All Wide all bars will be considered as wide bars If set to Fixed Threshold it will use the fixed threshold value to determine whether the bars are narrow or wide The Bar Width Status setting will be ignored when the imager is able to tell the difference between the narrow and the wide bars Serial Cmd lt K477 status fixed symbol length status fixed symbol length minimum number of bars bar width status direction fixed threshold value gt Default Mixed Options 0 Mixed 1 All Narrow 2 All Wide 3 Fixed Threshold Direction Pharmacode De
354. t index length hex string gt Format Assign lt K742 symbol number status gt Format Status lt K743 output format status gt Output Filter Configuration lt K744 filter number symbology type length wildcard placeholder data unused database index gt Ordered Output Filter lt K745 number of filters gt 14 2 Quadrus MINI Velocity User s Manual Output Format Output Format Status Definition This is a global enable disable parameter In order to use formatting you must set up the format using the insert and extract commands and you must also assign a symbol to format using the Format Assign command Serial Cmd lt K743 output format status gt Default Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Output Format Status Disabled When Output Format Status is set to Disabled output formatting is globally disabled Output Format Status Enabled When Output Format Status is set to Enabled output formatting is enabled However Format Assign Format Insert and Format Extract must be properly set up as well Output Format Status by ESP 1 1 DATA Click this button and then the Output Format Output Format tab to bring up the Output Format view On the Output Format tab check the Enable Output Format box Ordered Output Output Format Y Enable Output Format V Auto Sync with Reader Set Number of Symbols 1 24 Output Phrase Preamble Symbol 1 Postamble eRe eR r V Enable M
355. t read cycle and initiates a new one when a new trigger occurs New Trigger refers only to a rising edge trigger With External Edge Serial Data or Serial Data or External Edge enabled an edge or serial trigger ends a read cycle and initiates the next read cycle In the case of External Level a falling edge trigger ends the read cycle but the next read cycle does not begin until the occurrence of the next rising edge trigger Timeout or New Trigger Usage Useful in applications that require an alternative way to end the read cycle For example if an assembly line should stop completely or the intervals between objects are highly irregular Definition Timeout or New Trigger is identical to Timeout except that a timeout ora new trigger whichever occurs first ends the read cycle Last Frame Usage Useful in applications in which the number of captures needed can be defined but the timeout duration varies Definition Last Frame only applies to Rapid Capture Mode Last Frame or New Trigger Usage Useful in applications in which line speeds are irregular and a new labelled object could appear before the last frame in a Rapid Capture sequence Definition Last Frame or New Trigger is identical to New Trigger except that a new trigger or last frame whichever occurs first ends the read cycle Read Cycle Timeout Definition Read Cycle Timeout is the duration of the read cycle Serial Cmd lt K220 end of read cycle read cycle
356. tch occurs Quadrus MINI Velocity User s Manual 7 19 Output Indicators Static Presentation Mode Static Presentation Mode is used in conjunction with Continuous Read Mode lt K200 0 gt When operating in Static Presentation Mode the red LEDs will illuminate while the imager is searching for a symbol in Continuous Read Mode When a symbol is placed in the field of view and a good read occurs the green LEDs will illuminate and stay on for the duration of time set in Green Flash Duration Only one read will occur during that time unless more than one symbol is enabled in Number of Symbols Note If Static Presentation Mode is selected but the imager is not in Continuous Read the Green Flash will not occur To use Static Presentation 1 Enable Continuous Read 2 Select the number of symbols 3 Enable Static Presentation in Green Flash Mode 4 Select the read time in Green Flash Duration Match The green LEDs will flash when a match condition is met If multisymbol is enabled then green flash LEDs will illuminate only if all symbols qualify as a match If matchcode is disabled then this mode will activate the LEDs on a good read Mismatch Same as Match except that LEDs will illuminate on a mismatch Strobe Green flash LEDs will act as an illumination strobe for image capture If it is required that the green flash LEDs be the only illumination for image capture then the internal illumination LEDs can be disabled 7 2
357. te data as well as kanji and kana characters Up to 7 366 characters numeric data can be encoded using this symbol Therefore less space is required to encode the same amount of data in a QR Code symbol than in a conventional symbol lowering the cost of labelling Three Position Detection Patterns in the symbol make omnidirectional ultra fast reading possible QR Code has error protection capacity Data can often be restored even if a part of the symbol has become dirty or damaged lt K480 status gt Disabled 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Quadrus MINI Velocity User s Manual 6 7 Micro QR Code Micro QR Code Note Micro QR Code is only supported when Q Mode is enabled Usage Used in various applications that require higher data density than that provided by standard QR Code Some application examples are automotive inventory vehicle ID and mobile phone URL encodation Definition Micro QR Code is a 2D matrix symbology that comes in 4 different symbol sizes the largest capable of encoding 35 numeric characters Serial Cmd lt K459 status gt Default Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled 6 8 Quadrus MINI Velocity User s Manual Symbologies Code 39 Usage Code 39 is considered the standard for non retail 1D symbology Definition An alphanumeric symbology with unique start stop code patterns composed of 9 black and white elements per character of which 3 are wide Serial Cmd lt K470 status check character st
358. tect Options 0 Regular Image 1 Mirrored Image 2 Both auto detect normal mirrored Regular Image When Regular Image is enabled images will be processed as they appear upon capture Mirrored Image When Mirrored Image is enabled images will be processed as a reverse of the captured image Both Regular and Mirrored When Both is enabled regular and mirrored images will be processed 10 28 Quadrus MINI Velocity User s Manual Camera and IP Setup Illumination Brightness Definition This feature allows the user to adjust the brightness of the illumination LEDs Since the imager has control over the brightness of the illumination it can provide consistent brightness output between imagers through a factory calibration operation Each of the brightness settings is calibrated to provide the same level of intensity for each imager Usage lt K536 brightness gt Default High Options 0 Off 1 Low 2 Medium 3 High 4 Constant Constant When set to Constant the illumination is the same as the Medium setting However the LEDs will always be on during a read cycle and will only be off between read cycles This cuts down on perceptible LED flashing Quadrus MINI Velocity User s Manual 10 29 Illumination Brightness 10 30 Quadrus MINI Velocity User s Manual MS 17 Configuration Database Contents Configuration Database Serial COMMANAS ocoocccnncccnncinoccnonccnnnnnoncc non nnanc conc nr anna
359. ted by a trigger and can be in the form of a serial command from the host internal trigger or a signal from an object detector external trigger When an object detector also called a sensor package detector etc is used it is set up so that its beam will bounce off the approaching object and the resulting pulse will be sent to the imager to begin the read cycle Typically a detector is positioned so that it will detect the presence of an object before its symbol can be read An object detector is mounted in almost any position relative to the object as long as the object passes within range of the detector and direct or reflected light from the detector does not interfere with the imager s reception As the item continues to move down the line its symbol moves into the imager beam and is decoded Object and Symbol Object and Symbol Imager A 24 Quadrus MINI Velocity User s Manual Appendices Appendix H Operational Tips Cleaning The Quadrus MINI Velocity has a hard coated window that should only be cleaned with alcohol 100 isopropyl Mounting When mounting the Quadrus MINI Velocity do not insulate the stand mount The bottom panel is the hottest part of the imager and metal to metal contact is necessary for heat dissipation Quadrus MINI Velocity User s Manual A 25 USB to Serial Virtual COM Port Driver Appendix USB to Serial Virtual COM Port Driver For use with Windows Vista
360. ter gap fixed symbol length status fixed symbol length full ASCII set gt Codabar lt K471 status start stop match start stop output large intercharacter gap fixed symbol length status symbol length check character type check character output gt Interleaved 2 of 5 lt K472 status check character status check character output status symbol length 1 symbol length 2 guard bar status range mode status gt UPC EAN lt K473 UPC status EAN status supplementa status separator status separator character supplemental type format UPC E as UPC A gt Code 128 EAN 128 lt K474 status fixed symbol length status fixed symbol length EAN 128 status output format application record separator status application record separator character application record brackets application record padding gt Code 93 lt K475 status fixed symbol length status symbol length gt PDF417 lt K476 status unused fixed symbol length status fixed symbol length unused codeword collection gt Pharmacode lt K477 status fixed bar count status fixed bar count minimum bar count bar width mode direction fixed threshold value gt Data Matrix lt K479 ECC 200 status ECC 000 status ECC 050 status ECC 080 status ECC 100 status ECC 140 status ECC 120 status ECC 130 status gt QR Code lt K480 status gt BC412 lt K481 status check character output fixed symbol length status fixed symbol length gt D
361. the read cycle ends with a timeout or new trigger Start of read cycle End of read cycle ie Read cycle duration Host This is when host activates trigger expects output Quadrus MINI Velocity User s Manual I O Parameters No Read Message Usage Used in applications where the host needs serial verification that a symbol has not been read and especially useful in new print verification Definition When enabled and if no symbol has been decoded before timeout or the end of the read cycle the No Read message will be transmitted to the host No Read Message Mode Serial Cmd lt K714 No Read message status No Read message gt Default Enabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled 2 Detailed No Read Message Disabled Only symbol data is output after a read cycle Enabled When the imager is in a triggered mode a No Read message will be appended for each failed read attempt Detailed No Read Message Important In the case where the conditions set in Bad Symbol No Symbol Qualification are met then the Bad Symbol or No Symbol message output will override the No Read Message or the Detailed No Read Message if either is enabled Note Detailed No Read Message is not supported when Q Mode is enabled Usage Use this option to cover more detailed reasons for decode failures Definition Outputs a No Read message followed by an additional message an Image Processing Results Code indicating the reason a symbol fa
362. tial report is also shown in this viewing area E For Help press F1 Quadrus MINI Velocity User s Manual v gt CONNECTED Point to Point Symbol Quality by ESP Locate Tab The Locate tab allows the user to determine the position of the symbol within the imager s field of view and to optimize the imager s camera settings for symbol quality evaluation ESP ESP Untitled DER Fie Model Options Connect View Help Y gt a El DA EZ Mode Autoconnect Send Recy Switch Model Configuration Camera Terminal Utilities Output Format a or amp A a B Communication Read Cycle Symbologies Symbol Quality Matchcode Parameters ESP Jase Symbol Quality Global i Locate Calibrate Total Read Time Click the Locate e Click the Calibrate Qual Le El ma y Separator button to display the I Contrast button to optimize symbol in the camera settings Data Matrix ee Report Locate Preferences V Show Tree Control ISO IEC 16022 Parameters Mager s field of view Grading v For Help press Fl CONNECTED Point to Point 8 6 Quadrus MINI Velocity User s Manual Preferences Tab The Preferences tab allows the user to set defaults that are automatically activated when grading is completed For this reason the user is advised to set preferences before performing grading Symbol Quality Report Locate Preferences
363. til the opposite condition selected under Output On has been met For example if No Read is enabled under Output On the programmable output will go active on a No Read and remain active until the opposite condition a good read occurs Latch Mode 3 Unlatch Re enter Read Cycle The programmable output is active when the Output On condition has been met and is held active until a new read cycle begins Note All of the Output On modes are inhibited when any Output on Warning is active for Output 1 7 34 Quadrus MINI Velocity User s Manual I O Parameters Trend Analysis Output 1 Note Output On under Output 1 Parameters must be set to Trend Analysis for this output to function Output 1 Parameters Output On Trend Analysis Under Output 1 Parameters expand the Trend Analysis tree Trend Analysis Trend Analysis Mode Noread Number of Triggers 25 Number to Output On 4 Decodes per Trigger 1 Usage Useful in cases where the user doesn t want to shut down for one condition but wants to monitor quality and read conditions Definition Applies Trend Analysis settings to Output 1 With Trend Analysis the user can track the occurrences and frequency of mismatches No Reads and the number of reads per trigger and output the results to any of three outputs Example Trend Analysis Mode No Read Trigger Evaluation Period 25 triggers read cycles Number to Output On 4 In this example the imager will activate a
364. timing lt K241 capture mode number of captures rapid capture mode pre processing gt Timed Capture 0 Timed Capture 1 Triggered Capture Quadrus MINI Velocity User s Manual Timed Capture Read Cycle Usage Timed Rapid Capture is useful in fast moving applications in which symbols are only in the field of view for a short time and precise timing is required Definition In Timed Rapid Capture decoding occurs independent of and simultaneous with capturing thus allowing precise timing or no delay at all between captures Also consecutive captures are regarded as the same symbol if the output data is the same Start of Read Cycle No Time Delay Between Captures Diagram A Time Before First Capture End of a a gt read cycle Time Delay Between Captures Diagram B Po p End of Pr See aS Se read cycle y Processing Quadrus MINI Velocity User s Manual 5 19 Triggered Capture Usage Useful in applications where each decode must be treated as a discrete event regardless of symbol data Definition The first trigger event starts the read cycle and subsequent triggers will continue until the predetermined Number of Captures is met or until the predetermined End of Read Cycle condition is met whichever occurs first Note If End of Read Cycle is set for New Trigger and the read cycle qualifications have not been met the
365. to either DISABLED or ENABLED the imager will only read non stacked DataBar Expanded symbols Quadrus MINI Velocity User s Manual 11 9 Configuration Database Status Micro QR Code Add 65536 If enabled Micro QR Code will be active for this database index Note Micro QR Code is only supported when Q Mode is enabled Aztec Code Add 131072 If enabled Aztec Code will be active for this database index Note Aztec Code is only supported when Q Mode is enabled Postal Symbologies Add 262144 If enabled Postal Symbologies will be active for this database index Note Postal Symbologies are only supported when Q Mode is enabled OCR Add 524288 If enabled OCR will be active for this database index 11 10 Quadrus MINI Velocity User s Manual Configuration Database Database Mode Switch Mode Definition Selects the event that causes the imager to load the next database entry to current active settings When Frame Count Time expires and Image Process Looping is enabled the next database entry with modifications to camera settings will be used Note The image capture event always occurs when the first database entry is used Note The Switch Mode seiting has no effect on Rapid Capture Mode which always operates in Number of Image Frames mode with a frame count of 1 Serial Cmd lt K256 switch mode frame count time image process looping image dimensions gt Default 1 Options 0 Time 1 Number of Image Frames
366. tore images for later viewing Store on No Read This option will cause the imager to store an image upon exiting the read cycle for retrieval at a later time If multiple captures are present during the duration of a read cycle the stored image will be the last image processed for that read cycle This image is stored in RAM and can be retrieved as long as power is cycled to the imager and as long as the imager has not been reset via a reset save sequence Other commands that can initialize storage in RAM are ones that change capture modes or put the imager in a test capture mode Image Storage Mode Serial Cmd lt K244 image storage type image storage mode gt Default First Mode Options 0 First Mode 1 Last Mode First Mode This mode allows the imager to store images until the available image memory has been filled At that point the imager will stop saving additional images In this mode you will always have the first image captured because the saving process stops once memory has been filled Last Mode In this mode image storage continues after available memory limits are reached The oldest image in memory is overwritten so you will always have the most recent stored image Quadrus MINI Velocity User s Manual 5 25 Image Storage Image Storage Example The following example assumes that the imager is in a rapid capture mode of 3 captures Number of Symbols Frame 1 Frame 2 Frame 3 Read Cycle Result
367. ty User s Manual 3 29 USB HID Interface USB HID Configuration Options The user has the following options for configuring and defaulting a USB version of the Quadrus MINI Velocity Configuration Symbols Data Matrix with Configure Reader Flag Symbol configuration can be performed out of the box as the Quadrus MINI Velocity is configured for Continuous Read Mode and Data Matrix is enabled by default Data Matrix symbols are used to encode configuration commands when the symbology s configure reader flag is set If the read cycle is changed or if Data Matrix is disabled another configuration default method must be used This is because the USB Quadrus MINI Velocity has no external trigger unless the user has configured the EZ Button as a trigger EZ Button Configuration By default basic calibration can be initiated from the EZ Button 3 beeps Note that this only changes the camera image processing and symbology settings of the imager To default the USB Quadrus MINI Velocity hold down the EZ Button during power on Note This only overwrites Power On settings with Custom Default settings as when the lt Zrc gt command is received It does not overwrite Power On settings with Factory Defaults as when the lt Zrd gt command is received If Custom Defaults are misconfigured another method must be used to default the imager Implementing the Host Operating System API and Establishing a Connection with the
368. u aiii 7 48 Database Identifier Output ooooocccnnccinccconccnonnnnccnoncnnnrnannncrnncconcnnnnc ronca 7 51 Quality QUIDUE soe ccicd 2h emocione dio a didas L aedao 7 52 Configuring EZ Trax Output coooconcccinccnoccconccnonnnancnonnnnnnnnnnn cronica 7 53 Chapter 8 Symbol Quality Symbol Quality Serial COMMANdS ooococncccinconncccnnccnonnnannconcnnnrncnncnnncnnos 8 2 Overview of Symbol Quality ooooncccnncconnccncconocccancconccnnnnnana nono ncnrnnnnnc cnn 8 3 Symbol Quality by ESP ruidos an aos 8 4 Symbol Quality Separator Data Matrix Output Mode oooocconcccnnciccccconcos 8 8 vi Quadrus MINI Velocity User s Manual Introduction ISO IEC 16022 Symbol Quality Output 0 0 ee eee eee eeeeeeeeeteeeteeeeneeetaes 8 10 ISO IEC 16022 Symbol Quality Output by ESP 0 0 ee eeeeeeeeeeeereeeee 8 12 Microscan Symbol Quality Output ooooocccocccoocncocononnconnnoonnonnnnonononnnonnnnos 8 13 Microscan Symbol Quality Output by ESP ooococncccinccincccoccconccnnncnnnnnnnnnns 8 16 Chapter 9 Matchcode Matchcode by ESP anal neice 9 2 Matchcode Serial COMMANAS eccceeceeseeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeteeeteaeenaes 9 3 Overview of Matchcode ooooonccccocococcconccnonnconccnonc conc crono cnn rnn crac rn 9 4 Matchcode VPO iaa 9 5 Match Replace ienis useine a lc cti eae 9 10 Mismatch Replace coccion ita 9 11 New Master Plica ainda ai 9 12 Chapter 10 Camera and IP Setup Camera and IP Setup by ESP ooconcccnccccnccnoncnonnnoncnoncnnnn nono nc
369. uadrus MINI Velocity User s Manual Matchcode Mismatch Replace Usage Provides a convenient shortcut for applications that need to output a predefined text string whenever a symbol does not match a master symbol Definition Outputs a user defined data string whenever a mismatch occurs and Matchcode is enabled Serial Cmd lt K736 status replacement string gt Default Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Replacement String Definition User defined data string that when enabled replaces symbol data whenever a mismatch occurs Serial Cmd lt K736 sitatus replacement string gt Default MISMATCH Options An ASCII string up to 64 characters Important The ASCII characters lt gt and can only be entered as hex pairs For lt lt K736h 3C gt For gt lt K736h 3E gt For lt K736h 2C gt See ASCII Character Entry Modifier on page 3 32 for a detailed explanation of how to enter ASCII characters as hex values Quadrus MINI Velocity User s Manual 9 11 New Master Pin New Master Pin Definition Serial Cmd Default Options If Matchcode and New Master Pin are enabled and the new master pin is momentarily connected to ground must be held low for a minimum of 10 ms master symbol information will be loaded into the database based on the next read cycle that achieves a Good Read starting with Index 1 The Master Symbol Database will be loaded with all symbols decoded in the read cycle a
370. uadrus MINI Velocity User s Manual ix Warning and Caution Summary Warning and Caution Summary 7 WARNING LED LIGHT DO NOT VIEW DIRECTLY WITH OPTICAL INSTRUMENTS CLASS 1 LED PRODUCT LED Output 564 mW Wavelength 470 nm 525 nm 617 nm IEC 60825 1 1993 A1 1997 A2 2001 e Viewing the Quadrus MINI Velocity s LED output with optical instruments such as magnifiers eye loupes or microscopes within a distance of 100 mm could cause serious eye injury Maximum LED output 564 mW e Wavelength 470 nm 525 nm 617 nm e Location of the Quadrus MINI Velocity s LED aperture window LED Aperture Window CAUTION Use of controls or adjustments or performance of procedures other than those specified herein may result in hazardous radiation exposure IMPORTANT The Quadrus MINI Velocity is intended for connection to a UL listed direct plug in power unit marked Class Il and rated 5 VDC at 3 5 Watts or greater if using electrical accessories European models must use a similarly rated Class or Class ll power supply that is certified to comply with safety standard EN 60950 x Quadrus MINI Velocity User s Manual Introduction Statement of Agency Compliance FE The Quadrus MINI Velocity has been tested for compliance with FCC Federal Communications Commission regulations and has been found to conform to all applicable FCC Rules and Regulations To comply with FCC RF exposure compliance requirements this dev
371. um special character passport checksum gt Disabled 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Quadrus MINI Velocity User s Manual Symbologies OCR User Template Length Definition Length defines the number of hex values in the template string Important The template string must include a NULL 00 terminator Serial Cmd lt K462 length template string gt Default 11 Options 0 190 Template String Definition A Template String defines an arrangement of OCR characters that will be decoded when they are in the field of view User templates must be a NULL terminated data string made up of various control codes along with standard ASCII values The control codes are assigned to ASCII values less than 32 The default template defines a string of eight alphanumeric OCR A or OCR B characters Serial Cmd lt K462 ength template string gt Default 0103070707070707070700 Options A string of Hex values Each value can range from 00 FF Examples DGOPQUVU lt K462 11 0103070707070707070700 gt eight OCR A or OCR B characters 123457 lt K462 9 010307070707070700 gt six alphanumeric OCR A or OCR B characters lt K462 9 010105050505050500 gt six numeric OCR A characters lt K462 5 0101050E0600 gt six numeric OCR A characters repeating ABDEFGHI lt K462 11 0101070707070707070700 gt eight OCR A characters JKLMIOP lt K462 10 01010707070707070700 gt seven OCR A characters ARSUVU lt K462 9 010107070707070700 gt six
372. umber of bars minimum number of qualified scan lines start stop status gt Default 0 Options 0 to 255 0 disabled Minimum Number of Qualified Scan Lines Definition Sets the minimum number of scans that have the required number of bars set in Minimum Number of Bars Note This is a percentage value from 0 to 100 Serial Cmd lt K717 minimum number of bars minimum number of qualified scan lines start stop status gt Default Disabled Options 0 to 100 0 disabled Start Stop Status Definition When enabled both Start and Stop characters need to be present to qualify as a decodable symbol In the case of PDF417 only a Stop needs to be present Note This parameter does not apply to UPC GS1 DataBar RSS MicroPDF417 or Pharmacode Serial Cmd lt K717 minimum number of bars minimum number of qualified scan lines start stop status gt Default Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Quadrus MINI Velocity User s Manual 7 11 2D Symbology Qualification 2D Symbology Qualification Note 2D Symbology Qualification is not supported when Q Mode is enabled Note In the cases where Symbol Size Status Dimension Status or Orientation Status is enabled the imager will always check the finder pattern regardless of Finder Patter Status setting Finder Pattern Status Definition Checks for the presence of a finder pattern Serial Cmd lt K718 finder pattern status symbol size mode symbol size 1 symbol
373. useful in testing symbol readability or reader functions It is not recommended for normal operations Definition In Continuous Read trigger input options are disabled the imager is always in the read cycle and it will attempt to decode and transmit every capture If a single symbol stays within read range for multiple read cycles its data will be transmitted repeatedly until it leaves the read range The imager sends replies to serial commands that require responses when symbol data is transmitted or read cycle timeout is enabled and a timeout occurs and at least one captured image has been processed Depending on the combination of enabled symbologies and the Threshold Mode setting the imager may take longer than the timeout to process a captured image Note When to Output and No Read options have no affect on Continuous Read Serial Cmd lt K200 0 gt 5 6 Quadrus MINI Velocity User s Manual Read Cycle Continuous Read 1 Output Usage Continuous Read 1 Output can be useful in applications where it is not feasible to use a trigger and all succeeding symbols contain different information It is also effective in applications where the objects are presented by hand Definition In Continuous Read 1 Output the imager self triggers whenever it decodes a new symbol or a timeout occurs If End of Read Cycle is set to Timeout and the symbol doesn t change the output is repeated at the end of each timeout period For example if
374. valuation Explanation of Modifiers for Code 39 Codabar and 2 5 Explanation of Modifiers for Other Symbologies External Edge External Level External Trigger Polarity Extract Range EZ Button EZ Button Configuration EZ Button Modes EZ Button Operation EZ Button Trigger EZ Mode EZ Trax Output F Falling Edge Fast Linear Mode Fast Linear Mode FLM Direction Fast Shutter Field Programmable Gate Array File File Format Fill Factor Filter Number Find Find Next Find Previous Finder Pattern Status Fine Tune Pass Firmware Firmware by ESP Firmware Update Firmware Verification First Mode FIS Options Five Characters Only Fixed Symbol Length Fixed Symbol Length Fixed Symbol Length Fixed Symbol Length Fixed Symbol Length BC412 Code 128 EAN 128 Code 39 DataBar Expanded Saf or ns p 8 Quadrus MINI Velocity User s Manual F Fixed Symbol Length MicroPDF417 Fixed Symbol Length PDF417 Fixed Symbol Length Pharmacode Fixed Symbol Length Status BC412 Fixed Symbol Length Status Codabar Fixed Symbol Length Status Code 128 EAN 128 Fixed Symbol Length Status Code 39 Fixed Symbol Length Status Code 93 Fixed Symbol Length Status DataBar Expanded Fixed Symbol Length Status MicroPDF417 Fixed Symbol Length Status PDF417 Fixed Symbol Length Status Pharmacode Fixed Threshold Value Fixed Threshold Value Configuration Database Fixed Threshold Value Pharmacode Focal Distan
375. ved to a read cycle record There is an exception to this rule however when the number of symbols required for a read cycle exceeds the number of active filters In such a case unfiltered symbols can be placed into unfiltered output positions For example if the number of symbols required is 6 but there are only 4 active filters the last 2 positions can be filled by any unfiltered qualified symbol Output Filter Configuration Rule 2 The same filter setup can be used multiple times For example filters 1 2 and 3 can be set up to filter Data Matrix symbols and the output will occur in the order the symbols are decoded Output Filter Configuration Rule 3 All qualified symbols will be sorted and output in the matching filter position If a symbol matches filter 3 it will be output as the third symbol If a filter does not have a matching qualified symbol a No Read message will be output in place of the symbol assuming the No Read message is enabled For example if there is not a symbol that meets filter 3 s requirements then a No Read message will be output in the third output position Quadrus MINI Velocity User s Manual 14 9 Output Filter Configuration Filter Number Definition Serial Cmd Options This is the filter index number that represents the position of the symbol in the data output at the end of the read cycle This index number should be entered along with the following filter settings for the pre
376. vertical number of pixels height by the horizontal number of pixels width leaving it in fractional format Automatic Gain Control AGC Adjustment to signal strength that seeks to maintain a constant level regardless of the distance between a reader and symbol Auxiliary Port RS 232 connection to an auxiliary terminal or device for remote viewing Blooming A situation in which too many photons are being produced to be received by a pixel The pixel overflows and causes the photons to go to adjacent pixels Blooming is similar to overexposure in film photography except that in digital imaging the result is a number of vertical and or horizontal streaks appearing from the light source in the picture Baud Rate The number of discrete signal events per second bits per second Capture The act of acquiring and storing video images in an imager or host computer Also the image captured CCD See Charge Coupled Device Quadrus MINI Velocity User s Manual A 29 Glossary of Terms Charge Coupled Device CCD A semiconductor device with an array of light sensitive elements that converts light images into electrical signals Check Character A Modulus 43 or Modulus 10 character that is added to encoded symbol data for additional data integrity CMOS See Complementary Metal Oxide Semiconductor Complementary Metal Oxide Semiconductor CMOS Like CCDs CMOS imagers include an array of photo sensitive diodes on
377. y User s Manual 3 9 Auxiliary Port Connections Auxiliary Port Connections The auxiliary port offers an alternative port that can be configured to communicate by RS 232 in several modes including daisy chain As with the host port parameters the auxiliary port settings baud rate parity stop bits and data bits must be identical with those of the auxiliary device Usage An auxiliary port connects the imager to a remote display or to other readers that can display or transfer data Definition These commands set the communication parameters with the auxiliary port which can be used to configure menus send data to the host display data transmissions originating from the host and relay data from other imagers set in tandem daisy chained Auxiliary Port Mode Usage Can be used to transfer data faster or to match an auxiliary device Definition Determines the flow of data between the auxiliary port device s the imager and the host Serial Cmd lt K101 aux port mode baud rate parity stop bits data bits daisy chain i d status daisy chain i d gt Default Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Transparent 2 Half duplex 3 Full duplex 4 Daisy chain 5 Command Processing Baud Rate Auxiliary Port Usage Can be used to transfer data faster or to match an auxiliary device Definition The rate at which the imager and host transfer data back and forth Serial Cmd lt K101 aux port mode baud rate parity stop bit
378. ycle Target Pattern Open Image after Save Open Save Operational Tips Optics Options Ordered Output Filter Orientation Mode Orientation of OCR String Orientation Value Other Operational Serial Commands Output Output 1 Pulse Output 2 Pulse Output 3 Pulse Quadrus MINI Velocity User s Manual Index 15 P Output Coordinates Output Filter Configuration Output Filter Configuration Rule 1 Output Filter Configuration Rule 2 Output Filter Configuration Rule 3 Output Format Output Format Code 128 EAN 128 Output Format Serial Commands Output Format Status Output Format Status by ESP Output Format Status Disabled Output Format Status Enabled Output Frame Number Output Index Output Indicators Output Mode Output on Axial Non Uniformity Output on Print Growth Output on Symbol Contrast Output on Unused Error Correction Output State Output Status Output Symbol Data as Soon as Possible Output Symbol Data at End of Read Cycle Overview of Matchcode Overview of Symbol Quality P Parameter Switch Parity Parity Auxiliary Port Parity Host Port Parse Table Passport Passport Checksum Paste Pause PDF417 PDF417 Add 512 Percent Cell Damage Data Matrix Only Pharmacode Pharmacode Add 4096 Picket Fence Orientation Pitch 16 Quadrus MINI Velocity User s Manual P Pixel Pixel Binning Pixel Binning Configuration Database Pixel Binning 16 to 1 Pixel Binning 4 to 1 Pix
379. ymbol contrast symbol contrast threshola output on print growth print growth threshold output on axial non uniformity axial non uniformity threshold output on UEC UEC threshold gt ISO IEC 16022 Symbol Quality Output 2 lt K801 output on symbol contrast symbol contrast threshold output on print growth print growth threshold output on axial non uniformity axial non uniformity threshola output on UEC UEC threshold gt ISO IEC 16022 Symbol Quality Output 3 lt K802 output on symbol contrast symbol contrast threshola output on print growth print growth threshold output on axial non uniformity axial non uniformity threshola output on UEC UEC threshold gt Configurable Output 1 lt K810 output on output state pulse width output mode gt Configurable Output 2 lt K811 output on output state pulse width output mode gt Configurable Output 3 Quadrus MINI Velocity User s Manual lt K812 output on output state pulse width output mode gt Symbol Data Output Symbol Data Output Symbol Data Output Status Note Symbol Data Output relates to data and should not be confused with Outputs 1 2 and 3 listed in the Output Parameters which describe output states and functions Usage Definition Serial Cmd Default Options Disabled Usage Definition Match Usage Definition Mismatch Usage Definition Useful when the host needs symbol data only under certain conditions
380. ymbol data 2 Click the Read Symbol into Selected Index button Caution If you ve selected an index which already has existing data that data will be copied over by new decoded data when you use this command Request New Master Status Usage Informs the user when a new master symbol is pending and which position it is in Definition Returns the position in the master symbol database that will be loaded on the next read Serial Cmd lt NEWM gt The imager returns lt NEWM next master to load gt Once a symbol has been read and loaded the status will be cleared and the response will be lt NEWM 0 gt See also New Master Pin in Chapter 9 Matchcode Quadrus MINI Velocity User s Manual 13 13 Delete Master Symbol Data Definition You can directly delete the master symbol data by serial command or by ESP ESP 1 Click the Utilities button to access the master symbol 2 Click the Master Database tab and double click the symbol number you want to delete 3 Delete text and click OK Serial Cmd lt K231 master symbol number gt To delete a master symbol enter the database number and a comma but leave the data field empty For example to delete master symbol 5 send the following lt K231 5 gt The command is entered with a blank master symbol data field which tells the imager to delete the selected master symbol from the database 13 14 Quadrus MINI Velocity User s Manual Utilities Firmware Firmware by ES
381. ymbology or RSS DataBar Expanded RSS Expanded Note DataBar Expanded was previously known as RSS Expanded Usage Used to encode primary and supplementary data in retail point of sale and other applications Definition DataBar Expanded is a variable length symbology that can encode supplementary information in addition to the 14 digit EAN item identification number and is capable of encoding up to 74 numeric or 41 alphabetic characters Serial Cmd lt K484 status fixed symbol length status fixed symbol length gt Default Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled non stacked 2 Enabled stacked and non stacked Where appropriate use 1 non stacked for better performance over 2 stacked and non stacked Fixed Symbol Length Status DataBar Expanded Definition When enabled the imager will check the symbol length against the symbol length field minus the embedded check character If disabled any length would be considered valid Serial Cmd lt K484 status fixed symbol length status fixed symbol length gt Default Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Fixed Symbol Length DataBar Expanded Usage Fixed Symbol Length helps prevent truncations and increases data integrity by ensuring that only one symbol length will be accepted Definition Specifies the exact number of characters that the imager will recognize this does not include start stop and check character characters The imager i
382. ypically obtained during the calibration process and do not necessarily need to be modified directly by the user Optics The Quadrus MINI Velocity has two different optical configurations available Standard Density and Ultra High Density Ultra High Density and Standard Density Optics 4 Focal Distance Shutter Speed Usage Faster shutter speeds reduce blurring in faster applications Slower shutter speeds are useful in slower applications and lower contrast applications Definition Sets the exposure or integration time for the image sensor pixels The shutter speed setting in relation to the speed of the object is critical If a slow shutter speed is selected to capture fast moving objects blurring or smearing of the image will occur As shutter speed is increased more light and gain become necessary because the pixels exposure time has decreased Serial Cmd lt K541 shutter speed gain gt Default 1000 Options 15 to 20 000 Gain Usage Can be used to adjust the brightness of the image Definition Sets the gain value for the image sensor This setting can be configured through calibration which is the recommended method A higher gain value will increase the brightness of the image but the image will be noisier Important Shutter Speed should be adjusted before Gain Serial Cmd lt K541 shutter speed gain gt Default 20 Options 0 to 33 Quadrus MINI Velocity User s Manual 10 17 Focal Distance
383. ze 2 symbol size tolerance dimension mode dimension 1 dimension 2 dimension tolerance orientation mode orientation value gt 0 0 to 359 Note A symbol s orientation can miss the precise Orientation Value by several degrees and still be qualified To be certain of the extent of the allowable tolerance you should experiment with symbols in various orientations In no case can they be more than 45 from the assigned orientation value and still be qualified Quadrus MINI Velocity User s Manual 7 17 Read Duration Output Read Duration Output Usage Useful in evaluating actual read cycle timing results especially when initially setting up an application to determine maximum line speed obtainable based on spacing between symbols Definition When enabled the duration of the read cycle in milliseconds is appended to the symbol data The read duration is the time from the beginning of the read cycle until data is output Read Duration Output Mode Serial Cmd lt K706 status separator gt Default Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Important To measure the entire read cycle when in External Level trigger mode set When to Output Symbol Data to End of Read Cycle This output can measure over 49 days worth of duration if exceeded the OVERFLOW message will be output in place of the duration Read Duration Output Separator Definition User defined character that separates the symbol information from th

Quadrus MINI Velocity User`s Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents